Service Sharp MX-M266N

1
: 15/Aug.
: 16/Jun.
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM316/S3E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
1
MX-M356N/M356U
MX-M266N/M316N/M265N/M315N
MX-M265U/M315U
MX-M266N A/M316N A/M365N A 2
MODEL MX-M265NE/M315NE
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1]
PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5]
ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6]
SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7]
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8]
FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9]
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used

for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

2. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
3. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii
4. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

[7]
1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
8. Relation between model names and names

in the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
PRODUCT OUTLINE
4. Dial tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

[8]
SPECIFICATIONS
[9]
MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
2. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2. Other related items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
4. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

5. FAX function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
6. Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
7. Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
3. Automatic document feeder and document glass . . . . 4-3
4. I/F connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
5. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
6. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
7. Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
8. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
9. Solenoid/Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
10. Drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
11. Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
12. Fan/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
13. PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
14. Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
[5]
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

3. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
[4]
FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
[3]
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the developing unit . . . iii
1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2]
SIMULATION
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
[1]
[6]
1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
3. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
1. Disassembly and Assembly table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
2. Disassembly and assembly of each unit . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. RSPF section (31opm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
3. RSPF section (56opm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
4. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
5. Manual paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
6. Paper registration section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
7. Paper feed tray section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
8. Paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
9. Duplex section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
10. OPC drum section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
11. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
12. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
13. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
14. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
15. Fan and Filter section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
[13] OTHERS
1. HDD/SD card memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD and the
SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
3. HDD/SD card SIM format operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
4. SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
5. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
6. TOOL LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
It may cause
an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
Service
Manual
MX-M316N
NOTE FOR SERVICING
* Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.

* About a main unit illustration, it may differ from a target model.
1. Precautions for servicing
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forcibly bend, or pull the power cord.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
* When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except
when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
* There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use
extreme care when servicing.
It may cause a burn.
* There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
* Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
* When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections.
* Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside
the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury.
* When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
* Keep the power cable away from a heat source.

Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
* Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the
machine.
* Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the
machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily
hands.
It may cause an electric shock.
3. Note for installing site

Do not install the machine at the following sites.
* Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature,
low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature
and humidity.
Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,
causing paper jam or copy dirt.
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
described later.
* The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to damage fingers when servicing.
* Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner
may ignite and burn you.
* When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the specified replacement battery.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a
machine malfunction or breakdown.
* Place of extreme vibrations

It may cause a breakdown.
* When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it,

be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
(200V series only)
2. Warning for servicing

* Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
* If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
* Poorly ventilated place

An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as
not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a
machine may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a
well ventilated place.

* Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
* When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the following points.
- Gas tube
- Lightning conductor
- A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
- Grounding wire for telephone line
MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i
* Place of direct sunlight.

Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
undergo qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems.
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic

parts
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against damage by static electricity.
* When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
* Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue
print machine may result in poor quality output.
* When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),
use an earth band as shown below:
* Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.
* Place of much dust

When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a
breakdown or poor quality output.
* Place near a wall

The machine will require ventilation.
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may
result.
* When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16"
(30cm)
11-13/16"
(30cm)
17-23/32"
(45cm)
* Unstable or irregular surface

If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.
MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii
: 15/Aug.
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU

When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following
items.
Screw kinds and tightening torques

Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
* When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the

power plug from the power outlet.
Screw
diameter
Material to be
fixed
* When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures

described in this Service Manual.
M2.6
M3
M4
Steel plate
Steel plate
Steel plate
* When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operation
check.
* Do not modify the LSU.
* When visually checking the inside of the machine for the operation check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes.
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones
safety may be at risk.
Screw
diameter
Material to be
fixed
M3
Steel plate
(Plate thickness
0.8mm or above)
Steel plate
(Plate thickness
0.8mm or above)
Steel plate
(Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
Steel plate
(Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
M3
When handling the OPC drum unit, and the developing unit, strictly
observe the following items.
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the
copy and print image quality.
Tightening
torque
(kgfcm)
8 - 10
10 - 12
16 - 18
Tightening
torque
(lbft)
0.6 - 0.7
0.7 - 0.9
1.2 - 1.3
Tightening
torque
(Nm)
1.0 - 1.2
Tightening
torque
(kgfcm)
10 - 12
Tightening
torque
(lbft)
0.7 - 0.9
1.6 - 1.8
16 - 18
1.2 - 1.3
0.6 - 0.8
6-8
0.4 - 0.6
1.2 - 1.4
12 - 14
0.9 - 1.0
Tightening
torque
(Nm)
0.6 - 0.8
1.0 - 1.2
Tightening
torque
(kgfcm)
6-8
10 - 12
Tightening
torque
(lbft)
0.4 - 0.6
0.7 - 0.9
Tapping screws (for iron)
M4
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the

developing unit
Tightening
torque
(Nm)
0.8 - 1.0
1.0 - 1.2
1.6 - 1.8
M4
Drum unit
Tapping screw (for plastic)
* Avoid working at a place with strong lights.

* Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for
a long time.
* When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets
of paper to cover it.)
Screw
diameter
Material to be
fixed
M3
M4
Plastic resin
Plastic resin
* Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign

material on the OPC drum surface.
Developing unit
* Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the developing unit.
Fusing unit
* Be careful not to "leave" fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the fusing roller.
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the
copy and print image quality.
8. Relation between model names and

names in the manual
Model name
MX-M266N/MX-M265N/MX-M265U
MX-M316N/MX-M315N/MX-M315U
MX-M356N/MX-M356U
7. Screw tightening torque

The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
types.
These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
grooves and use positions.
The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
torques depending on the use position.
When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
table.
However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than specified on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are
described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
an exception.
CAUTION: Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is
an electrode or a current flows, use enough care to
tighten securely to avoid loosening.
MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii
Name in the manual

26cpm machine
31cpm machine
35cpm machine
: 15/Aug.
: 16/Jun.
Service Manual
MX-M316N
[1]
PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. System configuration
A. N model
1
2
MX-TR18
MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M356N
MX-M316N A/M266N A/M356N A
MX-M315NE
MX-M265N/M265NE
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
JOB SEPARATOR
MX-TR17
EXIT TRAY UNIT
MX-FN26
FINISHER
MX-CS12
500 SHEET PAPER TRAY
MX-CS13
AR-DS19
MX-CS12
HIGH STAND
AR-DS20
LOW STAND
MX-PK11
MX-PF10
MX-FX11
MX-FWX1
AR-SU1
MX-FR48U
PS3 EXPANSION KIT
BARCODE FONT KIT
FACSIMILE EXPANSION
KIT
INTERNET FAX EXPANSION

KIT
STAMP UNIT
DATA SECURITY KIT
MX-M316N/M266N/M315N
/M265N
MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
MX-US50
MX-USA0
MX-AMX1
SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE
KIT
SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE
KIT
SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE
KIT
KIT

KIT
APPLICATION
INTEGRATION MODULE
MX-AMX2
MX-AMX3
MX-HD14
MX-EB13
MX-FR50U
MX-HD15
APPLICATION
COMMUNICATION MODULE
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT
MODULE
HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT
USB WIRELESS LAN

ADAPTER
DATA SECURITY KIT
MX-M316N/M266N/M315N
/M265N
MX-M315NE/M265NE
MX-M316N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1
MX-M356N
MX-M356N
MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/
M265N/MX-M316N A/M266N A/
M356N A/M315NE/M265NE
MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/
M265N/MX-M316N A/M266N A/
M356N A
: 15/Aug.
: 16/Jun.
B. U model
1
2
MX-TR18
JOB SEPARATOR
MX-RP19
MX-VR12
MX-RP20
REVERSING SINGLE PASS

FEEDER
DOCUMENT COVER

FEEDER
MX-M315U
MX-M265U
MX-M356U
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
MX-TR17
EXIT TRAY UNIT
MX-FN26
FINISHER
MX-CS12
MX-CS13
AR-DS19
MX-CS12
HIGH STAND
AR-DS20
LOW STAND
MX-PB16
MX-PK11
MX-PF10
MX-NSX1
MX-FX11
MX-FWX1
PRINTER EXPANSION KIT
PS3 EXPANSION KIT
BARCODE FONT KIT
NETWORK SCANNER
EXPANSION KIT
FACSIMILE EXPANSION
KIT
INTERNET FAX EXPANSION

KIT
AR-SU1
MX-FR48U
MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
MX-US50
STAMP UNIT
DATA SECURITY KIT
SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE
KIT
SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE
KIT
KIT
KIT
MX-M315U/M265U
MX-USA0
MX-AMX1
MX-AMX2
MX-AMX3
MX-HD14
MX-EB13

KIT
APPLICATION
INTEGRATION MODULE
APPLICATION
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT
MODULE
USB WIRELESS LAN

ADAPTER
MX-M315U/M265U
MX-FR50U
MX-HD15
DATA SECURITY KIT
MX-M356U/M315U/M265U
MX-M356U/M315U/M265U
: 15/Aug.
: 16/Jun.
2. Option list
Model
name
1
Document
feeder
MX-RP20
MX-RP19
MX-VR12
Paper Feeder
MX-CS12
MX-CS13
Stand
Paper Exit
Device
Printer
Image Send
Authentication
/Security
Application
AR-DS20
AR-DS19
MX-TR17*1
MX-TR18*2
MX-FN26*3
MX-PB16
MX-PK11
MX-PF10
MX-NSX1
MX-FX11
MX-FWX1
AR-SU1
MX-FR48U
MX-FR50U
MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
MX-US50
MX-USA0
MX-AMX1
MX-AMX2
MX-AMX3
Other
MX-HD14
MX-HD15
MX-EB13*6
Name
FEEDER
FEEDER
DOCUMENT COVER
2nd
Drawer
500-SHEET PAPER
4th
TRAY
Drawer
3rd
Drawer
LOW STAND
HIGH STAND
EXIT TRAY UNIT
JOB SEPARATOR
FINISHER
PRINTER EXPANSION KIT
PS3 EXPANSION KIT
BARCODE FONT KIT
NETWORK SCANNER
EXPANSION KIT
FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT
INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT
STAMP UNIT
DATA SECURITY KIT
DATA SECURITY KIT
SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT
APPLICATION INTEGRATION
MODULE
APPLICATION
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT
MODULE
USB WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER
MXM356N
MXM316N
N model
MXM266N
MXM265N
MXM315N
MXM356U
U model
MXM265U
MXM315U
STD
STD
STD
OPT
STD
STD
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
STD
STD
STD
OPT
STD
STD
OPT
STD
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
STD
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
STD
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
STD
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
STD
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
STD
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*4
OPT*4
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*4
OPT*4
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*4
OPT*4
STD
STD
STD
STD
STD
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
OPT*7
OPT*7
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
OPT*7
OPT*7
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
OPT*7
OPT*7
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
OPT*7
OPT*7
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
OPT*7
OPT*7
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
OPT*7
OPT*7
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT*5
OPT
OPT
OPT*8
OPT*9
OPT
OPT*8
OPT*9
OPT
OPT*8
OPT*9
OPT
OPT*8
OPT*9
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*8
OPT*9
OPT
OPT*8
OPT*9
OPT
: Connection not allowed

STD: Equipped as standard
OPT: Installable option
*1: Need Inner Finisher (Cannot install together with Job Separator).
*2: Cannot install together with Paper Exit Tray Unit/Inner Finisher.
*3: Cannot install together with Job Separator.
*4: Need MX-PB16.
*5: Need HDD.
*6: Available for limited destination.
*7: This model will be integrated to FR50U from April, 2016.
*8: Middle East only. (This is only for the limited models. Regarding
the details of this machine, refer to SMEF.
All models except the above models have been discontinued

since December, 2015.
*9: All destinations except Middle east
2
2
: 15/Aug.
D.
EngineManual
resolution
Service
MX-M316N
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS
Resolution
1. Basic specifications
Print
A. Engine Specification
Photo conductor
Recording
Development
Charging
Transfer
Separation
Cleaning
Fusing
Waste toner disposal
Toner supply during operation
Outer color
OPC (Diameter: 30mm)

Electronic photo (Laser)
Dry-type dual-component magnetic
brush development
Charged saw-tooth method
Transfer roller
Separation claw method
Counter blade
Heat roller
Toner cartridge collection
N/A
Pastel white (Natural wave pattern)
B. Engine speed (ppm)
Paper size
A3
11x17
8K
B4, 8.5x13, 8.5x13.5, 8.5x13.4, 8.5x14
A4, B5, 8.5x11, 16K, A5R, 5.5x8.5R
A4R, 8.5x11R, 16KR
B5R
Gradation *
(256 levels)
Print
*: The dither and error diffusion methods using 8bit input will be
performed.
26cpm
machine
15
14
16
16
26
18
21
31cpm
machine
17
17
19
20
31
24
24
35cpm
machine
20
19
21
22
35
27
30
26cpm
machine
14
14
15
16
17
16
23
31cpm
machine
17
16
18
19
20
19
27
35cpm
machine
18
17
19
20
22
21
29
19
19
21
14
14
22
22
24
16
16
24
25
26
17
17
(1)
Resolution/Gradation
Scanning
Resolution (dpi)
Exposure lamp
Reading gradation
Output gradation
Manual paper feed
Paper size
A3
11x17
8K
B4, 8.5x14
8.5x13
8.5x13.5, 8.5x13.4
A4, B5, 8.5x11, 16K, A5R, 5.5x8.5R,
A5, 5.5x8.5
A4R, 8.5x11R, 7.25x10.5R
16KR
B5R
Extra
Custom
(2)
Max. range
Void Area
Image Loss
Image missing
width
Monochrome
600 x 600dpi
600 x 400dpi
600 x 300dpi (default)
RSPF
600 x 600dpi
600 x 400dpi (default)
White LED
10bit
BW: 1bit
Grayscale: 8bit
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
Platen
Document table
Type
Scanning area
Original standard
position
Detection
Detection size
Dehumidifying
heater
(Scanner section)
C. Printable area
A3 Wide
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
Postcard
8K
8.5x13.5
Custom
Copy
Writing
600 x 600dpi
Writing
600 x 600dpi
1,200 x 600dpi (PCL/PS)
Writing
600 x 600dpi x 1bit
Writing
Sharp Advanced Printing Language:
600 x 600dpi x 1bit
PCL:
600 x 600dpi x 1bit
1,200 x 600dpi x 1bit
PS:
600 x 600dpi x 1bit
1,200 x 600dpi x 1bit
E. Scanner section
Tray 1 - 4
Copy
N/A
16K
191 x 263mm
293 x 413mm
12 x 18
N/A
253 x 357mm
11" x 17"
275 x 425mm
206 x 290mm
8.5" x 14"
212 x 349mm
178 x 250mm
8.5" x 13"
212 x 323mm
144 x 203mm
Executive
180 x 260mm
92 x 140mm
8.5" x 11"
212 x 272mm
266 x 383mm
5.5" x 8.5"
136 x 209mm
212 x 336mm
8.5" x 13.4"
212 x 333mm
Min.: 96mm x 141mm; Max.: 297mm x 432mm
AB: 416x293mm (600dpi: 9826dot x 6920dot)
Inch: 428x275mm (600dpi: 10110dot x 6496dot)
Top
1 to 4mm
Bottom
1 to 5mm
Front/Rear Total 6mm or less
Top
4mm or less
Top 4mm or less, Bottom 4mm or less,
MX-M316N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
Document table fixed system (Flat bed)

297 x 432mm
Left rear reference
Yes
Automatic detection (Detection types can be
changed in the system settings)
Supplied as a service parts
: 15/Aug.
F. Document feeder
1
Model
Type
Scan speed
Copy
FAX
Internet FAX
Scanner
Original setup
direction
Original standard
position
Original transport
method
Paper detection
size
MX-M316N / MX-M266N / MX-M356N / MX-M356U

RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)
Monochrome
Color (A4/8.5" x 11")
(A4/8.5" x 11")
Single:
NA
56-sheet/min.
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
38-sheet/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
Double:
20-page/min.
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
17-page/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
NA
Single: 56-sheet/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
MX-M315N / MX-M265N / MX-M315U / MX-M265U

Monochrome
(A4/8.5" x 11")
Single:
31-sheet/min.
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
25-sheet/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
Double:
16-page/min.
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
13-page/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Color (A4/8.5" x 11")

NA
NA
NA
(200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)

Sheet-through method
Inch-1
Inch-2
Inch-3
AB-1
AB-2
AB-3
AB-4
AB-5
Long paper
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm.
When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed

(Same series, same
width paper)
Enabled
Random feeding
(feeding of different
types / different
widths)
Original copy weight
Enabled
Only the following combinations of 2 size types are allowed:
A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available. 2-sided scanning is disabled during random
feeding.
Single:
Single:
Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (41 pages/minute
* Thin paper mode (27 pages/minute
(A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 400dpi) / 27 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11",
(A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 400dpi) / 18 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11",
600 x 600dpi) is set up for the thin paper.
600 x 600dpi) is set up for the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max. height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
Max. loading
capacity of
documents
Un-acceptable
originals for feeding.
Detection
Paper feeding
direction
Finish stamp
Reliability
Life
Power Source
Transparency, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper,
cutout document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch
unit is allowed.)
Yes
Right hand feeding
Option
MCBJ/MCBF: Same as the main unit
Same as the main unit
Provided from the main unit
: 15/Aug.
G. Paper feed section

(1) Basic specifications
1
MX-M316N / MX-M266N / MX-M315N / MX-M315U / MX-M356N /

MX-M356U
Type
Standard
Full option
Dehumidifying
heater
2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed

tray
tray
N/A
MX-M265N / MX-M265U
Type
Standard
Full option
Dehumidifying
heater

tray
tray
N/A
Tray
Paper
capacity
Standard
paper (80g/
m2)
Paper size
Paper size detection
Paper type setting

Changing of paper size
Universal handle
Default
Inch system
paper size
AB system
setting
Detection of remaining
paper
Paper size display window
Tray 1
Tray 2
500 sheets
500 sheets
Multi
Bypass
Tray
100 sheets
Refer to Size of paper which can be fed.

No
Yes
(Guide adjustment and size
input)
Refer to Size of paper which can be fed.
Switched by the user
Switched by
the user
(Guide
adjustment)
Yes
8.5" x 11"
A4
N/A (Only paper availability is detected)
Yes
(2) Extra paper capacity

Paper type
Envelope
Paper feed tray

NA
Transparency
Heavy paper
Tab paper
Others
NA
NA
NA
NA
Manual feed tray

AB system: 10 sheets
Inch system: 5 sheets
40 sheets
30 sheets (Max. 200g/m2)
30 sheets (Target)
1 sheet
(3) Size of paper which can be fed
Paper Size
Paper Type
12 x 18 (A3W)
11" x 17"(Ledger)
8.5" x 14" (Legal)
8.5" x 13.5" (Asian Legal)
8.5" x 13.4" (Mexican Legal)
8.5" x 13" (Foolscap)
8.5" x 11"(Letter)
8.5" x 11"R(Letter-R)
7.25 x 10.5R(Exective-R)
5.5" x 8.5"(Incoice-R)
5.5" x 8.5"R(Incoice-R)
A3
B4
A4
A4R
B5
B5R
A5
A5R
B6R
8K
16K
16KR
A6R
Envelope*1
Custom*2
Thin paper
Plain paper
Heavy paper
305x457
297x432
216x356
216x343
216x340
216x330
297x216
216x279
184x266
216x140
140x216
297x420
257x364
297x210
210x297
257x182
182x257
210x148
148x210
270x390
270x195
195x270
Envelope*1
Custom*2
13 - 16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2)
16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Recycled paper
Color paper
Letter head
Pre-printed
Pre-punched
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 200g/m2)*6
110 lb index - 140 lb index (201 - 256g/m2)
Envelope
Transparency
Label*3
Tab paper*4
User settings 1-7
Paper Feeding Section

Standard Tray
Optional Tray
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 2*7
Tray 1
MX-CS12 MX-CS13 MX-CS12
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*5
Yes*5
Yes*5
Yes*5
Yes*5
Yes*5
Yes*5
Yes*5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*1: Supported envelop types:

Monarch/Com-10/DL/C5/Custom
* Custom envelope size is configurable by Sim setting (default: hidden)
*2: Custom size
Bypass tray
X
Y
AB system (mm)
Min.
Max.
140
432
100
297
Inch system (inch)

Min.
Max.
5-1/2
17
5-1/2
11-5/8
Long size paper from the bypass tray: max. 1,200mm is configurable by Sim.
*3: Supported label paper: SF-4A3F
*4: Supported tab paper:
A4 tab width: 12 - 20mm
8.5" x 11" tab width: 6.1 - 17mm
*5: Need to set from Sim
*6: Brazil: 220g paper feeding is stated.
*7: Standard for MX-M316N / M266N / M315N / M315U.
Bypass
Tray
Yes
Yes
Yes*5
Yes*5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
H. Paper exit section

(1) Exit Capacity
Output Location
Center
Job Separator
(Option)
Upper tray: 100 sheets (80g/m2)
Lower tray:
A4 / 8.5x11 no-shift: 500 sheets (80g/m2)
Other: 300 sheets(80g/m2)
Output Capacity
A4 / 8.5x11 no-shift: 500 sheets (80g/m2)

Other: 300 sheets(80g/m2)
Output paper size / weight

Shifting function
Refer to Size of paper which can be discharged.

Yes
Upper: No
Lower: Yes
No
Upper: Yes
Lower: No
Yes
Upper: No (detection by count-up)
Lower: Yes
Output paper detection

Exit tray full detection
Right Side
(Option)
100 sheets (80g/m2)
No
No
Yes
(2) Size of paper which can be discharged

Output Section
Duplex
Paper
Size
Paper
Type
12 x 18 (A3W)
11 x 17
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13.5
8.5 x 13.4
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R
5.5 x 8.5
5.5 x 8.5R
A3
B4
A4
A4R
B5
B5R
A5
A5R
B6R
8K
16K
16KR
A6R
Envelope*1
Extra
Custom*2
Thin paper*9
Plain paper
Heavy paper
Envelope
Transparency
Label
Tab paper
User settings 1 - 7
305x457
297x432
216x356
216x343
216x340
216x330
297x216
216x279
184x266
216x140
140x216
297x420
257x364
297x210
210x297
257x182
182x257
210x148
148x210
270x390
270x195
195x270
13-16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2)

16-28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Recycled paper
Color paper
Letter head
Pre-printed
Pre-punched
28 lb bond - 110 lb index
(106 - 200g/m2)*6
110 lb index -140 lb index
(201 - 256g/m2)
75 - 90g/m2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Center Tray
Job
Exit Tray
Separator
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Finisher
Finisher
Offset
Right
Exit Tray
w/offset
w/staple
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*6
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*4
Yes
Yes
Yes*4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*6
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*7
Yes*3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes*4
Yes*8
Yes*3
Yes
Yes
*1: Supported Envelop types:

Monarch/Com-10/DL /C5/Custom
Custom envelope size is supported by Sim. Not displayed at the default setting.
: 15/Aug.
*2: Custom size
Bypass tray
Duplex
AB System (mm)
Min.
Max.
140
432
100
297
182
432
148
297
X
Y
X
Y
Inch System (inch)

Min.
Max.
5-1/2
17
5-1/2
11-5/8
7-1/4
17
5-1/2
11-5/8
Long size paper (bypass tray only): support up to 1,200mm by Sim

* Long size paper ejection is from center tray/inner finisher
*3: Comply to Paper type setting
*4: Can be input but alignment is not supported
*5: Can be input and stapled but alignment is not supported
*6: Alignment of heavy paper more than 129g/m2 is not supported
*7: Only front/back cover is available.
*8: Can be fed but not covered under warranty.
*9: A4 paper (grain long) corresponding to 58g/m2
I. Operation panel
L. Warm-up time
Size
Form
Display dot number
LCD backlight
LCD contrast adjust
Angle/position adjustment
7 inch
Dot matrix LCD, Touch panel
800 x 480 dots (WVGA)
LED backlight
Yes
No tilting mechanism
Warm-up time
Pre heat
Jam recovery time*1
20sec. or less
Yes
10sec. or less
* Result may change depending on conditions.

*1: Conditions: Leave the machine for 60 sec. after door open,
standard condition, Polygon stops.
J. Controller board
CPU
ARM11: 600MHz
ARM9: 400MHz/during 1W energy save mode:
75MHz
Interface
IEEE1284 Parallel
Ethernet
Interface
Support Protocol
USB 2.0 (high
speed) (host)*1
USB 2.0 (high
speed) (device)
USB-HUB (host)
Serial I/F
(For coin-operated
machines)
No
1port
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, Ether Talk
2port
(Simultaneous use of the front/rear ports is
enable.)
1port
4GB
Engine
Scan Speed
Platen
RSPF
31
4.3 sec.
7.0 sec.
56
4.3 sec.
7.0 sec.
31cpm machine
31
4.3 sec.
7.0 sec.
56
4.3 sec.
7.0 sec.
35cpm
machine
56
4.0 sec.
6.7 sec.
* Measuring Conditions
Feed the A4 (8-1/2 x 11) sheet in landscape from tray 1, with the
polygon rotating condition.
Engine
S to S
26cpm
machine
26cpm (100%)
31cpm
machine
31cpm (100%)
35cpm
machine
35cpm (100%)
* Defines the copy speed of when the main unit and a document
feeder are used in combination.
* S to S: copying 1 set of an 11-sheet original in A4 / 8.5" x 11"
(not including the first copy)
Monochrome: 600 x 400dpi (default)
HDD*2
OPT (250GB)
*1: Memory expansion is not available

*2: HDD capacity may vary depending on the procurement condition.
Memory area
(SD card)
26cpm machine
B. Job Speed
K. Memory/Hard disk/SD card memory

ICU (Reus) PWB
Memory*1
2GB
A. First copy time
Value might vary depends on the machine settings/conditions
Internal: 4port
* Main unit USB Front Port
* Main unit USB Rear Port
* Key board USB Port
* IC Card Reader
1port
*1: The USB port can be disabled by Sim
SD card
2. Copy functions
Boot/Program area
FAX data storage area
Without HDD
512MB
With HDD
1GB
3. Printer function
A. Printer driver supported OS
Windows
Mac
OS
Custom
PCL6
SPDL2
Custom
PCL5e
Custom PS
PPD
98 / Me
NT 4.0 SP5 or later
2000
XP
XP x64
Server 2003
Server 2003 x64
Vista
Vista x64
Server 2008
Server 2008 x64
Windows 7
Windows 7 x64
Server 2012x64
Windows 8
Windows 8x64
Windows 8.1
Windows 8.1x64
9.0
X 10.2
X 10.3
X 10.4
X 10.5
X 10.6
X 10.7
X 10.8
X 10.9
X 10.10
No
No
No
No
No
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
No
No
No
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
Sharp
Advanced
Printing
Language
No
No
No
No
No
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
PC-FAX
TWAIN
No
No
No
No
No
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
B. PDL emulation/Font
PDL (Command)
PCL6 compatibility
N model: STD
U model: OPT
ESC/P(VP-1100) compatible,
ESC/P_super compatible
Postscript3 compatibility
OPT
Installed font
European outline font = 80 styles
Line printer font (BMP) = 1 style
European BMP font
=2 style (Roman, Sans-serif)
-
4. Image send function
Internet Fax/ Direct

SMTP
Fax
Data input
(metadata)
Remote PC scan
European outline font = 136 styles
B. Support system
A. Mode
Mode
Scanner
Option font
Barcode font = 28 styles
Mode
Corresponding
server / Protocol
Scanner
SMTP/ SMTP-SSL
FTP (TCP/IP)*2/ FTPS
SMB *1
HTTP/HTTPS
(Supported protocol of
Sharp OSA)
Internet Fax/ Direct SMTP

POP3 server
SMTP server
ESMTP server
Sub mode
E-mail
FTP server
Shared folder
(SMB)
Desktop
USB Memory
-
With HDD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Without HDD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
E-mail
FTP server
Shared folder
(SMB)
Desktop
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Vista, Vistax64, Server2008, Server2008x64,

Windows7x64, Windows8, Windows8x64
Yes
Yes
No
No
OSX 10.4, 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, 10.9, 10.10
*1: Network environment for SMB

Windows
Server2003, Server2003x64,
Server2012, Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1x64

Mac
*2: Support Passive/Active Mode
Windows7,
C. Support image
Mode
Scanner
Mode
Format/
Compression
method
File format
(Mono 2 gradation)
File format
(Color/ Gray scale)
Compression
method
(Mono 2 gradation)
Compression
method
(Color/ Gray scale)
Internet
Fax
Direct
SMTP
File format
(Monochrome)
File format
(Color/ Gray scale)
Compression
method
(Monochrome)
Item
Support
TIFF
PDF
PDF/A
Encrypted PDF
XPS
Color TIFF
JPEG
PDF
PDF/A
Encrypted PDF
High compression PDF
XPS
Non-compression
G3 (1-dimentional)= MH
(Modified Huffman)
G4= MMR (Modified MR)
JPEG (high/ middle/ low)
High compression PDF
Black Letter Emphasis
2-color high compression
PDF
TIFF-FX (TIFF-F / TIFF-S)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
TIFF-C
No
Non-compression
G3 (1-dimentional)= MH
(Modified Huffman)
G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
TIFF-C (high/ middle/ low)
No
Yes
Magical scan
(Area division + Suppress
Selection of image quality
Yes
No
Mode
Item
Scanner
Yes
Yes
N/A
Internet Fax/
Direct SMTP
N/A
N/A
N/A
E. Specifying Addresses
Address Specifying Method
Item
One-touch
Group key
Direct input
(Entry from the soft keyboard,
externally-connected keyboard or
10 keypad)
Selection from the LDAP server
Display the address information
stored in the LDAP server directly in
the key list.
Content
Yes
Yes
Yes (e-mail/SMB/ Internet Fax
(including Direct SMTP)/fax)
*Addresses of FTP/Desktop cannot
be input directly.
Yes
N/A
Function
Description
Setting of the
default address
The default address can be set

in the scanner mode. The user
can send only by setting an
original and touching the start
key.
The e-mail address of the
authenticated user is
automatically set as the default
address.
The setting whether address
selection by this function is
applied or not shall be
prepared for broadcast with
Fax/Internet Fax addresses.
The setting whether it is
enabled for users to cancel the
address selection by this
function at any time or not shall
be prepared.
And it has the function to
prohibit to choice address
except the user who log in.
It accepts that it forbids to input
! in the address of Scan to
SMB folder.
It prohibits to input the next
address for making to send
only the user who log in at
Scan to Home Directory.
Addresses can be selected
from the latest 8 destinations in
the sending history.
Selections from FTP/Desktop/
SMB sending history is N/
A.Support in order of number
of sending is N/A.
Yes
Apply E-mail
address of the
user for login
(Scan to Me)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Internet Fax/
Direct SMTP
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Resolution
Scanner
100x100 dpi
200x200 dpi
300x300 dpi
Internet Fax/Direct SMTP

200x100 dpi
200x200 dpi
200x400 dpi
4
5
400x400 dpi
600x600 dpi
400x400 dpi
600x600 dpi
Exposure/Original Type
Mode
Halftone reproduction
Exposure
Adjustment
Original document
type (Selectable in
manual mode)
Halftone
(B&W only)
Scanner
Moire reduction mode

CPT (notes security)
Scanning QR codes
Color Mode
Level
Yes
Other Image Processing Functions
Yes
D. Image Processing
1
2
Yes
Internet Fax/
Direct SMTP
N/A
Other Address Specifying Method
Compression
method
(Color/ Gray scale)
Fax
Compression
MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG
method
(Monochrome)
File per page (Setting of the number of pages available)
B&W
Grays scale
Full color
Auto Color Selection (ACS)
Scanner
Scanner
Auto
Text
Text / Photo
Text /
Printed photo
Photo
Printed photo
Map
Internet Fax/
Direct SMTP
Equivalent to 256 gradations
Yes
Yes
5 levels
Yes
Yes
5 levels
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Accept ! in the
address of Scan
to SMB folder
Prohibit the
broadcast
transmission of
Home Directory
Resend
Scanner
Yes
Internet
Fax/
Direct
SMTP
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
N/A
5. FAX function
Address Book
Registration
(1)
Item
Max. number of registrations
Content
Total: 1000 keys
*FTP/Desktop/SMB addresses shall
be the same as those for other
modes. Maximum 1000 addresses
shall be able to be registered.
Max. 500 addresses
Number of addresses can be

registered in one Group key
Number of addresses can be
registered by inputting directly in
Group keys
LDAP searching when address
book registration
Address book registration in the
sending history screen
Speed dial (quick key)
5000 addresses (included in the

1000 keys)
Yes
(2)
FAX to e-mail/FTP
Support image
Mode
Compression method
(3)
Support image
Mode
Compression method
(4)
Yes (Call by inputting a registration
number from the 10-key pad)
Content
Registered up to: 48 (Group/Individual can be
registered.)
Subject
File name
Outbound message
(message body)
Outbound message
selection
Number of letters in an
outbound message
Pre-Setting Mail
Signature*2
Scanner
Internet Fax/Direct
SMTP
Select from the list.

Direct entry (80 one-byte/two-byte characters;
Number of lists: 30)
Select from the list.*1
Match the subject
Direct entry (80 one-byte/two-byte characters;
Number of lists: 30)
Yes*3
Select from the list*3.
Direct entry
1800 one-byte characters (900 two-byte
characters) *3
Yes
Yes
*1: N/A for USB Memory Scan

*2: A text message can be set to be automatically added in the
body of outbound messages. It cannot be edited
at the time of sending.
*3: When no HDD, N/A
FAX
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Image processing
Mode
Original scanning color
Halftone reproduction
Density adjustment
FAX
B/W
Equivalent of 256 steps
Auto + 5 steps
Selection of image quality

Resolution (depends on file
format/transmission method)
Half tone (Black-white only) ON/OFF

Standard character (203.2 x 97.8dpi)
(half tone not allowed)
Fine (203.2 x 195.6dpi)
Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi)
Ultra fine (406.4 x 391dpi)
G. Information to Be Sent
Mode
FAX
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
N/A
F. Program
Item
Number of registrations
FAX
Mode
(5)
Specification of Addresses
Mode
Address specification
Number of One-touch address key

registration
Number of Group (1 key) address
registtation
Program
Direct entry of addresses
Chain dial
Resend
Destination confirmation
Shortcut for address selection
(quick key)
Disable direct entry transmission *2
Disable PC- Fax sending
FAX
Specification by one-touch/group/
direct address entry.
Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
Selection from LDAP server
Total (number of key):
Maximum 1000
Number of Group (1 key) address
registration : maximum 500
Number of Group key registration :
5000 (Total address number
included in /1000 key)
48
Entry by 10-key, # key
Yes (pause key)
Call up nearest 8 addresses. *1
Yes
Use the 10-key to call up registered
numbers of addresses.
Yes
Yes
*1: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory, Broadcast.

*2: When disabled, the address registration is not allowed either.
(6)
Specification of Multiple Addresses
Mode
Broadcast
Request of serial transmission
FAX
Yes (500 destinations)
Yes
* Broadcast transmission is allowed. (Monochrome only)
(7) Transmission function

Mode
Memory transmission
On-hook
Quick online transmission
Direct transmission
Automatically-reduced
transmission
Rotated transmission
Scaled transmission
Recall mode
Error
Busy
Long original transmission
Confidential transmission (Sharp

mode)
Relay broadcast transmission
(Sharp mode)
Large capacity original mode
Scanning of thin paper
Mixed originals feeder
Default date sender transmission
Preview
Side erase
FAX
94 destinations in all
Yes
Yes
Yes
(Switching: Memory transmission
Direct transmission)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed
only from a fixed size to another.
Reduction may be done on the
receiver side with Fax/Internet Fax
sending.
Yes
Yes
Number/time to be set up through
system setup
Yes
Maximum of 1000mm (single side
only/black-white 2 values only)
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes (Random + MIX)
Yes (ON only)
No
Yes
Memory reception
Fixed size reduced reception
Specified size scaled reception
Rotated reception
Setting of received data print
condition
2-sided reception
2-in-1 reception
Automatic reduction setting upon
receiving A3
Automatic reduction setting upon
receiving letter
Reception from a specific number
not allowed, or allowed.
(Allow/Reject)
External phone connection
remote
Confidential reception (Sharp
mode)
Received data bypass output
Index printing
Transfer function upon disabling
of output.
Internet Fax/Fax to e-mail
(Transfer of Internet Fax/Fax
reception data to e-mail, inbound
routing)
Exit tray setting
Insertion of job separator sheet
FAX
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
*1: This function saves all received data in memory and starts out
put after password entry. (Confidential reception is excluded.)
Setting only on the reciver side.
(9)
Report/list function
Mode
Image sending activity report
Transaction report
Address/phone number table
Group table
Program table
Memory box table (F code)
Communication original contents
print
List of allowed or rejected
reception numbers
Table of control record for each
account
FAX
Yes
Time-specified output
Output with memory full
* Maximum of 200 times including
both transmission and reception
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Always print/Upon error/no print
Yes
No
(10) Other Functions

Mode
Time specification
Polling reception
Bulletin board transmission
(8) Reception function

Mode
Automatic reception
Manual reception
Mode
Staple function of received data
Auto wake up print
Received data print hold *1
Color toner print when black toner
runs out.
FAX
Yes
No
Switching from manual reception to
automatic reception. (Allowed only
for France and Japan)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Equal size print (partition not
allowed)
Equal size print (partition allowed)
Equal or reduced size print
Condition setting through system
setting
No
Yes
Yes (Other than North America and
Inch destinations)
Specified numbers only
(50 numbers /20 digits)
Cover sheet function

Transmission message
Sender print
Sender selection
Page number print
Date print
Polling protection function
Page partition transmission
Page connection
Confidential (receiver unit)
Relay broadcast instructions
Fax to e-mail (F code) *1
Edge erase
Center erase
2 in 1
Card shot
Yes
Forward data transmission/
reception (Document Admin)
No
Yes
No
Yes (1 receiver (of transfer)
registration)
Yes
FAX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Up to 100 registrations allowed with
bulletin board, confidential and relay
broadcast all combined. (Free area :
1 registration)
Setting of the number of
transmission: 1/no limit.
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Date can be expressed
alternatively)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes (F code method)
Yes (F code method)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to
the paper width. The maximum
enlargement is not allowed to exceed
400%)
Yes
Data transmission by PC-Fax/
PC-Internet Fax is allowed, too.
*1: This function means that e-mail address setteing on F code

relay broadcast allowed.
Yes
No
: 15/Aug.
(11) Transmission Method

Mode
Transmission time
Modem speed
Intercommunication
Communication line
ECM
(15) Telephone functions
FAX
2 seconds level (super G3/JBIG),
6 seconds level (G3 ECM)
Automatic fall-back : 33.6kbps 2.4kbps
Super G3/G3
General membership telephone line
(PSTN), independent business line
(PBX), F net.
(R-key for PBX setting: Germany/France)
Yes
(12) Record Size

Mode
Maximum record width
Record size
FAX
293mm
A3 ? A5/11" x 17" ? 5.5" x 8.5"
Mode
FAX
Yes (20 digits)
Yes (20 digits)
(14) Registration-related settings

Mode
One-touch/group *1
E-mail
FTP
Desktop
SMB
FAX
Program
Number of memory boxes
Number of sender registration

Number of sender selection
registration
Registration of polling approval

number
Registration of Fax system
number (Sharp mode)
Registration of Fax polling
approval ID number (Sharp mode)
Fax relay ID registration (Sharp
mode)
Quick key (short cut registration) *2
Import/export of address book
Black list (for France)
FAX
Yes
No
Yes (1 ? 15 seconds)
No (External telephone transmission
allowed)
Tone, Pulse, Auto (North America/
Taiwan)
* For the other destinations, set with
the soft switch.
(16) Sound settings
(13) F code communication

Sub-address
Password
Mode
On-hook function
Hold
Setting of pause time
Telephone transmission during
power outage
Tone pulse switching
FAX
1000 destinations
Use of LDAP allowed
Up to 500 registered addresses for
each group dial.
Registered name in 18 full-size
character (36 half-size characters)
One-touch dial receiver number
registration: within 64 digits for
receiver number + sub-address +
passcode (including "/").
Registration of addresses (groups),
settings (density, image quality) and
special functions in one set is
allowed. (48 of them)
Registration of bulletin board/
confidential/relay broadcast is
allowed up to 100.
Registration name: 18 characters
1 (default) with 20 characters
Total: 18 registrations (20
characters) (Sender selection: In
addition to default, 18 registrations
allowed)
10 numbers/20 digits
Mode
On-hook sound
Sound volume for calling
Line monitor sound
Reception sound
Transmission success sound
Transmission and reception
error sound
Sound setting for end of
original reading (image send)
FAX
1-9
1 - 9, No
1 - 9, No
1 - 9, No
1 - 9, No
1 - 9, No
Sound volume setting
Large/middle/
small/no sound
(17) Others
Mode
PC-FAX
FAST
Network FAST
Distinctive ring detection
FAX
Yes
Yes (SEC only)
No
Setting for each destination
6. Power consumption
The full configuration can be operated with the rated power source.
Maximum rated power

Consumption*1
TEC value
26cpm machine
31cpm machine
35cpm machine
Fax waiting power consumption is 1W
*Condition of Standing by Network:
Connect with TCP/IP protocol only
100 V type
1.44 kW
200 V type
1.45kW
1.8 kWh
2.1 kWh
2.2 kWh
Yes
1.8 kWh
2.1 kWh
2.2 kWh
No
Time to move into Preheat mode
1 minutes (default)
Recovery time from Preheat mode

Time to move into sleep mode
10 seconds
1 minute
(Default)
No
No
No
Recovery time from Sleep mode
Yes (001 ? 1000)
Yes (By storage backup)
No
Item
11 minutes
(Europe)
1 minute
(Other)
* After the remote job is done: 1
second (Default)
20 seconds
*1: At power-on timing

(with condition of dehumidify heater turned OFF)
*1: Since scan/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address book,

the number of addresses allowed for registration is the sum
total of all modes.
*2: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
registered number of each address within the book for address
selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
: 15/Aug.
7. Dimensions and weight

1
Outer dimension
(Included operation panel)
Footprint
Dimension occupied by the machine
Weight
Main Unit
(including photoreceptor / not including
consumables)
MX-316N/ MX-M266N/ MX-M315N/ MX-M315U/

MX-M356N/ MX-M356U
W620 x D617 x H680 mm
When the OC is installed:
W620 x D617 x H700 mm
When the RSPF is installed:
W620 x D617 x H830 mm
W620 x D617 mm
W938 x D617 mm
(when the bypass tray is extended)
51 kg (100V type / 200V type)
When the OC is installed: 45 kg
MX-M265N/ MX-M265U
W620 x D617 x H580 mm
When the OC is installed:
W620 x D617 x H600 mm
W620 x D617 x H730 mm

45 kg (100V type / 200V type)
When the OC is installed: 39 kg
[3]CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table
A. North America, Middle America, South America
No.
1
2
3
Item
Toner cartridge (black)
Developer (black)
Drum
Content
Toner cartridge
Developer
Drum
x1
x1
x1
Life
27.5K
100K
100K
Model name
MX-315NT
MX-312NV
MX-312NR
Remarks
Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
Content
Toner cartridge
Developer
Drum
x1
x1
x1
Life
27.5K
100K
100K
Model name
MX-315GT
MX-312GV
MX-312GR
Remarks
Content
Toner cartridge
Developer
Drum
x1
x1
x1
Life
27.5K
100K
100K
Model name
MX-315AT
MX-312AV
MX-312AR
Remarks
Model name
MX-315FT
MX-312FV
MX-312FR
Remarks
B. Europe, Australia and New Zealand

No.
1
2
3
Item
Developer (black)
Drum
C. Asia and Hong Kong

No.
1
2
3
Item
Developer (black)
Drum
D. Middle East, Africa, Taiwan, Israel and Philippines, Korea

No.
1
2
3
Item
Developer (black)
Drum
Content
Toner cartridge
Developer
Drum
x1
x1
x1
Life
27.5K
100K
100K
MX-M316N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1
2. Maintenance parts list

A. North America, Middle America, South America
No.
1
Item
Upper heat roller kit
Drum frame unit
Content
Upper heat roller
Fuser gear
Upper heat roller bearing
Upper cleaning pad
Fusing separation pawl (upper)
Lower heat roller
Fusing separation pawl (lower)
Fuser bearing (lower)
Drum separation pawl unit
Cleaner blade
MC unit
Drum frame unit
x1
x1
x2
x1
x4
x1
x1
x2
x2
x1
x1
x1
Lower heat roller kit
Maintenance kit
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Transfer roller unit

Paper feed roller kit
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Toner filter unit
Staple cartridge

Fusing unit (120V heater lamp)
Toner filter unit
Staple cartridge
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x3
Life
150K
Model name
MX-313UH
300K
MX-312LH
100K
MX-312KA
300K
MX-312DU
150K
100K
100K
150K
150K
100K
5000 staples x 3
MX-312TX
MX-312RT
MX-312MR
MX-312FU1
MX-312FU
MX-312TF
MX-SCX1
Remarks
* The life of the toner reception seat attached

to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be
used up to 3 times.
(Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
* The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.
B. Europe, Australia and New Zealand

No.
1
Item
Drum frame unit
Content
Upper heat roller
Fuser gear
Upper cleaning pad
Lower heat roller
Cleaner blade
MC unit
Drum frame unit
x1
x1
x2
x1
x4
x1
x1
x2
x2
x1
x1
x1
Maintenance kit
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Toner filter unit
Staple cartridge

Toner filter unit
Staple cartridge
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x3
Life
150K
Model name
MX-313UH
300K
MX-312LH
100K
MX-312KA
300K
MX-312DU
150K
100K
100K
150K
150K
100K
5000 staples x 3
MX-312TX
MX-312RT
MX-312MR
MX-312FU1
MX-312FU
MX-312TF
MX-SCX1
Remarks
* The life of the toner reception seat attached

to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be
used up to 3 times.
C. Asia and Hong Kong

No.
1
Item
Drum frame unit
Content
Upper heat roller
Fuser gear
Upper cleaning pad
Lower heat roller
Cleaner blade
MC unit
Drum frame unit
x1
x1
x2
x1
x4
x1
x1
x2
x2
x1
x1
x1
Maintenance kit
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Toner filter unit
Staple cartridge

Toner filter unit
Staple cartridge
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x3
Life
150K
Model name
MX-313UH
300K
MX-312LH
100K
MX-312KA
300K
MX-312DU
150K
100K
100K
150K
150K
100K
5000 staples x 3
MX-312TX
MX-312RT
MX-312MR
MX-312FU1
MX-312FU
MX-312TF
MX-SCX1
Remarks
* The life of the toner reception seat

attached to the drum frame is 300K, and it
can be used up to 3 times.
D. Middle East, Africa, Taiwan, Israel and Philippines, Korea

No.
1
Item
Drum frame unit
Content
Upper heat roller
Fuser gear
Upper cleaning pad
Lower heat roller
Cleaner blade
MC unit
Drum frame unit
x1
x1
x2
x1
x4
x1
x1
x2
x2
x1
x1
x1
Maintenance kit
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Toner filter unit
Staple cartridge

Toner filter unit
Staple cartridge
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x3
Life
150K
Model name
MX-313UH
300K
MX-312LH
100K
MX-312KA
300K
MX-312DU
150K
100K
100K
150K
150K
100K
5000 staples x 3
MX-312TX
MX-312RT
MX-312MR
MX-312FU1
MX-312FU
MX-312TF
MX-SCX1
Remarks
* The life of the toner reception seat

attached to the drum frame is 300K, and it
can be used up to 3 times.
3. Developer/Drum life end definition

* When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified count.
* When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified count.
When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as life end.
when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the
specified amount, it is judged as life end.
To check the drum and developer life, use SIM22-13.
Developer/drum counter
Developer/drum
100K
Number of rotations
(Rotations)
550K
: 15/Aug.
4. Production number identification
<Drum>
<Toner cartridge>
The laser print indicates the model conformity code and the date
(year, month, day) of production.
The label on the toner cartridge shows the date of production.
Label position
Internal product name

Incompatibility
Destination
2
3
Version No.
Production year/month/day (6 digits)
4, 5
Serial No. in production day (5 digits)

6
Production place (1 digits)
Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. L for this model.
Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
Factory code (Only for some destination)
<Developer>
5. Environmental conditions
(Humidity)
85%
60%
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows.
20%
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1
2
3, 4
5, 6
7
8
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
Number
Indicates the production year.
Number
Indicates the production month.
Number
Indicates the production day.
Hyphen
Number
Indicates the production lot.
10 C
30 C
35 C
(Temperature)
MX-M316N
Service Manual
[4]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view
1
When a output tray unit is installed

13
9 10 11 12
No.
1
2
Name
Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional)
Automatic document feeder
3
4
5
6
Output tray (center tray)

Operation panel
Front cover
USB connector (A type)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Exit tray unit (right tray)*1

Finisher*1
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1
Tray 4 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1
Main power switch
When a finisher is installed
Function/Operation
Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this tray.
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically
scanned.
Output is delivered to this tray.
This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
This can be used to staple output.
This holds paper.
This holds paper. (Only for NV models, this is the option.)
This holds paper.
This holds paper.
This is used to power on the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in the "on" position.
*1: Peripheral device.
MX-M316N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 1
2. Internal structure
1
6
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
Toner cartridge
Upper cover of machine (when a second
paper exit unit is installed)
Fusing unit
Right side cover
Right side cover release lever
Photoconductive drum
Right cover of paper drawer (when a

paper drawer is installed)
Paper tray right side cover
Bypass tray
Function/Operation
This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge must be replaced when indicated on the operation panel.
Open this cover to remove jam paper when a paper jam occurs in the output of the job separator or the optional
finisher.
Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
Open this cover to remove a misfeed.
To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.
This drum has a photoconductive coating on its surface.
The images are formed on top of this photoconductive surface.
(The photoconductive coating is green in color.)
Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4.
Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2.
Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading a large sheet of paper, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
3. Automatic document feeder and document glass

1
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Name
Paper feed roller
Document feeding area cover
Original guides
Document feeder tray
Original exit tray
Scanning area
Original size detector
Document glass
Function/Operation
This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.
Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.
4. I/F connectors
1
2
3
4
100V Type
200V Type
When a fax expansion kit is installed
7
8
No.
1
Name
Service-only connector
LAN connector
USB connector (B type)
USB connector (A type)
5
6
7
8
Connector for the finisher only

Power plug
Extension phone jack
Telephone line jack
Function/Operation
This connector is for use only by service technicians.
Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
Connects the finisher.(At the time of optional wearing)
When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this jack.
When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this jack.
5. Operation panel
1
12 13
No.
1
Name
Touch panel
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
[HOME] key
[JOB STATUS] key
PRINT mode indicators
IMAGE SEND mode indicators
7
8
9
10
11
[CLEAR] key
[STOP] key
Main power indicator
[POWER] key
POWER SAVE key indicator
12
13
DATA NOTIFICATION indicator (Green)

[LOGOUT] key
14
Numeric keys
15
[#/P] key
16
17
Error indicator
[CLEAR ALL] key
18
[START] key
14
15
16 17
9 10 11
18
Function/Operation
Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper
tray settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier
to use.
Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and
to cancel jobs.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in this manual.
* READY indicator: Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
* DATA indicator: This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
* LINE indicator: This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during
transmission of an image in scan mode.
* DATA indicator: This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such
as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
Use to switch the machine to "Auto power shut-off" mode, which is a power save function.
[Power save key] blinks when the machine is in an auto power shut-off mode.
The indicator lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of a job.
Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also
used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
Lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of the error.
Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial
state.
Press this key to copy or scan an original. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
: 15/Aug.
6. RSPF
A. Sensors and detectors
1
(1) MX-M316N/M266N/M265N/M315N/M356N
MX-RP19/RP20
SCOV
SPPD1
SPED
SPLS1
SPPD2
SPLS2
SPWS
SOCD
SPPD3
SPPD4
Signal name
SCOV
SOCD
SPED
SPLS1
SPLS2
SPPD1
Name
RSPF cover open/close detector
RSPF open/close sensor
Document sensor
Paper size detector 1
Document transport sensor 1
Type
Micro switch
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPWS

Document size detector
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Volume-type resistor
Function/Operation
Detects open/close of the RSPF cover.
Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
Detects paper feed and the document size in random
paper feed.
Detects paper pass.
Detects paper pass.
Detects paper exit and switchback.
Detects the document width.
Note
: 15/Aug.
B. Motors, clutches, solenoids and PWB

1
(1) MX-M316N/M266N/M356N
MX-RP20
SRRC
SPFM
SPM (SPUM)
SPRS
Signal name
SPFM
SPM/SPUM
SPRS
SRRC
No.
1
Name
RSPF transport motor
RSPF paper feed motor
Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid
(RSPF)
Registration roller clutch (RSPF)
Name
RSPF driver PWB
Type
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Magnetic solenoid
Magnetic clutch
Function/Operation
Transports a document.
Feeds a document.
Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the
paper exit roller pressure when reversing paper.)
Controls the registration roller. (Controls the timing of document transport.)
Function/Operation
Drives the motor, the solenoid, and the clutch in the RSPF section.
(2) MX-M265N/M315N
MX-RP19
SRRC
SPFM
SPRS
SPUC
Signal name
SPFM
SPRS
SRRC
SPUC
No.
1
Name
(RSPF)
Reverse clutch
Name
RSPF driver PWB
Type
Stepping motor
Magnetic solenoid
Magnetic clutch
Electromagnetic
clutch
Function/Operation
Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the
paper exit roller pressure when reversing paper.)
Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the transport roller 3 and the
paper exit roller when discharging a document and reversing it to transport to
the resist roller.
Function/Operation
Drives the motor, the solenoid, and the clutch in the RSPF section.
: 15/Aug.
C. Rollers
1
(1) MX-M316N/M266N/M265N/M315N/M356N
MX-RP19/RP20
6
No.
1
2
Name
Document pickup roller (RSPF)
Paper feed roller (RSPF)
3
4
Separation roller (RSPF)

Transport auxiliary roller (RSPF)
Registration roller (Drive) (RSPF)
Registration roller (Idle) RSPF)
Transport roller 2 (Idle) (RSPF)
8
9
Transport roller 2 (Drive) (RSPF)

Transport roller 3 (Idle) (RSPF)
10
11
Transport roller 3 (Drive) (RSPF)

Paper exit roller (Idle) (RSPF)
12
Paper exit roller (Drive) (RSPF)
4 2
10
11 12
Function/Operation
Feeds a document to the paper feed roller.
Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration roller and this
roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.
Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.
Reduces friction between a document and the paper guide to transport the document smoothly to the
registration roller.
Transports a document to the transport roller 2. / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts
the document scanning timing.
Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to the document.
Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to the document.
Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section.
Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to the document.
Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller.
Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller
to the document.
Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning
the back surface.
: 15/Aug.
7. Sensor
1
A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/
M356U
B. MX-M265N/M265U
12
11
3
10
13
12
11
3
10
13
14
17
14
17
4
18
16
4
18
16
5
8 6
15 19
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Scanner home
position sensor
trigger sensor
Toner motor sensor
14
Temperature sensor/
Humidity sensor
Manual paper feed
tray empty sensor 1
Manual paper feed
tray empty sensor 2
Manual feed length
detection sensor 1
Manual feed width
detection sensor
Manual feed paper
empty sensor
Shifter home position
sensor
1st paper exit sensor
1st exit tray full
detection sensor
Paper exit
divergence detection
Thermistor
15
Thermostat
16
17
Paper in sensor
1st tray (paper tray)
detection
Paper feed tray 1
upper limit detector
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
18
19
23 20
POD1
TFD1
POSD
Paper transport detection
13
Fusing temperature detection
14
Temperature sensor/
Humidity sensor
Manual paper feed
tray empty sensor 1
Manual paper feed
tray empty sensor 2
Manual feed length
detection sensor 1
Manual feed width
detection sensor
Manual feed paper
empty sensor
Shifter home position
sensor
1st paper exit sensor
1st exit tray full
detection sensor
Paper exit
divergence detection
Thermistor
Fusing section abnormally high

temperature detection
1st tray (paper tray) empty
detection
This detector detects when the
tray in paper feed tray 1
reaches its upper limit.
Detects paper empty in Paper
feed tray 1
Detects the toner density in the
developing unit.
tray in paper feed tray 2
reaches its upper limit.
2nd tray paper pass
15
Thermostat
16
17
Paper in sensor
1st tray (paper tray)
detection
Paper feed tray
OCSW
TM_CO
UNT
TH_RA/
HUD_RA
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPLD1
MPWD
MPED
SHPOS
TH_UM/
TH_US
RDTCT
PPD1
C1SS
C1LUD
21
Paper feed tray 2

C2LUD
22
2nd tray paper pass

sensor
Paper feed tray 2
paper empty detector
C2PFD
TCS
C2PED
20
8 6
21
No.
1
C1PED
23
15 19
Function and operation

Detects the scanner home
position.
Detects generation of the paper
size detection trigger signal.
Detects the rotation of the toner
motor.
Machine temperature/humidity
detection
Manual feed tray position
detection
detection
Manual feed paper length
detection
Manual feed paper width
detection
Manual feed paper empty
detection
Shifter home position sensor
detection
1st paper exit detection
1st exit tray full detection
Code
MHPS
Paper feed tray 1

Toner density sensor
20
9 22
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
18
19
20
Name
Scanner home
position sensor
trigger sensor
Toner motor sensor
Paper feed tray 1

Toner density sensor
Code
MHPS
POD1
TFD1

Detects the scanner home
position.
Detects generation of the paper
size detection trigger signal.
Detects the rotation of the toner
motor.
Machine temperature/humidity
detection
detection
detection
Manual feed paper length
detection
Manual feed paper width
detection
Manual feed paper empty
detection
Shifter home position sensor
detection
1st paper exit detection
1st exit tray full detection
POSD
OCSW
TM_CO
UNT
TH_RA/
HUD_RA
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPLD1
MPWD
MPED
SHPOS
TH_UM/
TH_US
RDTCT
PPD1
C1SS
C1LUD
C1PED
TCS

feed tray 2
Fusing temperature detection

Fusing section abnormally high
temperature detection
1st tray (paper tray) empty
detection
tray in paper feed tray reaches
its upper limit.
feed tray 1
Detects the toner density in the
developing unit.
: 15/Aug.
8. Switch
1
B. MX-M265N/M265U
A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/
M356U
2
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Power switch
Side door/Front
cover switch
2nd tray (paper tray)
detection
2nd side door cover
switch
Code
MAIN SW
DSWR/
DSWF
C2SS
DSW_C2

Turns ON/OFF the main
power source.
Side door/Front cover open
detection
2nd tray (paper tray) empty
detection
Side door open detection
No.
1
2
Name
Power switch
Side door/Front
cover switch
Code
MAIN SW
DSWR/
DSWF

Turns ON/OFF the main
power source.
Side door/Front cover open
detection
: 15/Aug.
9. Solenoid/Clutch
1
B. MX-M265N/M265U
A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/
M356U
2
1
2
1
5
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
1st tray paper feed
clutch
PS clutch
Manual paper feed
clutch
Paper exit gate
switching solenoid
(Option)
Separation pawl
solenoid
2nd tray paper feed
clutch
Paper feed transfer
clutch
No.
1
Code
C1PUC

Paper feed roller drive
RRC
MPFC
Main unit paper feed

Manual paper feed clutch
2
3
POGS1
Paper exit gate switcher
C2PUC
Separation pawl operation

solenoid
PTRC2
Paper feed transfer clutch
PSPS
Name
1st tray paper feed
clutch
PS clutch
Manual paper feed
clutch
Paper exit gate
switching solenoid
(Option)
Separation pawl
solenoid
Code
C1PUC

RRC
MPFC
Main unit paper feed

Manual paper feed clutch
POGS1
Paper exit gate switcher
PSPS
Separation pawl operation

solenoid
: 15/Aug.
10. Drive motor

1
B. MX-M265N/M265U
A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/
M356U
3
4
3
4
1
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
Polygon motor
Scan motor
ADU motor
Code
PM
MIM
ADUM
Tray lift motor

Main motor
Toner motor
Shifter motor
Paper exit reverse
motor
Tray lift motor
C1LUM
MM
TNM
OSM
POM
C2LUM

Drives the polygon mirror
Drives the scanner unit
Reverse pass for paper
transport
Tray paper lift
Main drive
Toner supply
Shifter drive
Duplex paper switching and exit
motor
Tray paper lift
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Name
Polygon motor
Scan motor
ADU motor
Code
PM
MIM
ADUM
Tray lift motor

Main motor
Toner motor
Shifter motor
Paper exit reverse
motor
C1LUM
MM
TNM
OSM
POM

Drives the polygon mirror
Drives the scanner unit
Reverse pass for paper
transport
Tray paper lift
Main drive
Toner supply
Shifter drive
Duplex paper switching and exit
motor
: 15/Aug.
11. Lamp
1
B. MX-M265N/M265U
A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/
M356U
No.
1
2
Name
Copy lamp
Heater lamp

Image exposure lamp
Fusing heat lamp
No.
1
2
Name
Copy lamp
Heater lamp

Image exposure lamp
Fusing heat lamp
: 15/Aug.
12. Fan/Filter
1
B. MX-M265N/M265U
A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/
M356U
2
2
5
5
3
6*1
4
1
1
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6*1
Name
DV cooling duct
Power supply cooling
fan 1
Ozone exhaust fan
Paper exit cooling
fan
Ozone filter
Ozone filter
Code
LSUFM
PSFM1

Cools the inside of the unit.
OZFM
Cools the inside of the machine

and discharges the ozone.
Cools the fusing section and
the paper exit section.
Absorbs ozone generated in
the image process section.
Take in an odor to exhaust.
FUFM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
DV cooling duct
Power supply cooling
fan 1
Ozone exhaust fan
Code
LSUFM
PSFM1

OZFM
Paper exit cooling

fan
Ozone filter
FUFM
Cools the inside of the machine

and discharges the ozone.
Cools the fusing section and
the paper exit section.
Absorbs ozone generated in
the image process section.
*1:Destination North America and Mexico only
: 15/Aug.
13. PWB
B. MX-M265N/M265U
A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/
M356U
13
13
10
10
4
1
4
1
5
5
12
3
14
11
12
3
14
11
15
No.
1
Name
CCD PWB
2
3
4
5
High voltage PWB

KEY PWB
LED drive PWB
LED PWB-F
LED PWB-R
LVDS PWB
MFP control PWB
ORS LED PWB
10
11
12
13
ORS-PD PWB
PCU PWB
DC power supply
PWB
SCN CNT PWB
14
15
USB I/F PWB

Tray interface PWB

Scans document images and performs A/D
conversion of the scanning signal.
High voltage control
Outputs the key operation signal.
Copy lamp control
Irradiates a manuscript with light for CCD to
read a manuscript image.
Converts the display data signal to the LCD
display signal. Controls the touch panel.
Controls image data (compression,
decompression, and filing), and controls the
whole machine.
Drives the LED for the document size
detection.
Outputs the document size detection signal.
Controls the engine section.
DC voltage control
No.
1
Controls the scanner and the operation

section.
USB I/F
2nd tray control
Name
CCD PWB
2
3
4
5
High voltage PWB

KEY PWB
LED drive PWB
LED PWB-F
LED PWB-R
LVDS PWB
MFP control PWB
ORS LED PWB
10
11
12
13
ORS-PD PWB
PCU PWB
DC power supply
PWB
SCN CNT PWB
14
USB I/F PWB

Scans document images and performs A/D
conversion of the scanning signal.
High voltage control
Outputs the key operation signal.
Copy lamp control
Converts the display data signal to the LCD
display signal. Controls the touch panel.
Controls image data (compression,
decompression, and filing), and controls the
whole machine.
Drives the LED for the document size
detection.
Outputs the document size detection signal.
Controls the engine section.
DC voltage control
Controls the scanner and the operation
section.
USB I/F
: 15/Aug.
14. Roller
1
A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/
M356U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
17
18
B. MX-M265N/M265U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
19 20 21
No.
1
2
Name
Paper exit roller
Paper exit follower
roller
Transport roller
Transport follower
roller
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
11
12
DUP transport
follower roller
DUP transport roller
Bypass tray paper
pick up roller
Bypass tray
separation roller
Transport roller
Resist follower roller
13
Resist roller
14
15
1st tray pick-up roller

1st tray paper feed
roller
1st tray separation
roller
Transport follower
roller
Transport roller
2nd tray pick-up
roller
2nd tray separation
roller
2nd tray paper feed
roller
3
4
8
9
10
16
17
18
19
20
21
Paper transport roller

3
4
Fuses toner on paper. (with the Teflon

roller)
Fuses toner on paper. (with the silicone
rubber roller)
Duplex paper transport
Name
Paper exit roller
Paper exit follower
roller
Transport roller
Transport follower
roller
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller

Picks up paper in bypass tray.
8
9
Separates a document to prevent doublefeeding. (Bypass tray)

Transfer images on the drum onto paper.
Synchronize the paper lead edge with the
image lead edge.
image lead edge.
Picks up paper from the tray.
Transports the picked up paper to RESIST
section.
Separates a document to prevent doublefeeding. (1st tray)
10
11
12
DUP transport
follower roller
DUP transport roller
Bypass tray paper
pick up roller
Bypass tray
separation roller
Transport roller
Resist follower roller
13
Resist roller
14
15
1st tray pick-up roller

1st tray paper feed
roller
1st tray separation
roller

Paper exit roller
Paper exit roller
No.
1
2
16

Paper exit roller
Paper exit roller
Fuses toner on paper. (with the Teflon
roller)
Fuses toner on paper. (with the silicone
rubber roller)
Picks up paper in bypass tray.
Separates a document to prevent doublefeeding. (Bypass tray)
Transfer images on the drum onto paper.
image lead edge.
image lead edge.
section.

section.
MX-M316N
[5]
ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, however, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would

not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No.
ADJ 1
ADJ 2
ADJ 3
ADJ 4
ADJ 5
ADJ 6
ADJ 7
ADJ 8
ADJ 9
ADJ 10
ADJ 11
ADJ 12
ADJ 13
ADJ 14
ADJ 15
ADJ 16
Adjustment item list

Developing doctor gap adjustment
MG roller main pole position adjustment
Toner density control reference value setting
High voltage values check
Check the main charger grid voltage
Check the developing bias voltage
Transfer current adjustment
Image lead edge position,
Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) (Each paper feed tray)
image loss, void area, image offCopy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning
center, image magnification
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (Document table mode)
ratio adjustment (Automatic
3C Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning
adjustment)
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (RSPF mode)
Scan image distortion
4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
adjustment (Document table
4B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
mode)
4C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
Scanner image skew adjustment (RSPF mode)
Scan image focus adjustment
Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode)
Image density adjustment
8A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
8B Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy
8B Copy / Image send /
FAX image quality
(1) mode) (separately for the low-density area and the high-density area)
adjustment (Individual
(No need to adjust normally)
adjustment)
8B Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density
(2) scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting (Normally
no need to set)
8B Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the
(3) automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No need to adjust
normally) (Background density adjustment in the scanning section)
8B Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode)
(4) (No need to adjust normally) (Effective only for the color scan
function)
8B Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction
(5) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
8B RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment (No need to adjust
(6) normally)
Paper size sensor adjustment
9A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment
9B RSPF paper feed tray document size (width) sensor adjustment
Document size detection
10A Document size sensor detection point adjustment
adjustment
10B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor
Touch panel coordinate setting
Print image position, void area,
12A Print image print area adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
off-center adjustment (Print
12B Print image off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
engine) (Manual adjustment)
Scan image magnification ratio
13A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
adjustment (Manual adjustment)
(Document table mode)
13B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document
table mode)
13C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF
mode)
13D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF
mode)
Scan image off-center
14A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
adjustment (Manual adjustment) 14B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
Copy image position and image 15A Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table
loss adjustment (Manual
mode)
adjustment)
15B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
15C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
Finisher adjustments (alignment, staple position)
Adjust the developing unit
1A
1B
1C
2A
2B
2C
3A
3B
MX-M316N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 1
Simulation
25-2
8-2
8-1
8-6
50-28
50-28
50-28
64-2
48-1
50-5
63-3 (63-5)
46-2
46-19
46-32
46-63
46-37
46-9
40-2
53-6
41-1
41-2
65-1
50-10/50-1
50-10
48-1
48-1/48-5
48-1
48-1
50-12
50-12/50-6
50-1
53-8
50-6
3-10
: 15/Aug.
3. Details of adjustment
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit

1-A Developing doctor gap adjustment
1)
Remove the doctor cover.
A
9.1mm
1-C Toner density control reference value

setting
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
2)
Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A.
* When developer is replaced.
3)
Insert a thickness gauge of 1.5mm to the positions of three

screws on the developing doctor as shown.
CAUTION: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer

is replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1)
Toner cartridge installation

Shake the toner cartridge 4 - 5 times horizontally.
1
Toner cartridges must be installed to execute this setting
(Toner density control reference value setting)
Because of the structure of this machine, if SIM25-2 is executed without the toner cartridges installed, the waste toner
transport pipe of the process UN may be locked.
R
A
C
A
F
A
4)
Tighten the developing doctor fixing screw.
5)
Check the clearance of the developing doctor. If it is within the

specified range, then fix the doctor fixing screw with screw
lock.
CAUTION: This is performed only when a new toner cartridge is

installed.
45
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the

developing doctor and the MG roller.
<Adjustment specification>
Developing doctor gap

F/C/R: 1.5 +0.1mm
-0.15mm
1-B MG roller main pole position adjustment

1)
Put the developing unit on a flat surface.
2)
Tie a needle or pin on a string.
3)
Hold the string and bring the needle close to the MG roller horizontally. (Do not use paper clip, which is too heavy to make a
correct adjustment.) (Put the developing unit horizontally for
this adjustment.)
4)
Do not bring the needle into contact with the MG roller, but
bring it to a position 2 or 3mm apart from the MG roller. Mark
the point on the MG roller which is on the extension line from
the needle tip.
5)
Measure the distance from the marking position to the top of

the doctor plate of the developing unit to insure that it is
9.1mm.
If the distance is not within the specified range, loosen the fixing screw A of the main pole adjustment plate, and move the
adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
2)
Press the lock release lever and insert it along the guide in the
machine until it locks securely.
CAUTION: Before installation, clean and remove dust and dirt from
the toner cartridge.
3)
With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.

7(67 6,08/$7,21
12
&/26(
4)
Close the front cabinet.
5)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, [EXECUTE] key is highlighted (in black) and the developer adjustment is started. (The
adjustment is automatically performed for 3 minutes.)
6)
When the developer adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] key

returns to the normal state (in white), and the developer adjustment value is displayed.
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-

CAUTION: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the

adjustment result is not reflected.
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the operation,

the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.

EXECUTE
If [EE-EU] or [EE-EL] is displayed, setting of the reference toner density control value is not completed normally.
or INTERRUPT

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Troubleshoot the cause, remove the cause, and perform setting again.
&/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&6
Error
display
EE-EL
EE-EU
7)
(;(&87(

Error name
EL abnormality
EU abnormality
Cancel SIM25-2 with [CA] key.
CAUTION: When not replacing the developer, do not execute

SIM25-2.
Adjustment completed

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-
(;(&87(

Abnormal end

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&6(((/
(;(&87(
Detail of error
Sensor output level than 78
Sensor output level over 178

: 15/Aug.
3)
ADJ 2 High voltage values check
Enter the main charger values of items A/B under TS_OFF/

ON.
When [OK] key is pressed, the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the
procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec.
2-A Check the main charger grid voltage

setting
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
This check must be performed in the following cases:
Stop it in a short time to affect the drum surface. (less than five
seconds)
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.

* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1)
Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
2-B Check the developing bias voltage setting
&/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$ &23<*%

This check must be performed in the following cases:
% 35,17(5)$;*%
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.


1)

76B2))
76B21
(;(&87(
2.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$ &23<'9%
UTE

% 35,17(5)$;'9%

OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$ &23<*%

% 35,17(5)$;*%
76B2))

76B21
(;(&87(
2.
OK

76B2))
76B21
(;(&87(
2.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$ &23<'9%
2)
Select an item to be checked.
Butt
on
TS_
OFF
TS_
ON
Item
Display
Content
COPY GB
PRINTER
FAX
GB
COPY GB
PRINTER
GB
Charging/grid
bias set value in
a copy job
(Toner save
mode OFF)
Charging/grid
bias set value in
a Print/FAX job
(Toner save
mode OFF)
Charging/grid
bias set value in
a copy job
(Toner save
mode ON)
Charging/grid
bias set value in
a print job
(Toner save
mode ON)

% 35,17(5)$;'9%

0 - 750
Default value
26
31
35
575 575 605
0 - 750
575
575
605
0 - 750
495
495
495
0 - 750
425
425
425
Setting
range
76B2))
76B21
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
2.
: 15/Aug.
2)
Select an item to be checked.
Butt
on
TS_
OFF
Item
A
TS_
ON
3)
Display
COPY
DVB
PRINTER
FAX
DVB
COPY
DVB
PRINTER
DVB
Content
Developing bias
set value in a
copy job (Toner
save mode
OFF)
Developing bias
set value in a
Print/FAX job
(Toner save
mode OFF)
Developing bias
set value in a
copy job (Toner
save mode ON)
Developing bias
set value in a
print job (Toner
save mode ON)
2-C Transfer current adjustment

Setting
range
0 - 650
Default value
26
31
35
400 400 430

* When the TC high voltage PWB is replaced.
0 - 650
400
400
430
1)

7(67
6,08/$7,21
12
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&3/$,163;:
0 - 650
320
320
320

% 7&3/$,1'3;:

& 7&3/$,163;1
' 7&3/$,1'3;1
( 7&3/$,163;1
) 7&3/$,1'3;1
0 - 650
250
250
250
* 7&+($9<:
+ 7&+($9<1
, 7&+($9<1
- 7&2+3:
. 7&2+31
/ 7&2+31
Enter the developing bias values of items A/B under TS_OFF/

ON.
(;(&87(
When [OK] key is pressed, the set value is saved.
10-key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the

procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec.
EXECUTE
&/26(
Stop it in a short time to affect the drum surface. (less than five
seconds)
2.
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

7(67
6,08/$7,21
12
&/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&3/$,163;:

% 7&3/$,1'3;:
& 7&3/$,163;1
' 7&3/$,1'3;1
( 7&3/$,163;1
) 7&3/$,1'3;1
* 7&+($9<:
+ 7&+($9<1
, 7&+($9<1
- 7&2+3:
. 7&2+31
/ 7&2+31
(;(&87(
2)
2.
Select an item to be adjusted.

Item/Display
1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
TC PLAIN SPX W
TC PLAIN DPX W
TC PLAIN SPX N1
TC PLAIN DPX N1
TC PLAIN SPX N2
TC PLAIN DPX N2
TC HEAVY1 W
TC HEAVY1 N1
TC HEAVY1 N2
TC OHP W
TC OHP N1
TC OHP N2
TC ENVELOPE W
TC ENVELOPE N1
TC ENVELOPE N2
TC THIN W
TC THIN N1
TC THIN N2
TC LABEL W
TC LABEL N1
TC LABEL N2
Setting
range
Content
Primary transfer bias reference value
Plain paper
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Thin paper
Label paper
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
26
18
16
22
20
26
24
14
18
22
10
14
14
14
18
22
14
18
22
14
18
22
Default value
31
18
16
22
20
26
24
14
18
22
10
14
14
14
18
22
14
18
22
14
18
22
35
20
16
24
22
28
26
16
20
24
10
14
14
16
20
24
16
20
24
16
20
24
: 15/Aug.
Item/Display
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
0 - 100
26
14
18
22
26
50
Default value
31
14
18
22
26
50
35
16
20
24
24
50
Setting
range
Content
V
W
X
Y
Z
TC TAB W
TC TAB N1
TC TAB N2
TC POSTCARD N2
TC ADSORPTION W
AA
TC ADSORPTION N1
0 - 100
50
50
50
AB
TC ADSORPTION N2
0 - 100
50
50
50
AC
TC INTERVAL BIAS W
0 - 100
50
50
50
AD
TC INTERVAL BIAS N1
0 - 100
50
50
50
AE
TC INTERVAL BIAS N2
0 - 100
50
50
50
AF
TC FRONTEDGE
0 - 100
60
60
60
AG
TC BACKEND SPX
0 - 100
90
90
90
AH
TC BACKEND DPX
0 - 100
80
80
80
3)
Primary transfer bias reference value
Tab paper
Post card
Enter the adjustment value (specified value), and press [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the electric current entered in the procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified output is provided.
ADJ 3 Image lead edge position,

image loss, void area, image
off-center, image magnification
ratio adjustment
(Automatic adjustment)
3-A Print image off-center automatic

adjustment (Print engine)
(Each paper feed tray)
1)
Enter the SIM50-28 mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with

SIM50-28.
2&$'-
63)$'-
6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7
'$7$
* ADJ 12
Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, offcenter adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 13
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 14
Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)

* ADJ 15
Copy image position, image loss adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
2)
Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the key.
3)
Select [ALL] with the key.
Menu in SIM50-28 mode

Display/Item
OC ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/
PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
Content
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper
feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
Adjustment result display
Display of data used when an adjustment is executed
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
/($'
2))6(7
$//

CAUTION: By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following

items can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.
4)
Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7
&6
&6
&6
&6
$'8
3-B Copy mode image lead edge position,

image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'-
63)$'-
6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7
'$7$
(;(&87(
5)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
6)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

The adjustment pattern is printed out.

CAUTION: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
adjustment pattern.

2)
Select [OC ADJ] with the key.
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key.
(Any paper size will do.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7
&6
&6
(;(&87(
4)


The adjustment pattern is printed out.
7)
5)
The following item is automatically adjustment.
CAUTION: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document

guide.
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment

* Print image off-center adjustment
8)
Press [OK] key.
In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed

adjustment pattern.
The adjustment result becomes valid.

Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
6)
2)
Press the [SPF ADJ] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7
6,'(
6,'(
$//
12:(;(&87,1*
5(35,17

(;(&87(
3)
The following item is automatically adjustment.

* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
automatic adjustment
7)
Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette

used to print RSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corresponding button:
SIDE1: RSPF adjustment for the front side
SIDE2: RSPF adjustment for the back side
Press [OK] key.
ALL: RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
The adjustment result becomes valid.
4)
Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print RSPF

adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
5)
Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts self-print of

RSPF adjustment patterns.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is

self-printing RSPF adjustment patterns.
3/($6(386+&$.(<
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you

can start RSPF adjustments.
6)
RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF.

(Set so that the pattern surface faces up.)

3-C Copy mode image lead edge position,

image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
(RSPF mode)
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'-
63)$'-
6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7
'$7$
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
RSPF adjustment patterns again.
7)

Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts reading

RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side).
reading and calculating RSPF adjustment patterns (for the
front side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where
you can have the machine start reading RSPF adjustment
patterns (for the back side).
Adjustment Item List

* RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side)
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion

adjustment
* RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side)

* RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment
(front side)
8)
RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF.

(Set so that the pattern surface faces down.)

* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
1)
Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are
fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
2)
Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
RSPF adjustment patterns again.
9)
Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts loading

RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
reading RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
you can view the results of the adjustments.
Adjustment Item List
* RSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)
* RSPF original off-center adjustment (back side)
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on

the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
* RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment

(back side)
10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the RSPF adjustment
patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] key.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] key.
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
key.
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
return to the top menu, press the [OK] key.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.
* To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] key.
3)
Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
4)
Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5)
Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above procedures, perform the following procedures.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
6)
With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
4-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
1)
Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.

(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L = 10mm
L
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
30mm
3)
Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.
4-C Scan image (main scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La
Lb
1)
Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.

(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform
the following procedures.
4)
Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)
L = 10mm
L
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
3)
Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.

If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is
completed.)
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform

the following procedure.
5)
6)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scanner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
4)
Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand

and right-hand side images distortions.
Lc
Lc
Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)

is satisfied.
Copy A
Copy B
Ld
There is no difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld
Ld
There is some difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with

the above procedures, perform ADJ 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment.
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
5)
Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front

frame side.
2)
Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the RSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
? Check with one of the following methods.
Check Method 1
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| 1 mm
Check Method 2
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the

scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
6)
Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front

frame side, change the overall height.
7)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
0 - 1.0mm
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main

scanning direction is in the specified range.
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew

adjustment (RSPF mode)
If the copy image is not in the above state, perform the procedure 3).

* The RSPF section has been disassembled.
3)
Open the RSPF unit, and loosen the fixing screw of the hinge.
4)
Slide the RSPF unit in the arrow direction to make the skew
adjustment.
5)
Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) - (b) =
1mm or less) is satisfied.
* When replacing the RSPF unit.

* The RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1)
Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the selfprint pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1,
B = 1,
C = 254,
D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks A and B to the
leading and trailing edges of the paper surface lead edge section.
Paper pass direction
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment

* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
4)
Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
5)
Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
6)
Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main

scanning direction from the following formula.
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction

ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scanning direction is not properly adjusted.
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
copy image.

1)
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction

ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1

% &&'68%

& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
100mm scale
(Orignal)
( 63)%0$,1

) 63)%68%
10
20
90
100
110
1.0mm
2.
2)
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
shorter than
the original)
Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).

Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3)
10
20
90
100
110
Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.

If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures.
7)
Remove the document table glass.
8)
Remove the dark box cover.
9)
To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
NOTE: MEMO: This procedure must be executed also when the

CCD unit is replaced.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
ADJ 7 Print lead edge image position

adjustment (Printer mode)
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
lead edge void area to greater than the standard value
(3mm) in the printer mode.
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$ '(1&
CAUTION: Never loosen the screws marked with X.

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and

the angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to
cause a problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that case, the whole scanner unit must be
replaced.
% '(1%
& )52175($5
' '(1%0)7
( '(1%&6
) '(1%&6
* '(1%&6
+ '(1%&6
, '(1%$'8
- '(1%+9
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
(;(&87(
10-key
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
2.
End of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$ '(1&

% '(1%
& )52175($5
' '(1%0)7
( '(1%&6
) '(1%&6
* '(1%&6
+ '(1%&6
, '(1%$'8
- '(1%+9
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5
(;(&87(
2)
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
CAUTION: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100
1.0%) and the specified resolution is obtained based on
the optical system structure.
2.
Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper
in it.
Display/Item
DEN-C
DEN-B
FRONT/REAR
DENB-MFT
DENB-CS1
DENB-CS2
DENB-CS3
DENB-CS4
DENB-ADU
Content
Printer lead edge image
position adjustment
Rear edge void area
adjustment
FRONT/REAR void area
adjustment
Manual feed rear edge void
area adjustment correction
value
Tray 1 rear edge void area
adjustment correction value
ADU rear edge void area
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
30
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
20
1 - 99
57
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
57
1 - 99
57
1 - 99
57
1 - 99
60
Display/Item
J
DENB-HV
K
L
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
3)
DUPLEX
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
YES
NO
Content
Heavy paper correction
value
Number of print
Tray
Manual
selection
paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Duplex print Yes
selection
No
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 999
1-5 1
Default
50
1
2 (CS1)
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy

of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG0326FC11), and check that they are proper.
Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
0-1
2
3
4
5
0
1
To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ).

Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo
mode (Manual).
1 (NO)
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment

mode must be set to the default (center).
Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
the following conditions.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

4)
ADJ 8 Image density adjustment
Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard adjustment value: 4.0mm or less
CAUTION: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
1
SHARP gray chart
SHARP GRAY CHART

3
Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.
4.0mm or less
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

5)
Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjustment item DENC with the scroll key.
6)
Change the adjustment value.

Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
10
Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)

1)
There are 12 void areas.
2)
The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen.
3)
The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so great.
4)
There are no white and black streaks.
5)
The background density is not so light.
6)
The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.
Void
Void
Resolution
Resolution
Density difference between the F and the R sides.
No white and black streaks
Resolution
Void
Void
Low-density gradation
Background density
Resolution
Resolution
Void
Void
8-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)

* When the CCD unit is replaced.
2)
Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.

The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
* When a U2 trouble is occurred.

* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
(1) Note before adjustment

? Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens surface are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
? Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the
SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are free from
dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
(;(&87(
(2) Adjustment procedures

1)
Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to

the reference position on the left rear frame side of the document table.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
the left side.

NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC

Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature
and low humidity.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
CAUTION: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document table.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
8-B Copy / Image send / FAX image quality

adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This is used to execute a fine adjustment in each mode when there is a request from the user. Normally, however, there is no need to use it.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
46-02
46-04
46-05
46-08
46-09
46-19
46-32
46-37
46-39
46-40
46-41
46-42
46-43
46-44
46-45
46-47
46-60
46-61
46-62
46-63
Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each

monochrome copy mode) (separately for the lowdensity area and the high-density area)
Color image send mode image density adjustment
(for each mode)
Monochrome image send mode image density
adjustment (for each mode)
Image send mode RGB color balance adjustment
(separately for the low-density area and the highdensity area)
RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment
Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
document density scanning operation (exposure
operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
Document low density image density reproduction
adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/
FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document
reproduction adjustment
FAX send image sharpness adjustment
FAX send image density adjustment
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
FAX send image density adjustment (Normal text mode)
FAX send image density adjustment (Fine text mode)
FAX send image density adjustment (Super fine mode)
FAX send image density adjustment (Ultra fine mode)
FAX send image density adjustment (600dpi mode)
Copy image, image send image, FAX send image
(JPEG) compression ratio setting
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
Color (Scan) mode sharpness adjustment
Area separation recognition level adjustment
ACS, area separation, background image process,
automatic exposure mode operation conditions setting
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
Scan low density image density adjustment (for each
mode)
Copy MODE
Monochrome mode
Auto
Manual
IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE

Color mode
Monochrome mode
Auto
Manual
Auto
Manual
FAX
Printer
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
*1: Text Printed Photo / Copy document, Text Printed Photo only
8-B (1)
Monochrome copy density adjustment
(for each monochrome copy mode)
(separately for the low-density area and the
high-density area)
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually.
Display/Item
I
AUTO1
(COPY
TO COPY)
Auto 1
(Copy document)
AUTO2
(COPY TO COPY)
Auto 2
(Copy document)
TEXT
(COPY TO COPY)
Text
(Copy document)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
TEXT/PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
Text/Printed
Photo
(Copy document)
Text/Photograph
(Copy document)

* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
copy by each the copy mode individually.
3)
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the

copy mode individually.
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
4)
$ $872

% $872
' 7(;735,17('3+272
) 35,17('3+272
* 3+272*5$3+
+ 0$3
+,*+
2.
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@

$ $872

% $872
8-B (2)
Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
mode document density scanning
operation (exposure operation) conditions
setting (Normally no need to set)
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for document density in monochrome auto copy mode.
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of document, change the setting.
* When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
automatic copy mode.
' 7(;735,17('3+272
( 7(;73+272
) 35,17('3+272
* When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
* 3+272*5$3+
* When a document with colored background is copied.
+ 0$3
1)
2)
Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
This setting is required in the following cases.
& 7(;7
/2:
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the test

mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the
copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
( 7(;73+272
50
50
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the test mode

alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
& 7(;7
/2:
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
LOW
HIGH
Default
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjusting the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value.
* When there is request from the user.

1)
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Content

+,*+
2.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Content
AUTO1
Auto 1
AUTO2
Auto 2
TEXT
Text
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
Text/Printed
Photo
TEXT/PHOTO
Text/Photograph
PRINTED PHOTO
Printed Photo
PHOTOGRAPH
Photograph
MAP
Map
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
&/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Display/Item
Default
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
$(B02'(
02'(
02'(
$(B6723B&23<
5($/7,0(
6723
$(B6723B)$;
2))
21
$(B6723B6&$1
35(6&$1
5($/7,0(
6723
35(6&$1
$(B),/7(5
62)7
1250$/
6+$53
$(B:,'7+
)8//
3$57

2)
Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE

STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or
"PART", in some cases.
Display/Item
AE_MODE
AE_STOP_COPY
Content
Auto exposure mode
Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for copy)
Set value
MODE1, MODE2
REALTIME/
STOP/PRESCAN
Default
MODE2
STOP
Display/Item
AE_STOP_FAX
AE_STOP_SCAN
AE_FILTER
AE_WIDTH
Content
Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for FAX)
Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for scanner)
Auto exposure filter
setting
AE exposure width
Set value
ON/OFF
REALTIME/
STOP/PRESCAN
SOFT
NORMAL
SHARP
FULL
PART
Default
ON
Document table/RSPF mode

3 to 7mm
STOP
NORMAL
PART
AE WIDTH = FULL
NOTE:
MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
MODE2: Normal gamma
STOP:
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document,
decides the output image density according to the density of that
part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.)
Document table mode

3 to 7mm
REALTIME:
Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides
the output image density according to the density of each part of
the document. (The output image density may be not constant at
whole area.)
100mm
AE WIDTH = PART
PRESCAN:
Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the output image density is determined according to the average of the
scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the
surface.)
RSPF mode
AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE
3 to 7mm
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE
100mm
AE WIDTH = PART
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:

When the density of the document of the read area is light, output
image density is increased by control. When the density of the document of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased
by control.
Document density detection area
8-B (3)
Document low density image density
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
$ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
$ &23<2&
% &23<563)
& 6&$12&

% &2/25&23<7(;7
& &2/25&23<35,17('3+272
' 6&$1563)
' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
( )$;2&
( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
) )$;563)
) &2/25&23<0$3
* &2/25&23</,*+7
+ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
, &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
- &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/ &2/25386+7(;7
2.
2.
10-key
10-key
OK
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*

&/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
$ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
$ &23<2&

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
% &23<563)

& 6&$12&
% &2/25&23<7(;7
& &2/25&23<35,17('3+272
' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
' 6&$1563)
( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
( )$;2&
) &2/25&23<0$3
) )$;563)
* &2/25&23</,*+7
+ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
, &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
- &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/ &2/25386+7(;7
2.
2)
Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.
3)
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Display/Item
COPY : OC
COPY : RSPF
SCAN : OC
SCAN : RSPF
FAX : OC
FAX : RSPF
Content
Copy mode (for OC)
Copy mode (for RSPF)
Scanner mode (for OC)
Scanner mode (for RSPF)
FAX mode (for OC)
FAX mode (for RSPF)
Set value
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
Default
196
196
196
196
196
196
8-B (4)
Copy/Scan low density image density
adjustment (for each mode)
(No need to adjust normally) (Effective only
for the color scan function)
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low density area in the scanner mode.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
1)
2.
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Display/Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR COPY : TEXT
COLOR COPY :
PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR COPY :
PHOTOGRAPH
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PHOTO
COLOR COPY : MAP
COLOR COPY : LIGHT
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
COLOR COPY : TEXT
(COPY TO COPY)
COLOR COPY :
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
COLOR PUSH : TEXT/
PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR PUSH : TEXT
COLOR PUSH :
PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR PUSH :
PHOTOGRAPH
COLOR PUSH :
TEXT/PHOTO
COLOR PUSH : MAP
Content
Text print (color copy)
Set
value
1-9
Default
3
Text (color copy)

Printed photo
(color copy)
Photograph
(color copy)
Text/Photograph
(color copy)
Map (color copy)
Light document
(color copy)
Copy document,
Text print (color copy)
1-9
1-9
3
5
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
5
6
1-9
Copy document, Text

(color copy)
Copy document,
Printed photo
(color copy)
Text print
(color PUSH)
Text (color PUSH)
Printed photo
(color PUSH)
Photograph
(color PUSH)
Text/Photograph
(color PUSH)
Map (color PUSH)
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
3
5
1-9
1-9
1-9
* Items A - J are not used. (Changes do not affect the picture

quality.)
3)
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased.
8-B (5)
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color
document reproduction adjustment
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow
image in monochrome copy mode.
2)
Display/Item
(Copy mode)
A R-Ratio
B G-Ratio
3)
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red

image in case of making a color copy of the color document in
monochrome copy mode.
Press [OK] key.
&/26(
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37

mode and change the adjustment value.
% *5DWLR
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is

obtained.

$5(<28685("
'()$8/7
<(6
12
8-B (6)
RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
(;(&87(
10-key
DEFAULT
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$ 55DWLR

This setting is normally not required, however, in the following

cases, make changes to the setting:
* When copy in RSPF mode differs from copy in document table
mode.
* When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high.
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode

(manual), check the copy.
$ 55DWLR

108
678
5)
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
Default
4)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Gray making setting (R)

Gray making setting (G)
Adjustment
range
0 - 1000
0 - 1000
When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased,

copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.

Content
When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,

copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
1)
Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
* When the RSPF unit is disassembled.
% *5DWLR

* The CCD unit has been replaced.

* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
a. Adjustment procedure
$5(<28685("
'()$8/7
<(6
12
EXECUTE
1)
(;(&87(

NO
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17

&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$ &23</2:

$ 55DWLR
% 6&$1/2:
C )$;/2:
D &23<+,*+
% *5DWLR
( 6&$1+,*+

F )$;+,*+
2.
$5(<28685("
'()$8/7
<(6
12
(;(&87(
10-key
YES
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(

% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$ 55DWLR

% *5DWLR
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$ &23</2:

% 6&$1/2:
C )$;/2:
D &23<+,*+
( 6&$1+,*+
F )$;+,*+
'()$8/7
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
2.
2)
Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
1)
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY

LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D
(COPY HIGH)".

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
Item/Display
A
COPY : LOW
SCAN : LOW
FAX : LOW
COPY : HIGH
SCAN : HIGH
FAX : HIGH
3)
Content
RSPF copy mode exposure
adjustment (Low density side)
RSPF scanner mode exposure
RSPF FAX mode exposure
adjustment (High density side)
Setting
range
1 - 99
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
Default
48
1 - 99
48
1 - 99
48
1 - 99
53
1 - 99
53
1 - 99
53
(;(&87(
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

In case of increase of image density, input large numeric
value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
numeric value.
4)
Press [OK] key.
5)
Make a copy in the RSPF mode and check the copy.
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
(;(&87,1*
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 mode

and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
(;(&87(
ADJ 9 Paper size sensor adjustment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3$5326,7,21$'-8670(17
9-A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width)

sensor adjustment
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
Repeat the above procedure to adjust

the A5R width MIN POSITION.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
(;(&87(
2)
Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
9-B RSPF paper feed tray document size (width)

sensor adjustment
* The RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
3)
&/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
The maximum width position detection level of the manual

paper feed guide is recognized.
4)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size.
5)

display.
The A4R size width position detection level of the manual
6)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
7)
(;(&87(
2)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
3)

The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
5)

The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
7)

8)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
9)

The minimum width detection level is recognized.

display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8)
Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
9)

display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.

When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
When each of the above operations has been completed, the

"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations has
failed, the "ERROR" message appears.
10-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size

sensor
ADJ 10 Document size detection

adjustment
1)

* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
&/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
:,7+7+(25,*,1$/&29(523(1('7851217+((;(&87(
.(<:,7+7+(25,*,1$/217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
* When U2 trouble has occurred.

10-A Document size sensor detection point

adjustment
1)
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
EXECUTE
&/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6:
3'
3'
3'
3'
3'
3'
3'

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
6(7$1$6,=(h&23<3$3(5217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
$1':,7+7+(2&23(1('7851217+((;(&87(.(<

Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw

and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
top from the table glass is 20.2 +/- 0.25mm by slowly tilting the
document detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document detection function may malfunction.)
(;(&87(
Adjustment
failed
EXECUTE
Adjustment completed

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(1625/(9(/,6$'-867('
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
20.2
&/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
3+2726(1625(5525326,7,21
3'3'3'3'3'3'3'
0.25mm
(;(&87(
2)
Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3)
Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press

[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE

PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED " is displayed.
ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting
ADJ 12 Print image position, void area,

off-center adjustment (Print
engine) (Manual adjustment)

* The operation panel has been replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic

adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.

1)
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this

adjustment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a

satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic
adjustment (ADJ 3).
12-A Print image print area adjustment

(Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
* When a paper tray is replaced.
2)
Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).

When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the display returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.

* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen

again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display

frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.

1)
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 0$,10)7

% 0$,1&6

& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1$'8
* 68%0)7
+ 68%&6
, 68%'6.
- 68%$'8
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
2.
EXECUTE
End of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 0$,10)7

% 0$,1&6

& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1$'8
* 68%0)7
+ 68%&6
, 68%'6.
- 68%$'8
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
2)
3)
2.
Set A4 (11 x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select an
adjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items A J and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "L" to
select the paper feed tray which is to be used for executing
test printing.
4)
Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below

are in the range of the standard values.
X
Y
Z1/Z2
Content
Lead edge void area
Rear edge void area
FRONT/REAR void area
Standard adjustment value

4.0mm or less
2.0 - 5.0mm
2.0 +/- 2.0mm
6)
Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) with

the scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key.
Item/Display
Void area
adjustment
DENA
DENB
Z1
2.0
2.0mm
Sub
scanning
direction
print area
correction
value
X
4.0mm or less
Y
2.0 - 5.0mm
FRONT/
REAR
DENB-MFT
DENB-CS1
DENB-CS2
DENB-CS3
DENB-CS4
DENB-ADU
DENB-HV
Content
Lead edge void area
adjustment
Rear edge void area
adjustment
FRONT/REAR void
area adjustment
Manual feed
correction value
Tray 1 correction value
ADU correction value
Heavy paper
correction value
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
30
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
20
1 - 99
57
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
57
57
57
60
50
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
Z2
2.0
NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related
as follows:
2.0mm
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired

condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
NOTE: Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
5)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ 55&$

NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
(DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
The adjustment item (DENB) have a effect on the paper of all
paper feed tray.
That is, adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to
adjustment item (DENB) for each paper tray.
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to
check that the void area is within the specified range.
% 55&%&6
& 55&%'6.
' 55&%0)7
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if

the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of item (RRCB-XXX) in SIM 50-1.
( 55&%$'8
) /($'
* 6,'(
+ '(1$
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
, '(1%
- )52175($5
. 2))6(7B2&
/ 6&$1B63(('B2&
2.
10-key
OK
* When a paper tray is replaced.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$ 55&$

* When the paper tray section is disassembled.

* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
12-B Print image off-center adjustment

(Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
% 55&%&6
& 55&%'6.
' 55&%0)7
( 55&%$'8
) /($'
* 6,'(
+ '(1$
, '(1%
- )52175($5
. 2))6(7B2&
/ 6&$1B63(('B2&
2.
1)
Enter SIM 50-10 mode.
6)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is

printed.
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 0$,10)7

% 0$,1&6

& 0$,1&6
Change the adjustment value.

Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1$'8
* 68%0)7
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is

changed by about 0.1mm.
+ 68%&6
, 68%'6.
- 68%$'8
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)

are satisfied.
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
2.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
7)
End of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating

the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
&/26(
Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2

pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direction. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 0$,10)7

% 0$,1&6

& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1$'8
* 68%0)7
+ 68%&6
, 68%'6.
- 68%$'8
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
2)
2.
Select the target paper feed tray (MAIN-XX) with the scroll key.
Display/Item
NO
Content
Not select
Setting range
1
3)
Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in procedure 2).
4)
5)
Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the correct position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
RV
2.0mm 2.0mm

adjustment.
adjustment (ADJ 3).
FV
2.0mm
2.0mm
RV: REAR VOID AREA

FV: FRONT VOID AREA
RV + FV +/- 4.0mm
RV = 2.0 +/- 2.0mm
FV = 2.0 +/- 2.0mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
3)
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the

copy mode, and make a copy.
4)

5)

* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scanning direction is not properly adjusted.
Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.

When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
CAUTION: If the default adjustment value of the scan image magnification ration adjustment (main scanning direction) of
SIM 48-1, copy image quality may be degraded. Therefore, this adjustment must be executed only when there
is a special necessity.
13-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (Document table mode)
Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified

range (100 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.

adjustment.
adjustment (ADJ 3).
Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio

is within the specified range (100 1.0%).
13-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(sub scanning direction) (Manual
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image sub scanning direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
1)
Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure

below.
2)
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing

position adjustment) must have been completed.
1)

below.

2)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1

% &&'68%

% &&'68%

& 63)0$,1
'
63)68%
63)%0$,1
63)%68%
& 63)0$,1

'
63)68%
63)%0$,1
63)%68%
2.
2.
3)
2)
Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
3)
Measure the images on the copy paper and the original

images.
Copy magnification ratio
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than
the original)
(Original dimension - Copy dimension)

Original dimension
10
20
90
100
100%
original
copy
110
10
Scale
(Original)
10
20
90
100
4)
250
200
10
50
100
150
200
250
Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following

formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
10
20
90
100
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
110
Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified

range (100 1.0%).
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range

(100 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures.
5)
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100

1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5)
150
110
4)
(Example 2)
Copy B
(Longer than
the original)
100
50

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.

When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
% &&'68%

& 63)0$,1
'
63)68%
63)%0$,1
63)%68%
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is

within the specified range (100 1.0%).
2.
13-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(main scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
RSPF
Item
Display
Content
CCD(MAIN)
CCD(SUB)
SPF(MAIN)
SPF(SUB)
SPFB(MAIN)
SPFB(SUB)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.

* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy
image in the main scanning direction is not proper.
* When the RSPF is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures
1)
Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the document tray of the RSPF.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
A4 size
6)
10mm
10mm
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with

the scroll key.
SPF (MAIN)
(Both the front surface

and the back surface)
SCAN main scanning

magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
SCAN sub scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
RSPF document front
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
RSPF document front
adjustment (Sub scan)
RSPF document back
RSPF document back
Setting
range
1 - 99
SPFB (MAIN)
Main scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface)
Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)
7)
Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
5)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%.
8)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is

obtained.

% &&'68%

& 63)0$,1
'
63)68%
63)%0$,1
63)%68%
13-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (RSPF mode)
* When the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.
2.
* When the EEPROM on the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.

Item
* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy

image in the sub scanning direction is not proper.
Display
Content
CCD(MAIN)
CCD(SUB)
SPF(MAIN)
SPF(SUB)
SPFB(MAIN)
SPFB(SUB)
* When the RSPF is disassembled.

1)
Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the document tray of the RSPF.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
10mm
A4 size
6)
SPFB (SUB)
2)
Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
3)
Measure the images on the copy paper and the original

images.
7)
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface)
Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)
Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10key, and press [OK] key.
10
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification ratio is increased.
50
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%.
100
8)
10
150
50
original

obtained.
200
100
150
copy
200
4)
Default
value
50
Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.

SPF (SUB)
10mm
SCAN main scanning

magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
SCAN sub scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
RSPF document front
RSPF document front
RSPF document back
RSPF document back
Setting
range
1 - 99
Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following

formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(100 +/- 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures.
ADJ 14 Scan image off-center
3)

adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 2&


% 63)6,'(

& 63)6,'(

adjustment.
adjustment (ADJ 3).
2.
14-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual

4)
Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.

6)
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is satisfied.
1)
Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the

adjustment mode (document table).
14-B Scan image off-center adjustment


* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
A=B

* When the RSPF section is disassembled.
B

CAUTION: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ
14A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table
mode) must have been properly adjusted.
2)
1)
Check the copy image center position.

If A - B = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
Prepare the adjustment chart.

Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back surface of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
direction.
Paper transport direction
A'
Front surface
Back surface
A' - B' = 1.0mm

(100%)
B'
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.
Draw a line at the center of the

front surface and the back surface
of paper in parallel with the paper
transport direction.
2)
Set the adjustment chart to the RSPF.
3)
Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the

manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.
SIM50-6
original
Item/Display
A
SIDE1
SIDE2
Image
loss
amount
setting
SIDE1
Content
copy
If the difference is within the range of 0 2.7mmm there is no

need to perform the adjustment.
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures.
4)
Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode.

G
SIM50-12

6,08/$7,21
7(67
12
&/26(
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
Image
loss
amount
setting
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 2&

% 63)6,'(

& 63)6,'(
OFFSET_SPF1
OFFSET_SPF2
SCAN_SPEED_SPF1
SCAN_SPEED_SPF2
2.
SIM50-6

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
$ 6,'(

% 6,'(
( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
* )5217B5($56,'(
, 2))6(7B63)
. 6&$1B63(('B63)
/ 6&$1B63(('B63)
2.
5)
SPF(SIDE1)
SPF(SIDE2)
Content
Document table image offcenter adjustment
SPF front surface image offcenter adjustment
SPF back surface image offcenter adjustment
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image

position is shifted to the rear frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
20
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
30
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
30
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.

SIM50-12
SIM50-12
0 - 99
* The SPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for

countermeasures against the case when shades are
produced.
- 2))6(7B63)
OC
50
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(
1 - 99
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the

image loss is increased.
) /($'B('*(6,'(
Display
Default
value
50
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan

timing is delayed.
& /($'B('*(6,'(

' )5217B5($56,'(
Item
Front surface
document scan
position adjustment
(CCD)
Back surface
document scan
position adjustment
(CCD)
Front surface lead
edge image loss
amount setting
Front surface side
image loss amount
setting
Front surface rear
edge image loss
amount setting
Back surface lead
edge image loss
amount setting
Back surface side
image loss amount
setting
Back surface rear
edge image loss
amount setting
RSPF front surface
document off-center
adjustment
RSPF back surface
document off-center
adjustment
RSPF document
front surface
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
scan)
RSPF document
back surface
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
scan)
Setting
range
1 - 99
SPF(SIDE1)
SPF(SIDE2)
Front surface mode

Back surface mode
SIM50-6
OFFSET SPF1
OFFSET SPF2
6)
Front surface mode

Back surface mode

(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
shifted to the rear.)

obtained.
ADJ 15 Copy image position and image
2)

loss adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ 55&$


% 55&%&6
& 55&%'6.
' 55&%0)7

adjustment.
( 55&%$'8

adjustment (ADJ 3).
+ '(1$
) /($'
* 6,'(
, '(1%
- )52175($5
. 2))6(7B2&
/ 6&$1B63(('B2&
2.
15-A Copy image position, image loss, and void

area adjustment (Manual adjustment)
10-key
OK


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$ 55&$

% 55&%&6
& 55&%'6.
' 55&%0)7
( 55&%$'8
) /($'
* 6,'(
+ '(1$
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
, '(1%
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.

NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
the ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image position, image
magnification ratio, void area adjustments has been completed normally.
1)
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
- )52175($5
. 2))6(7B2&
/ 6&$1B63(('B2&
2.
3)

below.
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
plate.
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
edge can be seen.
Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.

Item/Display
Lead
edge
adjustment
value
RRCA
RRCB-CS12
C
D
RRCB-DSK
RRCB-MFT
RRCB-ADU
F
G
H
I
Image
loss area
setting
value
LEAD
Void area
adjustment
DENA
J
K
M
N
O
P
Off-center
adjustment
Magnification
ratio
correction
Sub
scanning
direction
print area
correction
value
SIDE
DENB
FRONT/
REAR
OFFSET_
OC
Content
Document lead
edge reference
position (OC)
Regis- Standard
tration Tray
motor
Desk
ON
Manual
timing paper feed
adjust- ADU
ment
Lead edge image
loss area setting
Side image loss
area adjustment
Lead edge void
area adjustment
Rear edge void area
adjustment
FRONT/REAR void
area adjustment
OC document offcenter adjustment
Setting
range
0 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
1 - 99
50
0 - 99
30
0 - 99
20
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
20
1 - 99
50
SCAN_
SPEED_OC
SCAN sub scanning

magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99
50
DENB-MFT
Manual feed
correction value
Tray 1 correction
value
Tray 2 correction
value
Tray 3 correction
value
1 - 99
57
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
57
1 - 99
57
DENB-CS1
DENB-CS2
DENB-CS3
Item/Display
Q
R
S
4)
Sub
scanning
direction
print area
correction
value
Content
DENB-CS4
Tray 4 correction
value
ADU correction
value
Heavy paper
correction value
DENB-ADU
DENB-HV
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
57
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
50
15-B Image scanning position adjustment

Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.

Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at each of 100% and
200% in the document table mode.

* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge

image from 4.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
copy scale.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is

shifted from the specified position and a shade of the document
table may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image
in the RSPF mode.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning in

the RSPF mode.
1)
Make a copy in the RSPF mode, and check for any shade on
the lead edge section of the copy image.
Scale image 4.0mm position

Paper lead
edge
Papar lead edge

Image area
100%
5mm
Shadow image of RSPF
200%
10mm
5mm
5)
If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge

section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
Image loss adjustment

When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in
the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value,
change these adjustment items.
2)
Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
$872
0$18$/
Paper lead edge
Copy area
Maginification ratio : 400%
10mm
5mm

3)
Void area: 4.0mm, Image loss: 4.0mm

Item/
Display
LEAD
SIDE
Content
Image loss
adjustment
Lead edge
image loss
adjustment
Side image
loss
adjustment
0 - 99
Default
value
40
Standard
adjustment
value
4.0
+/-1.0mm
0 - 99
20
2.0
+/- 1.0mm
Adjustment
range

When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
position to the RSPF scanning position is increased. When the
set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by
0.1mm.
Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is

obtained.
CAUTION: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute
ADJ 15C Copy image position, image loss, void area
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode).
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
15-C Copy image position, image loss, void area

adjustment (Manual adjustment)
(RSPF mode)
2)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
$ 6,'(

% 6,'(
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'(
( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
) /($'B('*(6,'(
* )5217B5($56,'(

+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(
, 2))6(7B63)
- 2))6(7B63)
. 6&$1B63(('B63)
/ 6&$1B63(('B63)
2.
a. Adjustment procedures
1)
Prepare the adjustment chart.

The adjustment chart can be made by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and
horizontally on the front and the back surfaces.
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge,
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification
marks of the front surface and the back surface.
R
Front surface
FACE
Item/Display
A
SIDE1
SIDE2
Image
loss
amount
setting
SIDE1
Put the position

marks.
Draw arrows.
G
R
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
Image
loss
amount
setting
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
Back surface
BACK
Put the position

marks.
F
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
OFFSET_SPF1
OFFSET_SPF2
SCAN_SPEED_SPF1
SCAN_SPEED_SPF2
Draw arrows.
Content
Front surface
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
Back surface
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
Front surface lead
edge image loss
amount setting
Front surface side
image loss amount
setting
Front surface rear
edge image loss
amount setting
Back surface lead
edge image loss
amount setting
Back surface side
image loss amount
setting
Back surface rear
edge image loss
amount setting
RSPF front surface
document offcenter adjustment
RSPF back
surface document
off-center
adjustment
RSPF document
front surface
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
scan)
RSPF document
back surface
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
scan)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
30
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
30
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan

timing is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
image loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for countermeasures against the case when shades are produced.
2)
Lead edge image loss adjustment

1)
Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE
(SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to
the following values.
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):

Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
(Standard set value)

40 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image

loss is increased.)

40 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)
2)
Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)

with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
increased.)

obtained.
Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment
Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to

confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0 1.0mm on
the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead edge
must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
1)
Paper lead edge

confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the
rear frame side are 2.0 2.0mm on the front surface and the
back surface.
Image loss
2.0 2.0mm
Paper F
side edge
The paper lead edge must be aligned with

the image lead edge.
Copy image
Copy image
Copy image
Paper R
side edge
Image loss
4.0 1.0mm

procedure.

procedure.
3)
Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and

press [OK] key.
2)
Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /

FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):

Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):

Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment

(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image position is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.)
obtained.
(When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image

loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
obtained.
Rear edge image loss adjustment

1)
Image loss
2.0 2.0mm

confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
front surface and the back surface.
Paper rear edge
Copy image
Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm

procedure.
ADJ 16 Finisher adjustments

(alignment, staple position)
* When the finisher is disassembled.
* When the finisher control PWB is replaced.
* When the alignment is improper.
* When the staple position is shifted.
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
$ )3$0$'-867

% )'5/0$'-867

2.
2)
Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.

Inner finisher
Item/Display
A
B
FPAM ADJUST
FDRLM ADJUST
Content
Alignment width adjustment
Paper exit roller descending
position adjustment
Setting
range
40 - 60
40 - 60
Default
value
50
50
3)
Enter an adjustment value and press [OK] key.
4)
Cancel the simulation, make a copy in the mode including the

adjustment target, and check the adjustment result.
Service Manual
MX-M316N
[6]
SIMULATION
1. General and purpose

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage, and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine
for improved serviceability.
1)
Various adjustments
2)
Setting of the specifications and functions
3)
Canceling troubles
4)
Operation check
5)
Counters check, setting, clear
6)
Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data

check, clear.
7)
Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data

transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of

the operation panel of the machine.
2. Starting the simulation

Entering the simulation mode
1)
Machine in Copy mode: Select Program key Asterisk (*) key

Clear key Asterisk (*) key Ready for input of main
code of simulation.
2)
Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON.

Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3)
Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON.
4)
Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5)
The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected

item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simulation operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode and change the main
code and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTING] key.
Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1)
Press [CA] key.
CAUTION: Do not turn OFF the power when the machine is in the
simulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be result. In this case,
turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-M316N SIMULATION 6 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.

Press the SYSTEM
SETTINGS key
Standby for entry of

SIM code.
Enter the main code of
SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM
is displayed.
NO
Press the START key.

YES
Standby for entry of SIM

sub code
YES
<Exclusion type>
You have to exit
simulation mode
before entering into
this mode for self
printing type.
Is there a sub code ?

NO
Enter SIM sub code with

the 10-key.
Select the mode and the

item with the scroll key
and the item key.
Press the START key.
If there is no item.
NO
YES
Operation check ?
NO
Do you want
to perform another
simulation ?
NO
YES
NO
Do you
want to end the
simulation ?
Press the EXECUTE key

and OK key.
The display is made according to

the selected some and the item.
YES
Data clear ?
NO

and OK key.
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
Adjustments
or setting (counter data
change) ?
NO
Operation is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
(Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you
want to change the
content ?
NO
The changed content

is stored.
YES
Enter the new setting and

adjustment values.
The simulation mode

is canceled.

and OK key.
Operation is made according

to the selected mode and item.
Operating conditions
check ?
YES
Is it the same
simulation main
code?
In the power OFF/ON type
simulation, OFF/ON
message is
Press the SYSTEM
displayed by the
SETTINGS key
SYSTEM
SETTINGS key.
YES

and OK key.
YES
Press the clear all key.
3. List of simulation codes

Main
1
4
5
Sub
1
2
5
1
2
3
2
3
10
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
90
1
6
8
12
1
2
9
10
13
14
16
21
22
6
3
1
3
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
23
14
18
19
40
41
42
43
90
2
80
81
Functions
Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit.
Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits.
Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section
and the control circuits.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit.
Used to adjust the finisher.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk, and the control circuit of those.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk, and the control circuit of those.
Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the
control circuits.
Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit.
Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position)
Used to set the operating conditions of aging.
Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
Used to display the warm-up time.
The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation)
Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control
circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the
control circuit.
Used to check the output of the transfer output electric current.
Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the toner motor rotation sensor.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section).
Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version, and
the counter list.
Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section.
Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the
fusing unit
Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge.
Used to display the user data delete history.
Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
Used to display the error code list and the contents.
Used to display the JAM code list and the contents.
Used to check the JAM/trouble data.
JAM data details display.
Used to output the various set data lists.
Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed.
(If the number of troubles of misfeed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport section.
Backup the paper feed time data to the USB memory.
Section
Scanner (reading)
Scanner (reading)
Scanner (reading)
RSPF
RSPF
RSPF
Finisher
Finisher
Finisher
Desk
Desk
Operation panel
Fusing
Scanner (reading)
Paper transport/Paper exit section
Others
Scanner
Others
RSPF
Process (Developing)
Process (Charging)
Process (Transport)
Duplex
MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Firmware
Paper feed, ADU

FAX
RSPF
Process
Process
Paper feed, Paper transport
: 16/Jun.
Main
24
Sub
1
2
3
4
25
26
5
6
9
10
12
15
30
31
35
1
2
4
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
10
18
30
32
35
27
38
50
52
56
65
69
73
74
78
79
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
30
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
40
41
2
7
1
2
3
Functions
Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
Used to clear the copy counter.
Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to clear the document filing counter value.
Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
Used to initialize the administrator (Admin) password.
Used to initialize the service mode password.
Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
Used to check the operations of the developing section.
Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment)
Used to display the operation data of the toner correction quantity. (Not used in the market.)
Used to set Yes/No of installation of the job separator.
Used to set the paper size of the paper feed tray.
(When the paper size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
Section
Process (Developing section)

Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing)
Process
Paper exit
Paper feed
Auditor
Used to set the machine ID.

Counter mode setting (Long scale).
Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
(For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
Used to set the special functions.
Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
Used to set functions.
Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
Used to set ON/OFF of the Life Correction.
Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
Used to set the OSA trial mode.
Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.
Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.)
(FSS function)
Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry
number. (FSS function)
Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
Used to display the FSS connection status.
Used to set the FSS alert send.
Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the
control circuits.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment.
Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Paper feed
Paper feed
Main
43
Sub
1
4
10
20
Functions
Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode.
Used to set the postcard feed cycle
Used to perform the low-temperature, low-humidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature
setting of each paper (SIM43-01).
Used to perform the low-temperature, low-humidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature
setting of each paper (SIM43-04).
Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section.
Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation.
14
Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor.
43
2
4
5
8
9
19
Used to display the identification information of the developing unit.

Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
Used to adjust the density in the image send mode. (Color scanner)
Used to adjust the density in the image send mode. (Monochromatic scanner)
Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
Used to adjust the scan image density.
Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
Used to perform the firmware update.
Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
Used to perform the watermark update.
Copy image position, image loss adjustment
Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode)
Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer current.
Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF
registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image
position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the separation voltage.
Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width.
Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor.
Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position.
RSPF dirt detection setting.
RSPF dirt detection execution.
Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)
22
44
46
30
32
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
60
61
62
48
49
50
63
1
5
1
3
5
1
5
6
10
12
51
53
55
27
28
1
2
9
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
10
Section

Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Process (OPC drum,
development)/Fusing/LSU
Developing system
Scanner section
RSPF
Main
56
Sub
1
2
3
4
5
60
61
62
63
64
65
7
11
12
1
1
3
1
2
3
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
2
4
5
6
1
2
5
Functions
Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
Used to output the JAM/trouble data.
Used to backup the SYS log data to the USB memory.
Used to save the data in the SD card to the HDD temporarily.
Used to copy the SD card data saved temporarily in the HDD with SIM56-11 to the machine.
Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection.
Used to set the laser power
Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and the system
area)
Used to clear the job completion list data.
Used to delete the document filing data.
Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)
Used to initialize (remake) only the database file of the HDD.
Used to display the shading correction result.
Used to perform shading.
Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment.
Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Printer test print. (Self print)
Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
Used to check the operation panel key input.
Section
LSU
HDD
Scanner
Scanner
Operation panel section
Main
66
Sub
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
22
24
29
30
31
32
33
66
34
36
39
42
43
61
62
17
45
67
Functions
Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while checking
with the LCD.
Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code.
Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the result.
Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.)
Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)
Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode.
(If there is no confidential registration, no print is made.)
Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.)
Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.
Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.)
Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.
Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.)
Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time.
Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time.
Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level.
Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)
Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor).
Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting
is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.)
(Japan model only)
Used to clear the FAST save data.
Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change.
Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU.
Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result.
Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result.
When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.
Used to execute the send test and display the time required for sending image data in the test. Used to
execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)
Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or
the command line individually.
Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX.
Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX.
Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while
checking with the LCD.
Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type.
Printer reset
Used to adjust the printer image filter and trapping.
4. Details of simulation
Item/Display
OC SCAN
300DPI
400DPI
1-1
Operation test/check
600DPI
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner

(reading) unit and the control circuit.
1200DPI
Section
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
Printer
Printer
<56opm>
1
Purpose
Section
FAX
Scanner (reading)
Operation mode
300DPI
(372.0mm/s)
400DPI
(279.0mm/s)
600DPI
(186.0mm/s)
1200DPI
(93.0mm/s)
Default value
300DPI
(372.0mm/s)
Operation mode
300DPI
(248.0mm/s)
400DPI
(186.0mm/s)
600DPI
(124.0mm/s)
1200DPI
(62.0mm/s)
Default value
300DPI
(248.0mm/s)
<31opm>
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
2)
Item/Display
OC SCAN
300DPI
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the

scan resolution (operation speed).
400DPI
600DPI
1200DPI
<31opm>
1-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner

(reading) section and the related circuits.
Item/Display
(SINGLE)
300DPI
Operation mode
300DPI
(186.0mm/s)
400DPI
(186.0mm/s)
600DPI
(124.0 mm/s)
300DPI
(186.0mm/s)
400DPI
(186.0mm/s)
600DPI
(124.0 mm/s)
400DPI
Scanner (reading)
Section
Operation/Procedure
600DPI
The operating status of the sensor is displayed.

When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home position.
(DOUBLE)
300DPI
400DPI
600DPI
1-5
Purpose

(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Scanner (reading)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
2)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

Item/Display
OC SCAN
300DPI
Operation mode
300DPI
(248.0mm/s)
400DPI
(186.0mm/s)
600DPI
(124.0mm/s)
1200DPI
(62.0mm/s)
400DPI
600DPI
1200DPI
Default value
300DPI
(2480.mm/s)
2-1
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
are highlighted.
Content
SPF installation detection
SPF document empty sensor
SPF primary paper transport sensor
SPF secondary paper transport sensor
SPF scan front sensor
SPF scan rear sensor
SPF document length sensor 1
SPF document length sensor 2
SPF stamp UN installation detection
SPF document guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
SPF document detection volume output AD value
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit.
CAUTION: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
RSPF
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
key.
2)

The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit operations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (operation speed).
<56opm>
Item/Display
(SINGLE)
300DPI
400DPI
600DPI
(DOUBLE)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic
document feeder section and the control
circuits.
Display
SSET
SOCD
SCOV
SPED
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPLS1
SPLS2
STMPU
SWD_LEN
SWD_AD
300DPI
(186.0mm/s)
2-2
Purpose
Section
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan

resolution (operation speed).
Default value
300DPI
(186.0mm/s)
300DPI
400DPI
600DPI
Operation mode
300DPI
(279.0mm/s)
400DPI
(279.0mm/s)
600DPI
(186.0 mm/s)
300DPI
(279.0mm/s)
400DPI
(279.0mm/s)
600DPI
(124.0 mm/s)
Default value
300DPI
(279.0mm/s)
300DPI
(279.0mm/s)
2-3
3-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads

in the automatic document feeder and the
control circuit.
RSPF
Section
Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel
key.
2)
2)
Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel

key.
The selected load performs the operation.

<56opm>
Inner finisher (MX-FN26)

Display
FCF
FDRLM
FPAM_F
FPAM_R
FPDM
FPGS
FPS
FARLS
FPTM
FSL
FSM
FTLM
Content
RSPF paper feed motor (normal rotation)
RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation)
RSPF transport motor (normal rotation)
RSPF transport motor (reverse rotation)
Pressure release solenoid (RSPF)
Stamp solenoid
<31opm>
Content
RSPF paper feed motor (normal rotation)
RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation)
Paper feed clutch (RSPF)
Pressure release solenoid (RSPF)
Stamp solenoid
3
3-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and
the control circuit.
Finisher
Section
Operation/Procedure

are highlighted.
Display
FAPHPS_F
FAPHPS_R
FDRPS
FDTLLS
FDTPD
FPHPS
FPLD
FPLS
FPMRS
FPPD1
FPRD
FSED
FSHPS
FSLD
FSSW
FSTPD
FTPS
Finisher
Section
1)
1)
Display
SPUM_F
SPUM_R
SPUC
SRRC
SPRS
STMPS
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in

the finisher and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
Display
SPUM_F
SPUM_R
SPFM_F
SPFM_R
SRRC
SPRS
STMPS
Purpose
Content
Paper alignment plate HP sensor F
Paper alignment plate HP sensor R
Paper exit roller position sensor
Paper exit tray lower limit sensor
Delivery tray paper detector
Punch unit home position sensor
Paper height detector
Paper surface sensor auxiliary detector
Punch motor rotation sensor
Paper entry detector
Compiler paper rear edge detector C
Staple empty detector
Staple HP sensor
Staple lead edge detector
Safety switch
Staple tray paper detector
Tray position sensor
Content
Cooling fan
Paper exit roller lift motor
Paper alignment motor F
Paper alignment motor R
Paper exit motor
Paper gate solenoid
Paddle solenoid
Finisher alignment roller lift solenoid
Paper transport motor
Illumination of the staple unit
Staple motor
Tray lift motor
3-10
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.

Finisher
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch

panel.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Item/Display
Content
FPAM ADJUST
Paper alignment width

adjustment
FDRLM ADJUST
Paper exit roller descending

position adjustment
Setting
range
40 - 60
Default
value
50
40 - 60
50
Change when the adjustment

value is changed by 1
0.419mm
0.13mm
4-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads

in the desk, and the control circuit of those.
4-2
Purpose
Desk
Section

are highlighted.
Content
Cassette 3 paper entry sensor
Cassette 3 paper upper limit sensor
Cassette 3 paper empty sensor
Cassette 3 installation sensor
Cassette 3 door open/close sensor
Cassette 4 paper entry sensor
Cassette 4 paper upper limit sensor
Cassette 4 paper empty sensor
Cassette 4 installation sensor
Cassette 4 door open/close sensor
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Operation/Procedure
Desk
Desk
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk, and the
control circuit of those.
Display
C3PFD
C3LUD
C3PED
C3SS
DSW_C3
C4PFD
C4LUD
C4PED
C4SS
DSW_C4
Change when the adjustment value is

increased or decreased
When the adjustment value is increased, the
width of the alignment plate F/R during
alignment operation is decreased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the
width of the alignment plate F/R during
alignment operation is increased.
When the adjustment value is increased, the
descending position of the paper exit roller is
shifted to the compression side.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the
descending position of the paper exit roller is
shifted to the decompression side.
Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
touch panel key.
Desk
Display
CPFM
PTRC1
C3LUM
C3PUC
C4LUM
C4PUC
Content
Desk motor
Desk vertical transport clutch
Cassette 3 lift-up motor
Cassette 3 paper feed clutch
5-3
Purpose

lamp and the control circuit.
5-1
Purpose
Operation panel
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

key.
2)
Operation/Procedure

The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX ->
MIN -> the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked.
TEST
SIMULATION
Scanner (reading)
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,

LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
NO.05-01
6-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in

the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits.
Paper transport/Paper exit section
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

key.
TEST
SIMULATION
Load operation check method
NO.05-01
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,

there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
Section
Transport/
process
5-2
Paper feed
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater

lamp and the control circuit.
Fusing
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

key.
2)

The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
OSM
PTRC2
RRC
PSPS
POGS1
POGS2
C1LUM
C1PUC
C2LUM
C2PUC
MPFS
Content
Main motor
Paper exit reverse motor (normal rotation)
Paper exit reverse motor (reverse
rotation)
Shifter motor
Vertical transport clutch 2CS
PS clutch
Process separation pawl solenoid
Paper exit gate solenoid
Right paper exit keep solenoid
Manual feed take-up solenoid
*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are

displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the
same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a
change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the
operation is stopped.

HL_UM
HL_US
Item/Display
MM
POM_F*1
POM_R*1
Main heater lamp (Paper surface heat roller)

Sub heater lamp (Paper surface heat roller)
6-2
7-6
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan

motor and its control circuit.
Others
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)

key.
1)
2)
2)
Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10key.
Press [OK] key.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).

Load operation check method
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
Display
PSFM
FUFM
OZFM
LSUFM
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging

cycle.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained hereafter unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
7-8
Content
Purpose
Power cooling fan motor

Fusing fan motor
Ozone fan motor
LSU fan motor
Operation display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.

Section
Operation/Procedure
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
warm-up is displayed
6-90
Purpose
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory

setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
enable position)
Section
Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1)
7-12
Purpose
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets

setting (for aging operation)

The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
Section
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
Set document reading quantity with 10-key.

(Setting range: 0 - 255)
2)
Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
7-1
Purpose
1)
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of

aging.
Section
Others
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.
2)

The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
AGING
INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE
FUSING DISABLE
WARMUP DISABLE
DV CHECK DISABLE
SHADING DISABLE
CCD GAIN FREE
Aging operation setup

Intermittent operation setting
JAM detection ignoring setting
Fusing unit ignoring setting
Warming up ignoring setting
Developing unit ignoring setting
Shading correction operation omitting setting
CCD gain adjustment omitting setting
: 15/Aug.
8
8-2
8-1
Operation test/check/adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of

the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of

the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a mode with [TS_OFF] and [TS_ON] keys on the touch

panel.
1)
2)
Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
2)
Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified

on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
3)
4)
4)
Select a mode with [TS_OFF] and [TS_ON] keys on the touch

panel.
* When the
key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
* When the
Process (Charging)
Section
Section
Purpose
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Item/Display (Mode)
TS_
OFF
TS_
ON
COPY
DVB
PRINTER
FAX DVB
COPY
DVB
PRINTER
DVB
Content
Developing
bias set value
in a copy job
(Toner save
mode OFF)
Developing
bias set value
in a PRINT/
FAX job (Toner
save mode
OFF)
Developing
bias set value
in a copy job
(Toner save
mode ON)
Developing
bias set value
in a print job
(Toner save
mode ON)
0 - 650
Default value
26
31
35
cpm cpm cpm
400
400
430
0 - 650
400
400
430
0 - 650
320
320
320
0 - 650
250
250
250
Adjust
ment
range
Item/Display (Mode)
TS_
OFF
TS_
ON
COPY GB
PRINTER
FAX GB
COPY GB
PRINTER
GB
Content
Charging/grid
bias set value
in a copy job
(Toner save
mode OFF)
Charging/grid
bias set value
in a PRINT/
FAX job (Toner
save mode
OFF)
Charging/grid
bias set value
in a copy job
(Toner save
mode ON)
Charging/grid
bias set value
in a print job
(Toner save
mode ON)
0 - 750
Default value
26
31
35
cpm cpm cpm
575
575
605
0 - 750
575
575
605
0 - 750
495
495
495
0 - 750
495
425
425
Adjust
ment
range
: 15/Aug.
8-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output of the transfer

charger output current.
Process (Transfer)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)

The set value is saved and the electric current corresponding
to the set value is output for 30 sec.
Item/Display
Setting
range
Content
Default value
31cpm
35cpm
18
20
16
16
22
24
20
22
26
28
24
26
14
16
18
20
22
24
10
10
14
14
14
14
14
16
18
20
22
24
14
16
18
20
22
24
14
16
18
20
22
24
14
16
18
20
22
24
22
24
50
50
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 35
0 - 100
26cpm
18
16
22
20
26
24
14
18
22
10
14
14
14
18
22
14
18
22
14
18
22
14
18
22
22
50
TC ADSORPTION N1
0 - 100
50
50
50
TC ADSORPTION N2
0 - 100
50
50
50
AC
TC INTERVAL BIAS W
0 - 100
50
50
50
AD
TC INTERVAL BIAS N1
0 - 100
50
50
50
AE
TC INTERVAL BIAS N2
0 - 100
50
50
50
AF
TC FRONTEDGE
0 - 100
60
60
60
AG
TC BACKEND SPX
0 - 100
90
90
90
AH
TC BACKEND DPX
0 - 100
80
80
80
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
TC PLAIN SPX W
TC PLAIN DPX W
TC PLAIN SPX N1
TC PLAIN DPX N1
TC PLAIN SPX N2
TC PLAIN DPX N2
TC HEAVY1 W
TC HEAVY1 N1
TC HEAVY1 N2
TC OHP W
TC OHP N1
TC OHP N2
TC ENVELOPE W
TC ENVELOPE N1
TC ENVELOPE N2
TC THIN W
TC THIN N1
TC THIN N2
TC LABEL W
TC LABEL N1
TC LABEL N2
TC TAB W
TC TAB N1
TC TAB N2
TC POSTCARD N2
TC ADSORPTION W
AA
AB
Primary transfer bias reference

value
Plain
paper
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Thin paper
Label paper
Primary transfer bias reference

value
Tab paper
Post card
10-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner

supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
related circuit.
9-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in

the paper reverse section (duplex section)
and its control circuit.
Duplex
Section
2)
1)
Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
The selected load operation is performed for 15 sec.

key.

CAUTION: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridges.

If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges

installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in overtoner.

Display
ADUM
Section
Operation/Procedure
2)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Purpose
Content
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner

cartridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by
making a few black background copy in the copy mode.
ADU motor
Display
TM_COUNT
10
Content
Toner motor rotation sensor
10-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner

supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
related circuit.
Section
13
13-Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
1)
Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
Section
2)
Operation/Procedure
The selected load operation is performed for 15 sec.
1)
2)
Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
CAUTION: This simulation must be executed without installing the

toner cartridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in overtoner.
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner
cartridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by
making a few black background copy in the copy mode.
Display
TNM
Content
Toner motor
14
14-Purpose
Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5

troubles.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
16
16-Purpose
Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.

Section
MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
: 15/Aug.
22-2
21
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Purpose
21-1
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed

and troubles. (When the number of total
jam is considerably great, it is judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance

counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing cleaning roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not
clarify.
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
1)
Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch

panel.
2)
3)

Item/Display
1
A
Content
MAINTENANCE
COUNTER
(TOTAL)
Maintenance
counter (Total)
Setting
range
0:
Default
1 - 300:
1K - 300K
999: Free
MACHINE JAM
RSPF JAM
TROUBLE
Machine JAM counter

RSPF JAM counter
Trouble counter
22-3
Default
value
26CPM: 75K
31/35CPM:
100K
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the

misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this
data is possible.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
22
22-1
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Check
Purpose
22-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each

section and each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.

(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
Item
Total
output
quantity
Total use
quantity
Display
TOTAL OUT
Copy
COPY
Print
PRINT
Document
filing
DOC FIL
Other
OTHER
TOTAL
Section
Content
Total output
All prints including
quantity of black
jams
and white
Total use quantity Effective paper
of black and white (including self print,
excluding jams)
Black and white
Billing target
copy counter
(excluding self print)
Black and white
Billing target
print counter
Black and white
Billing target
document filing
print counter
Black and white
Self print quantity
other counter
22-5
22-8
Others
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each

unit (section).
Firmware
Section
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations

(counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF,
and the scan (reading) unit.
Operation/Procedure
Section
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.

When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
Operation/Procedure
S/N
ICU (MAIN)
ICU (BOOT)
ICU (SUB)
LANGUAGE
GRAPHIC
PCU
SCU
FAX1 (MAIN)
FINISHER
NIC
POWER-CON
E-MANUAL
WATER MARK
ESCP
PDL
Serial No. (The codes for November and December are

"X" and "Y" respectively.)
ICU (Main section)
ICU (Boot section)
ICU (Sub section) (ARM9)
Language support data version
Graphic data for LCD
PCU
SCU
FAX 1-Line (Main section)
Finisher
NIC
Power controller
Operation manual (HDD storage)
(except 20cpm machine)
Watermark (HDD storage)
ESCP font ROM
PDL font ROM
22-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data

(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the
firmware version, and the counter list.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scanner
related counters are displayed.
SPF
SCAN
STAPLER
STAMP
COVER
HP_ON
OC LAMP TIME
22-9
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
quantity) of each paper feed section.
A
DATA PATTERN
Print list
mode
1
2
2)
Paper feed, ADU
Section
Operation/Procedure
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.

TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
ADU
Select the print list mode with 10-key.

Item/Display
Purpose
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print

the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
1)
Document feed quantity

(The number of sheets of discharged documents)
Number of times of scan
Staple counter
Stamp counter
Document cover open/close counter
Number of scanner HP detection
Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
(* hour * minutes)
Print content
Firmware version,
counter data, etc.
Data related to the process control
Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step

1).
Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1)

Manual paper feed counter (Total)
Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section)
: 15/Aug.
22-10
22-11
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration

(option, internal hardware).
Section
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/

receive) of FAX.
(Only when FAX is installed)
FAX
Operation/Procedure
Section
The system configuration is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
(The model names of the installed devices and options are displayed.)
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
are displayed.
MACHINE
RSPF
STAMP
DESK
FINISHER
FAX1
NETWORK
SCANNER
PRINTER
PS
SECURITY
AIM
SDRAM (ICU)
HDD
SD
NIC
BARCODE
INTERNET-FAX
ACM(*)
EAM(*)
AP
RIGHT TRAY
MX-M266N
MX-M316N
MX-M356N
MX-M356U
MX-M265N
MX-M315N
MX-M265U
MX-M315U
MX-M3158N
MX-M2658N
MX-M3158U
MX-M2658U
MX-RP19
MX-RP20
STANDARD
AR-SU1
MX-CS12
MX-CS13
MX-FN26
MX-TR18/
STANDARD
MX-FX11
MX-NSX1 /
STANDARD
MX-PB16
STANDARD
MX-PK11
MX-FR48U
MX-AMX1
*****MB
*****MB
*****MB
STANDARD
MX-PF10
MX-FWX1
MX-AMX2
MX-AMX3
MX-TE10
FAX OUTPUT
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
Main unit
FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)

FAX send counter
FAX receive counter
FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
FAX send time
FAX receive time
22-12
Purpose
Reversing single pass feeder
Finish stamp
1-Paper Tray 2nd Drawer
1-Paper Tray 4th Drawer
1-Paper Tray 3rd Drawer
Inner finisher
Job separator
Function (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions

and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
Facsimile expansion kit

Network Scanner Expansion Kit
Printer expansion kit (PCL)
PS expansion kit
Data security kit (commercial version)
Application integration module
SDRAM capacity
Hard disk capacity
SD Card capacity
NIC
Bar code font
Internet Fax expansion kit
Application communication module
External account module
Air Purifier
Paper exit tray unit
(*) Displayed only in the OSA models.
22-13
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the

process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Process
Section
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process

section are displayed.
Item/Display
MAINTENANCE ALL
FUSING ROLLER
PRESSURE ROLLER
SEPARATE PAWL(U)
CLEANING FELT
TC UNIT
OZONE FILTER
DEVE CTRG(K)
DRUM CTRG(K)
MAIN CHARGER(K)
DRUM BLADE(K)
TONER CTRG(K)
Content
Maintenance counter (Total)
Fusing roller
Pressure roller
Upper separate pawl
Cleaning felt
Transfer unit
Ozone filter
Developer cartridge K
Drum cartridge K
Main charger K
Drum blade K
Toner cartridge K
Counter
RPM
Number of
use days
Life meter
(Unit: +/-1%)
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Not displayed
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Not displayed
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
Max. 8
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 999
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
0 - 100(%)
Number of
remaining
days
0 - 365
0 - 365
0 - 365
0 - 365
0 - 365
0 - 365
0 - 365
0 - 365
0 - 365
0 - 365
0 - 365
Not displayed
22-14
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner

cartridge.
Process
Section
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
Display item
TONER (K)*1
LARGE*2
SMALL*2
Content
Toner number counter (K)
Toner number counter
(K LARGE)
Toner number counter
(K SMALL)
Accumulated No. of
installed cartridges (Unit)
INSTALL
0 - 510
0 - 255
Accumulated No. of near

near end (Unit)
NN END
0 - 510
0 - 255
Accumulated No. of
end (Unit)
END
0 - 510
0 - 255
*1: The sum total of LARGE/SMALL is displayed. For the remaining amount, it is common to LARGE/SMALL.
*2: The remaining amount is not displayed.
22-18
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history.

Section
Operation/Procedure
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed.
Item name
START
END
Display item
Date
Year/month/day/hour/min.
Year/month/day/hour/min.
Content
Delete history (Date and time
of operation start)
Delete history (Date and time
of operation end)
Remaining quantity
(Unit: %)
RESIDUAL
0-25%
25-50%
50-75%
75-100%
22-19
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters

related to the scan - image send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
22-40
Error contents display
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the
contents.
Section
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner

Change the display with scroll key.
Item/Display
Network
NET SCN
scanner
ORG_B/W
NET SCN
ORG_CL
Internet
INTERNET FAX
FAX
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX
SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX
SEND
E-Mail
MAIL
COUNTER
FTP
FTP COUNTER
Other
SMB SEND
USB CNT
TRIAL
MODE_B&C
SCAN TO
HDD_B/W
SCAN TO
HDD_CL
Operation/Procedure
1)
Content
Network scanner document read quantity
counter (B/W scan job)
Network scanner document read quantity
counter (Color scan job)
Number of internet FAX output
Select the main error code.
The sub error code and the contents are displayed.
22-41
JAM contents display
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the JAM code list and the
contents.
Number of internet FAX sending page
Section
Number of internet FAX receive
Operation/Procedure
1)
Number of internet FAX send
Select the main error code.
The sub error code and the contents are displayed.

Number of times of E-MAIL send
Number of FTP send
Number of SMB send
Number of times of USB storage
Trial mode counter
(B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity
(COLOR)
22-42
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the JAM/trouble data.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.

2)Printable with [START] keys.
Counter
Display data
PAPER JAM
SPF JAM
TROUBLE
Display
Content
PAPER JAM
COUNT
Number of
machine JAM
troubles
Number of
SPF JAM
troubles
Number of
troubles
SPF JAM
COUNT
TROUBLE
COUNT
Content
JAM CODE/
TROUBLE
CODE
Generated
JAM code
(Machine)
Generated
JAM code
(SPF)
Generated
trouble code
DATE/TIME
Generated
date/time
(YY/MM/DD
HH:MM:SS)
TOTAL
COUNT(BW)
Total output
quantity of
black and
white
Max.
number
of
histories
Remarks
50
The head is the latest, and the bottom is the

oldest. The max. number of histories is 50.
50
When 50 is exceeded, the oldest one is not

displayed sequentially.
30
The head is the latest, and the bottom is the

oldest. The max. number of histories is 30.
When 30 is exceeded, the oldest one is not
displayed sequentially.
22-43
22-90
Purpose
Function (Purpose) JAM data details display
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
1)
When [COUNTER] key is pressed, the JAM counter, the paper

feed counter, and the paper feed retry counter are displayed.
When [HISTORY1] key is pressed, the JAM history is displayed. When [HISTORY2] key is pressed, the temperature
and humidity data are displayed.
2)
Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
All setting list (*)

Printer test page
2)Printable with [START] keys.

Display data and contents (COUNTER)
Item
PAPER JAM COUNT
PAPER FEED COUNTER
PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER
Content
Number of machine JAM troubles
Paper feed counter (Similar with
SIM22-09 display content)
Paper feed retry counter (Similar
with SIM27-18 display content)
Address registration list (*)
Display data and contents (HISTORY1)

Item
NO
JAM CODE
DATE/TIME
TOTAL_BW
P_S (*1)
P_T (*1)
JOB (*1)
JN
OF
EP
PC
SP
Content
No
JAM Code
Date/Time
Total Count (BW)
Paper Size
Paper Type
Job Mode
Job No
Offset
Exit Position
Punch
Staple
Description
History number
Jam code main
Occurrence date
Total counter (B/W)
Paper size
Paper type
Job mode
First after JOB start or not
Paper exit: Offset
Paper exit: Exit position
Paper exit: Punch
Paper exit: Staple
Document filing list (*)

System setting list
Receive rejection number table

Receive rejection/allow
address
domain table
To E-mail
Transfer table list
To administrator Transfer list
Web setting list
Meta data set list
ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST

PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
PS FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST (Japan)
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
NIC PAGE
INDIVIDUAL LIST
GROUP LIST
PROGRAM LIST (Output Disable)
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE
SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
INBOUND ROUTING LIST

DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
WEB SETTING LIST
METADATA SET LIST
* When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK

model, this setting is invalid.
23
24
23-2
24-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of

paper jam and miss feed. (If the number of
troubles of miss feed is considerably great,
the judgment is made that repair is
required.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2)
3)
The trouble history of paper jams and miss feed is printed.
Press [YES] key.

The target counter is cleared.
Error content
Item
DATA
PATTERN
Button display
NO.1
NO.2
Content
JAM/Trouble history print
Paper feed counter, JAM history
details, and temperature/humidity
history print
MACHINE
SPF
TROUBLE
Machine JAM counter

RSPF JAM counter
Trouble counter
24-2
23-80
Data clear
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed

and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper transport section. Used
to output the list of the operation status of
the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport section.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Paper feed, Paper transport
Section
Press [YES] key.

Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted.
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors
in the paper feed and transport section.
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sensor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
JAM CODE
DATE / TIME
MODE
SIZE
TYPE
PIC TRAY
OUT TRAY
INF1 (ILLEGAL)
INF2(SENSOR)
JAM code
JAM occurrence date/time
Printing mode when JAM occurs
Paper size
Paper type
Paper feed tray
Paper exit tray
Illegal detection information
Sensor information
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
ADU
24-3
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the
scan (reading) unit counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
23-81
1)
2)

Press [YES] key.
Data backup
SPF
Function (Purpose) Backup the paper feed time data to the

USB memory.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Insert the USB memory into the main unit, and press [OK] key and
[EXECUTE] key.
Data clear
Purpose
3)
Purpose
Tray 1 paper feed counter

Manual paper feed counter (Total)
Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
ADU paper feed counter
SCAN
STAPLER
STAMP
COVER
HP_ON
OC LAMP TIME
RSPF document feed counter

(No. of discharged sheets)
Scan counter
Staple counter
Stamp counter
Document cover open/close counter
Number of scanner HP detection
Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
: 16/Jun.
24-4
24-5
Data clear
Purpose
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the

printer counters of the transport unit and
the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After

replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
Press [YES] key.
Fusing
FUSING
ROLLER
PRESS
ROLLER
Separation
SEPARATE
PAWL(U)
CLEAN FELT
Transfer
Drum
Main
charger
TC UNIT
DRUM CTRG K
MAIN
CHARGER K
Drum blade
DRUM BLADE
K
Other
OZONE FILTER
Press [YES] key.


Item/Display
Maintenance MAINTENANCE
ALL
Section
Content
Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter)
(Number of use days)
Fusing roller (Counter)
Fusing roller (Number of use days)
Fusing roller
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Pressure roller (Counter)
Pressure roller (Number of use days)
Pressure roller
Upper separation pawl (Counter)
Upper separation pawl (Number of use
days)
Upper separation pawl
(Accumulated traveling distance)
Clean felt (Counter)
Clean felt (Number of use days)
Clean felt
Transfer unit (Counter)
Transfer unit (Number of use days)
Transfer unit
Drum cartridge (K) (Counter)
Drum cartridge (K) (Number of use
days)
Drum cartridge (K) (Accumulated
traveling distance)
Main charger (K) (Counter)
Main charger (K) (Number of use days)
Main charger (K) (Accumulated
traveling distance)
Drum blade K (Counter)
Drum blade K (Number of use days)
Drum blade K (Accumulated traveling
distance)
Ozone filter (Counter)
Ozone filter (Number of use days)
NOTE: The "Developer cartridge life meter" counter displayed in

SIM22-13 is not displayed in this simulation, but it is
cleared in conjunction with this simulation.
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
24-6
Purpose
2
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

COPY BW
Copy counter (B/W)
24-9
Purpose
2
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter

and the self print mode print counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

PRINT BW
OTHER BW
Print counter (B/W)

Other counter (B/W)
24-10
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.

(Only when FAX is installed)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

FAX OUTPUT
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
FAX Print quantity counter

FAX send counter
FAX receive counter
FAX send quantity counter
FAX send time
FAX receive time
: 16/Jun.
2 24-12
24-30
Data clear
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the document filing counter

value.
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator (Admin)

password.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

Press [YES] key.
The administrator password is initialized.

DOC FIL (BW)
Black-white document filing print counter
24-31
Purpose
24-15
Data clear
Purpose
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the

scan mode and the image send.
Operation/Procedure
Section
2)
1)
Operation/Procedure

Press [YES] key.
Used to initialize the service mode password.
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
24-35
Purpose
Division
Network
scanner
Item/Display
NET SCN ORG_B/W
NET SCN ORG_CL
Internet
Fax
E-mail
FTP
Other
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode password.
INTERNET FAX
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX
SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX
SEND
MAIL COUNTER
FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND
USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B&C
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD_CL
Content
Network scanner document read
quantity counter (B/W scan job)
Network scanner document read
quantity counter (COLOR scan job)
Number of Internet FAX output
Number of Internet FAX sending
page
Number of Internet FAX receive
Number of Internet FAX send
Number of times of E-MAIL send
Number of FTP send
Number of SMB send
Number of times of USB storage
Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR
scan job)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity
(COLOR)
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status

data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
25
25-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the developing section.

Section
Process (Developing section)
Operation/Procedure
1)

The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is displayed.
Sensor name (Display)

TCS_K
Sensor name
Toner sensor output value (K)
: 15/Aug.
25-2
Item/Display
Setting
Purpose
AUTO DEVE AREA
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner

density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment)
Area in the auto development

adjustment
Current area
Display
range
-128 - 127
-128 - 127
Image process (Photoconductor/Developing)
Section
CURRENT AREA
Content
Operation/Procedure
26
Toner cartridges must be installed to execute this setting (Toner

density control reference value setting)
Because of the structure of this machine, if SIM25-2 is executed
without the toner cartridges installed, the waste toner transport pipe
of the process UN may be locked.
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the Job

separator.
1)
Operation/Procedure
26-1
Setting
Paper exit
Section
The developing motor rotates and the toner density sensor makes
sampling of the toner density, displaying the detected level.
1)
2)
After stopping the developing motor, it is set as the reference toner

density control level.
This setting is required to use the Job separator.
CAUTION: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the

reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference toner density level is not set normally.
CAUTION: Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may occur, causing a trouble.
Item/Display
AT DEVE ADJ
Content
Automatic development
adjustment value
Display
range
1 - 255
Default
value
128
Content
Toner sensor output value
Error content
Sensor output level less than 78
Sensor output level over 178
G/LBS SET
Destination
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the

toner correction quantity. (Not used in the
market.)
Process
Section
Operation/Procedure
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed.
TONER DEN_LT
TONER DEN_ST
AUTO DEVE
ALL
LIFE
ENV
DUPLEX
PRINT RATE
AREA
Purpose
Content
Current toner density sensor output
value (final value)
Current toner density reference
value display (the value including all
the correction values)
Automatic development adjustment
value
All correction reference value
Life correction value
Environment correction value
Duplex correction value
Print ratio correction value
Area correction value
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the paper feed
tray. (When the paper size is changed, this
simulation must be executed to change the
paper size in software.)
Paper feed
Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
25-4
Purpose
Content
Job separator provided
Job separator not provided
26-2
Item
LEGAL SET
Error name
EL abnormality
EU abnormality
Item/Display
Item/Display
YES
NO
Operation/Procedure
Error content
Display
EE-EL
EE-EU
0
1
Section
Display during execution of the simulation

Item/Display
TCS
Display
range
1 - 255
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
1 - 255
1 - 255
1 - 255
-128 - 127
-128 - 127
-128 - 127
-128 - 127
-128 - 127
Setting value
0
1
2
0
1
Content
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13.4
8.5 x 13.5
GRAM
LBS
Setting value
LEGAL SET
G/LBS SET
8.5 x 14
LBS
8.5 x 14
LBS
8.5 x 14
LBS
8.5 x 14
GRAM
8.5 x 14
GRAM
8.5 x 14
GRAM
8.5 x 14
GRAM
8.5 x 14
GRAM
8.5 x 14
GRAM
8.5 x 14
GRAM
26-3
Item/Display
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor.

(Setting must be made according to the
auditor use conditions.)
COUNTUP
TIMING
Content
FUSER_IN
Auditor
Section
Operation/Procedure
FUSER_OUT
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.

Item/Display
BUILT-IN
AUDITOR
OUTSIDE
AUDITOR
P10
NONE
P VENDOR1
P VENDOR3
P OTHER
DOC ADJ
VENDOR-EX
(*1)
VENDOR-EX
(MULTI) (*1)
S_VENDOR
ON
OFF
PF ADJ
ON
OFF
VENDOR
MODE (*2)
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
Content
Built-in auditor mode
(standard mode) operation.
No external connection
vendor is used.
Coin vendor mode
(Only the copy mode can
be controlled.)
Vendor mode in which
signals for the intercard
connected to the PCU are
used for communication in
parallel I/F.
Mode for an external
auditor connected to the
SCU.
Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
VENDOR-EX + Multi job
cueing Enable mode
Serial vendor mode
Support for the auditor in
document filing print
No support for the auditor in
document filing print
Continuous printing is
performed in the duplex
print mode.
If the remaining money
expires during continuous
printing, the sheets in the
machine are discharged
without being printed on the
back surfaces.
Continuous printing is not
performed in the duplex
print mode. (The remaining
amount is checked for
printing every surface in all
the printing process.)
If the remaining money
expires during printing, the
sheet is discharged without
printing on the back
surface.
Vendor mode 1
Vendor mode 2
Vendor mode 3
Default
value
P10
EXIT_OUT
NONE
PRINTER
CONTROL
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
OFF
OFF
Mode in which the detection

timing of the paper lead
edge by the sensor after the
paper passes the fusing
section is used as the
money charging timing.
timing of the paper rear
edge by the sensor after the
paper passes the fusing
section is used as the
timing of the paper rear
edge by the paper exit
sensor of the right paper
exit tray or of the after
process unit is used as the
All the items in OUTSIDE
AUDITOR and VENDOR
MODE are allowed to
select.
(OUTSIDE AUDITOR is
always set to P
VENDOR1. Other buttons
are grayed out.
VENDOR MODE is
always set to MODE3.
Other buttons are grayed
out.)
OUTSIDE AUDITOR is
always set to P OTHER.
out.
VENDOR MODE is
always set to MODE3.
out.
Default
value
EXIT_
OUT
MODE
1
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.

(*2) Details of the vendor mode
Details of the vendor mode
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
MODE
3
Completion
of the
specified
quantity.
(Money
remaining)
Condition 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
Insufficient money during

copy job
BW
(no money
remaining)
BW
(money
remaining)
Condition 2
Operation 2
Operation 1
Operation 3
Condition 3
Operation 2
Operation 2
Operation 2
Completion
of the
specified
quantity.
(No money
remaining)
Condition 4
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 3
Operation 1:
Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
which can be changed in the system setting.
Operation 2:
Auto clear is not made.
Operation 3:
The display is shifted to the initial screen.
26-5
10-key
Setting
Purpose
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total

counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
11x17 size)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2)
Enter the setting value with 10-key

1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
3)
Press [OK] key.
1
1
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
0
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
-
3
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
-
Number of times of key input

4
5
6
7
8
a
b
c
2
d
e
f
3
g
h
i
4
j
k
l
5
m
n
o
6
S
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
8
Z
w
x
y
z
-
9
7
9
-
10
-
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item/Display
TOTAL (B/W)
B
C
MAINTE (B/W)
DEV (B/W)
Content
Total counter (B/W)
Maintenance counter (B/W)

Developer counter (B/W)
Default value
1
(Japan)
2
(Except Japan)
2
26-8
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Select a setting item with the scroll key.

1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up.
26-6
3)
Press [OK] key.
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed

magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
Section
1)
2)
The selected set content is saved.
United States of America

Canada
Inch series, other destinations
Japan
AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
Europe
United Kingdom
Australia
AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
China
26-7
Purpose
Item/Display
A
Operation/Procedure
U.S.A.
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
D
E
TOTAL(B/W)
LONG SIZE(S)
MAINTE
(B/W) LONG
SIZE(S)
DEV(B/W) LONG
SIZE(S)
TOTAL(B/W)
LONG SIZE(L)
MAINTE
(B/W) LONG
SIZE(L)
DEV(B/W) LONG
SIZE(L)
Content
Long scale (Small) Total
counter (B/W)
Long scale (Small)
Maintenance counter
(B/W)
Long scale (Small)
Developer counter (B/
W)
Long scale (Large)
Total counter (B/W)
Long scale (Large)
Maintenance counter
(B/W)
Long scale (Large)
Developer counter (B/
W)
Setting
range
1 - 10
Default
value
3
1 - 10
1 - 10
1 - 10
1 - 10
1 - 10
26-10
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID.
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network

scanner.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Enter the machine ID with the 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be
1)
inputted. To select a desired character, press the 10-key

repeatedly. Refer to the following list and enter characters.
2)
Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is inputted.

To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key

Press [OK] key.
TRIAL MODE
(0: YES 1: NO)
and enter the correct character.

2)
Setting
Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1).

NOTE:
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service
mode
function.
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the
simulation mode.
0
1
Trial mode setting

Trial mode cancel (Default)
26-18
26-35
Setting
Purpose
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4

trouble history when a same trouble
occurred repeatedly. There are two display
modes: display as one trouble and display
as several series of troubles.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

Item
Display
Default
value
Content
COPY
PRINTER
0
1
0
1
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner

save mode operation.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.)
Copy toner save mode is inhibited.

Copy toner save mode is allowed
Printer toner save mode is inhibited.
Printer toner save mode is allowed.
0
1
2)
Only once display.

Any time display.
Press [OK] key.

0
0
26-38
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the

maintenance life is reached.
26-30
Setting
Purpose
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
standards). (For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

Press [OK] key.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Item/Display

A
0
1
2)
MAINTENANCE
LIFE OVER
(0: CONTINUE
1: STOP)
Control allowed
Control inhibited
Press [OK] key.
Content
0
Setting of Print Continue/

Stop when the maintenance
life is over (Print Continue)
Setting of Print Continue/
Stop when the maintenance
life is over (Print Stop)
Default
value
0
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due

to the power frequency, etc.
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
1 (CE not supported)

EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
26-49
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards

mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
26-32
Item
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special functions.
POSTCARD
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.

Item/Display
CLEANING
PRINT SET
Content
The screen of the
cleaning mode self print
execution is displayed.
(ON)
The screen of the
cleaning mode self print
execution is not
displayed. (OFF)
Setting range
0
YES
NO
Default
value
1(NO)
Setting
value
LOW
HIGH
Content
Postcard copy speed LOW
Postcard copy speed HIGH
Default
value
LOW
26-50
26-51
Setting
Purpose
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the serial

port operation.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Operation/Procedure

panel.
2)
3)
26-52
Setting
Purpose
Item/Display
A
BW REVERSE
FINISHER
FUNCTION
Content
0
1
0
FEED TRAY
COLOR
0
1
D
E
LONG SIZE PRINT

WIRELESS SET
0
1
0
1
BW reverse copy Disable

BW reverse copy Enable
Finisher special paper
The number of paper exit is
limited.
Finisher special paper
The number of paper exit is
not limited.
Paper feed tray color display
ON during paper feed
Paper feed tray color display
OFF during paper feed
Long size print disable
Long size print enable
Wireless LAN disable
Wireless LAN enable
Default
value
Refer
to *1
0
Refer
to *2
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

0
1
2)
Press [OK] key.
0
0
Item A
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
Destination
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
(*2)
Target
paper
Inner
finisher
Postcard,
envelope
Label
sheet,
tab sheet,
OHP
Count up
No count up
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A

Destination
USA
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
UK
AUS
AB_A
CHINA
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper

(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
or not.
Target paper setting

0
1
The operation is stopped when
If it is set to "1,"
10 sheets of a same kind are
the operation is
discharged continuously. When, stopped when
however, different kinds of
the paper exit
sheets are mixed and
tray is full or
discharged and 10 or less
when 250
sheets of a kind are
sheets
continuously discharged, the
(35.5mm thick)
operation is stopped by the
are discharged.
paper exit tray full detection.
The operation is stopped when
100 sheets of a same kind are
discharged continuously. When,
however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and
discharged and 100 or less
sheets of a kind are
continuously discharged, the
operation is stopped by the
paper exit tray full detection.
Default
0 (Counted)
0 (Counted)
0 (Counted)
1 (Not counted)
0 (Counted)
0 (Counted)
0 (Counted)
1 (Not counted)
0 (Counted)
0 (Counted)
26-56
26-69
Setting
Purpose
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF of the Life Correction.

Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for

toner near end.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Operation/Procedure
2)
1)
2)
3)
3)
Item/Display
A
AUTO1
AUTO2
TEXT
TEXT/
PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/
PHOTO
PRINTED
PHOTO
PHOTOG
RAPH
MAP
Content
Life correction of Auto 1 is
turned ON.
turned OFF.
turned ON.
turned OFF.
Life correction of Text is
turned ON.
Life correction of Text is
turned OFF.
Life correction of Text/Printed
Photo is turned ON.
Life correction of Text/Printed
Photo is turned OFF.
Life correction of Text/
Photograph is turned ON.
Life correction of Text/
Photograph is turned OFF.
Life correction of Printed
Photo is turned ON.
Life correction of Printed
Photo is turned OFF.
Life correction of Photograph
is turned ON.
Life correction of Photograph
is turned OFF.
Life correction of Map is
turned ON.
Life correction of Map is
turned OFF.
Setting
range
0-1
1
Default
value
1 (ON)
Press [OK] key.

The set value in step 2 is saved.
Item/Display
0
0-1
A
1 (ON)
Content
TONER
PREPARATION
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
0-1
1
0 (OFF)
0
0-1
B
0 (OFF)
REMAINING
TONER
LEVEL
5%
10%
15%
20%
25%
30%
35%
40
%
45%
50
%
TONER NEAR END

(0:YES 1:NO)
0
0-1
0 (OFF)
0
0-1
1 (ON)
0
0-1
1 (ON)
0
0-1
0 (OFF)
26-65
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.

Section
Operation/Procedure
B
Use the touch key to set.

Item
LIMIT
COPIES
Set
value
ON
OFF
Content
Number of
sets of
stapling:
Max. 50 sets
Number of
sets of
stapling:
Not Limited
Setting
range
ON or
OFF
Default
value
ON
REMAINING
TONER
LEVEL
NOTE
TONER END
1
2
3
The toner
preparation
message is
displayed.
The toner
preparation
message is not
displayed.
Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 5%
Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 10%
Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 15%
Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 20%
Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 25%
Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 30%
Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 35%
Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 40%
Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 45%
Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 50%
The toner near
end message is
displayed.
The toner near
end message is
not displayed.
Operation setup
1
Operation setup
2
Operation setup
3
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
0
0-9
0-9
0-1
1-3
Item/Display
E
Content
TONER END
COUNT
TONER E-MAIL
ALERT
Setting of the
number of copy/print/
FAX outputs Enable
after TONER NEAR
END.
0 Low status send
of E-mail alert
(When the toner
preparation
message is
displayed) (in
near near toner
end)
1 Low status send
of E-mail alert
(near toner end)
Setting
range
1-5
Default
value
4
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide

copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
0-1
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
Item E (TONER END COUNT) setting value and printable quantity

Setting value
1
2
3
4
5
26-73
Printable quantity at A4/6% equivalent conversion

0
20
40
80
160
Item/Display
Content
DELETING
SHADOW ADJ
(M)
DELETING
SHADOW ADJ (S)
Rear frame side

image loss quantity
(shade delete
quantity) adjustment
Lead edge image
loss quantity (shade
delete quantity)
adjustment
Setting
range
0 - 50
0 - 50
Default value
0
(Adjustment
amount:
0.1mm/step)
0
(Adjustment
amount:
0.1mm/step)
Contents of set items

A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display.
26-74
B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation

message is displayed.
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display

when the toner near end status is reached.
Operation/Procedure
D: Machine operation at toner end
1)
E: Number of allowable copy/print/FAX when the toner near end

message is displayed. (Range: 0 - 160 sheets)
2)
Press [OK] key.
The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the

assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 6%.
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
size and the print ratio.)
CAUTION: When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set,
printing can be made after toner near end. However,
improper phenomena such as insufficient density, thin
spots, or improper color balance may result depending
on the using conditions. When item E is set to "1" printing is disabled after toner near end. In this case, toner
end display is made in the toner near end status, and
copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.
Setting
Section
Item/Display
A
OSA TRIAL MODE

(0: YES 1: NO)
Content
0
1
Used to set the

OSA trial mode.
OSA trial mode is
canceled.
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
1
26-78
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote

operation panel.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)

The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2)
Press [SET] key.
26-79
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display

of user data delete result.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

The value for the display operation specification after completion of user data delete is set.
2)
Press [OK] key.
Item/Display
A
DISP SET
Content
User data delete result
pop-up display ON
User data delete result
pop-up display OFF
Setting range
YES
NO
Default
value
0 (NO)
27
27-1
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

0
1
2)
Not detection
Detection
Press [OK] key.

27-2
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set with touch panel.

[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
2)
3)
Press [SET] key.

USER FAX_NO.
SERVA TEL_NO.
Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)

Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
* If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time
when the power is turned ON (from OFF) or
rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
HOST.
27-4
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

Item/Display
A
FSS MODE
Content
NEB1
NEB2
NFB1
Set the FSS MODE
NFB2
B
C
D
E
F
G
RETRY_BUSY
TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY
RETRY_ERROR
TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR
FAX RETRY
TONER ORDER
EMPTY
TIMING(K)
NEAR_END
5%
10%
15%
20%
25%
30%
35%
40%
45%
50%
TEMP HISTORY CYCLE
LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU)
TONER ORDER TIMING
CONTROL
H
I
J
Exclusive for send in NE-B mode

Send/Receive in NE-B mode
Exclusive for send in NE-F mode
Send/Receive in NE-F mode
60
30
0
0 - 50
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.

In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
Press [SET] key.
0: No retry
Unit: Number of times
Unit: min.
Unit: [KB]
0
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.

(FSS function)
0
1
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW.
2)
2
3
1
1
2
6
For convenience
stores
For convenience
stores
0: No retry
Setting
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
1)
0 - 15
1 - 15
0 - 15
1 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 - 1440
0 - 50
0-1
Remarks
27-6
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the
machine tag No.) (FSS function)
Section
Default
value
1
Resend number setting when busy

Resend timer setting (minute) when busy
Resend number setting when error
Resend timer setting (minute) when error
Resend number setting when FAX initial connection
Toner order auto send Empty
timing setting (K)
Near end
5%
10%
15%
20%
25%
30%
35%
40%
45%
50%
Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history
Log output capacity
Toner order timing
Toner order alert send at the fixed
control
toner remaining quantity.
Toner under alert send when
presuming the toner
consumption.
27-5
Purpose
Setting
range
0-3
0
1
2
2)
Allow (Default)
Inhibit
Press [OK] key.

27-7
27-10
Setting
Purpose
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout.

(FSS function)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history

information. (FSS function)
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Item/Display
FUNCTION
(0:YES 1:NO)
ALERT
(0:YES 1:NO)
CONNECTION
(0: FAX
1: No Use
2: HTTP)
Press [YES] key.

The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
Content
FSS function enable
FSS function disable
Alert call enable (*1)
Alert call disable
FAX connection enable
Not used.
HTTP connection enable
Target history
Setting
range
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
Default
value
1 (NO)
Serial communication retry history

Scanner gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors
0 (YES)
27-11
0 (FAX)
*1 Alert send timing
Section
No alert cause
Maintenance
Service call
Toner send request
Toner collection request
Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert

When the maintenance timing is reached.
When pressing Service call.
When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached.
Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product)
Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Item name
LSU1
Alert resend
LSU2
27-9
Setting
Purpose
DESK1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading
gain adjustment retry number.
(FSS function)
Section
DESK2
FINISHER1
FINISHER2
Operation/Procedure
1)
SCAN GAIN ADJ1
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
SCAN GAIN ADJ2

SCAN GAIN ADJ3

Item/Display
A
FEED TIME2
GAIN
ADJUSTMENT
RETRY
JAM ALERT
JAM ALERT
PERIOD
Others
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication

retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history. (FSS function)
Content
Threshold value of paper
transport time between
sensors (SPF)
Threshold value of the gain
adjustment retry number
Continuous JAM alert
judgment threshold value
(Alert judgment threshold
value for continuous JAM's)
(Setting of the number of
JAM's continuously made
at which it is judged as an
alert.)
Continuous JAM alert
period setting
Setting
range
0 - 100
Default
value
50(%)
0 - 20
11
(TIMES)
1 - 100
10
(TIMES)
1 - 99
30
(DAYS)
SCAN GAIN ADJ4

SCAN GAIN ADJ5
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;

100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
retry is actually not registered.
Display Item
Occurrence date
(Display)
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Retry
number
8 digits
8 digits
Content
Serial
communication
retry number
history display
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
Scanner gain
adjustment retry
history
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
Scanner gain
adjustment retry
history
27-13
Others
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport

time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display
RSPF
Content
FEED TIME1 (SPF)

FEED TIME2 (SPF)
FEED TIME3 (SPF)
FEED TIME4 (SPF)
FEED TIME5 (SPF)
FEED TIME6 (SPF)
FEED TIME7 (SPF)
FEED TIME8 (SPF)
FEED TIME9 (SPF)
FEED TIME10 (SPF)
Occurrence date
History of paper transport time between SPF

sensors 1
sensors 2
sensors 3
sensors 4
sensors 5
sensors 6
sensors 7
sensors 8
sensors 9
sensors 10
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.
27-14
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection

test mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

0
1
2)
Disable (Default)
Enable
Press [OK] key.

27-15
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status.

Section
Operation/Procedure
The FSS operating status is displayed.
Item/Display
FSS CONNECTION
Content
Used to display the
FSS connection
status.
Setting range
0
1
Not
operated
Operated
Default
value
0
5 digits (ms)
Reference
passing time
5 digits (ms)
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
Code between
sensors
5 digits
Passing time
Item/
Display
A3:
FIRST
27-16
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
A4:
FIRST
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.

B4:
FIRST
Item/Display
A
Content
MAINTENAN
CE ALERT
(0:YES 1:NO)
Maintenance
alert send
Enable setting
TONER
ORDER
ALERT
(0:YES 1:NO)
Toner order
alert send
Enable setting
TONER
CTRG ALERT
(0:YES 1:NO)
Toner
cartridge
replacement
alert send
Enable setting
Continuous
JAM alert
send Enable
setting
JAM ALERT
(0:YES 1:NO)
TROUBLE
ALERT
(0:YES 1:NO)
Trouble alert
send Enable
setting
PAPER
ORDER
ALERT
(0:YES 1:NO)
Paper order
alert send
Enable setting
Alert send
Enable
Alert send
Disable
Alert send
Enable
Alert send
Disable
Alert send
Enable
Alert send
Disable
Alert send
Enable
Alert send
Disable
Alert send
Enable
Alert send
Disable
Alert send
Enable
Alert send
Disable
Setting
range
0
Default
value
0
B5:
FIRST
1
0
Content
Paper order alert
number setting (A3)
(Number of used
sheets)
Paper order alert
number setting (A4)
(Number of used
sheets)
Paper order alert
number setting (B4)
(Number of used
sheets)
Paper order alert
number setting (B5)
(Number of used
sheets)
Setting
range
500 10000
Default
value
1000
NOTE
Unit: No. of alert
sheets for the
first time
500 10000
1000
Unit: No. of alert

sheets for the
first time
500 10000
1000
Unit: No. of alert

sheets for the
first time
500 10000
1000
Unit: No. of alert

sheets for the
first time
27-18
0
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry

counter.
1
0
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be cleared.
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

1
0
Item/Display
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT
Content
Tray 1 paper feed retry counter
Manual paper feed retry counter
27-17
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
30
Section
Operation/Procedure
30-1
1)
Select an item to be set.
2)

The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification
is set.
3)
Press [SET] key.
Item/
Display
PAPER
TYPE
SET
A3
A4
B4
B5
Content
Setting of paper kind
for paper order alert
Paper order number

setting [Number of
sheets] (A3)
Paper order number
setting [Number of
sheets] (A4)
Paper order number
setting [Number of
sheets] (B4)
Paper order number
setting [Number of
sheets] (B5)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the
paper feed section and the control circuits.
Section
Setting
range
0-2
Default
value
0
NOTE
0: Standard
paper and
recycled paper
1: Standard
paper only
2: Recycled
paper only
Unit: No. of
sheets for a box
500 5000
1250
500 5000
2500
Unit: No. of
sheets for a box
500 5000
2500
Unit: No. of
sheets for a box
500 5000
2500
Unit: No. of
sheets for a box
Operation/Procedure
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are highlighted.
PPD1
POSD
POD1
POD2
POD3
TFD1
TFD2
TFD3
SHPOS
DSW_R
DSW_POC
Registration front detector

Paper exit branch detector
Paper exit detector 1
Paper exit tray full detector 1
Shifter home positions sensor
Front/side cover open/close detector
Paper exit cover open/close detector
30-2
40-7
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed
section and the control circuits.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the

manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
C1PFD
C1LUD
C1PED
C1SS
C2PFD
C2LUD
C2PED
C2SS
DSW_C2
MPED
MPLD1
MPLD2
MTOP1
MTOP2
Paper feed
Section
Press [OK] key.

Item/Display
Cassette 1 paper entry detector

Cassette 1 paper upper limit detector
Cassette 1 paper empty detector
Cassette 1 detector
Cassette 2 paper entry detector
Cassette 2 paper upper limit detector
Cassette 2 paper empty detector
Cassette 2 installation detector
Cassette 2 door open/close detector
Manual feed paper empty detector
Manual feed paper length detector 1
Manual feed paper length detector 2
Manual feed tray detector 1
Manual feed tray detector 2
A
B
MAX POSITION
P1 (A4R) POSITION
P2 (A5R) POSITION
MIN POSITION
Content
Manual feed max. width
Manual feed P1 position width
(A4R)
Manual feed P2 position width
(A5R)
Manual feed min. width
Default
value
235
143
78
27
41
41-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
40
Section
Operation/Procedure
40-2
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor

adjustment.
Paper feed
Section
Operation/Procedure
OCSW
Document cover status
PD1 - 7
Document detection
sensor status
Open: Normal display

Close: Highlighted
No document: Normal display
Document present: Highlighted
1)
Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
2)
3)
Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4R).
4)
41-2
The P1 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
Purpose
5)
Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A5R).
6)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor

detection level.
The P2 width (A5R) detection level is recognized.
Section
7)
Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
Operation/Procedure
8)
1)
Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without

place a document on the document table.
2)
Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press

[EXECUTE] key.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.

When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
MAX POSITION
P1(A4R)POSITION
P2(A5R)POSITION
MIN POSITION
Manual feed max. width

Manual feed P1 position width (A4R)
Manual feed P2 position width (A5R)
Manual feed min. width
Adjustment
The sensor level without document is recognized.
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.

When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
Sensor
name
PD1 - 7
Content
Document detection sensor 1 - 7
Setting
range
0 - 255
Defaul
t value
128
: 15/Aug.
41-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
Item/Display
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
Content
Original cover SW
Document detection 1
Detection level range

0-1 ("1" to Close)
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
43
43-1
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each

mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

70 - 220
26cpm
Group A
Group B
SW- SW- SW- SWA
B
A
B
185
185
190
190
Default value
31cpm
Group A
Group B
SW- SW- SW- SWA
B
A
B
185
185
190
190
35cpm
Group A
Group B
SW- SW- SW- SWA
B
A
B
195
195
195
195
70 - 220
180
180
200
200
180
180
200
200
195
195
195
195
70 - 220
190
195
195
200
190
195
195
200
195
200
195
200
70 - 220
190
195
195
200
190
195
195
200
195
200
195
200
0 - 200
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
0 - 60
0 - 20
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
1
Item/Display
HL_UM READY
HL_US READY
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER BW
WARMUP FUMON
HL_UM T
WARMUP FUMOFF
HL_UM T
WARMUP END
TIME
HL_UM THIN
PAPER
HL_US THIN
PAPER
HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER
HL_US HEAVY
PAPER
HL_UM LABEL
PAPER
HL_US LABEL
PAPER
HL_UM OHP
PAPER
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Content
Ready standby TH_UM set

value
Ready standby TH_US set
value
Black-White plain paper
TH_UM set value
Black-White plain paper
TH_US set value
Fusing motor pre-rotation start
TH_US set value
Fusing motor previous rotation
complete time
Warm-up complete time
Setting
range
Thin paper TH_UM set value
70 - 220
190
195
190
195
185
185
Thin paper TH_US set value
70 - 220
190
195
190
195
185
185
Heavy paper TH_UM set value
70 - 220
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Heavy paper TH_US set value
70 - 220
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Label paper TH_UM set value
70 - 220
200
200
200
200
200
200
Label paper TH_US set value
70 - 220
200
200
200
200
200
200
OHP-TH_UM set value
70 - 220
190
195
190
195
195
195
: 15/Aug.
1
1
Item/Display
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
HL_US OHP
PAPER
HL_UM ENV
PAPER
HL_US ENV
PAPER
HL_UM E-STAR
HL_US E-STAR
HL_UM PRE-JOB
HL_UM
WARMUP_120L
HL_US
WARMUP_120L
LO_WARMUP_TIM
E
HL_UM
WARMUP_120H
HL_US
WARMUP_120H
HI_WARMUP_TIM
E
HI_WU_FM_ON_T
MP
AB
HI_WU_END_TIME
AC
HI_WU_JOB_SET_
TMP 1
AD
HI_WARMUP_BOR
DER
LO_WU_JOB_SET
_TMP 1
AE
AF
AG
AH
JOBEND_FUMON_
TIME
HI_WU_JOB_SET_
TMP 2
LO_WU_JOB_SET
_TMP 2
Setting
range
Content
26cpm
Group A
Group B
SW- SW- SW- SWA
B
A
B
190
195
Default value
31cpm
Group A
Group B
SW- SW- SW- SWA
B
A
B
190
195
35cpm
Group A
Group B
SW- SW- SW- SWA
B
A
B
195
195
OHP-TH_US set value
70 - 220
Envelope TH_UM set value
70 - 220
205
205
205
205
210
210
Envelope TH_US set value
70 - 220
205
205
205
205
210
210
Preheating TH_UM set value

Preheating TH_US set value
TH_UM set value when
recovery from Warm-Up
TH_UM set value when WarmUp at 120 degree C or below
TH_US set value when WarmUp at 120 degree C or below
U, V applying time (Timer from
completion of Ready)
TH_LM set value when WarmUp at 120 degree C or above
TH_US set value when WarmUp at 120 degree C or above
X, Y applying time (Timer from
completion of Ready)
FM prior rotation start TH_US
when Warm-Up at alpha
degree C or above
Warm-Up completion time
when Warm-Up at alpha
degree C or above
Job enable TH_UM
temperature 1 when Warm-Up
at alpha degree C or above
Threshold value alpha to which
U - W is applied
Job enable TH_UM
at alpha degree C or below
After rotating time when a job is
completed
Job enable TH_UM
at alpha degree C or above
Job enable TH_UM
at alpha degree C or below
70 - 220
70 - 220
70 - 220
95
95
180
95
95
180
95
95
190
95
95
190
95
95
180
95
95
180
95
95
190
95
95
190
95
95
180
95
95
180
95
95
190
95
95
190
70 - 220
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
205
205
205
205
70 - 220
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
205
205
205
205
0 - 255
70 - 220
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
70 - 220
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
0 - 255
0 - 220
0 - 60
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
30 - 220
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
205
205
205
205
1 - 119
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
70 - 220
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
205
205
205
205
0 - 60
70 - 220
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
70 - 220
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
180
180
190
190
Code descriptions
TH_UM
TH_US
Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper)

Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper)
HL_UM
HL_US
Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
List of destination groups
Group
Group A
Group B
Destination
U. S. A
EUROPE
CANADA
U. K
INCH
AUS.
AB_A
AB_B
: 15/Aug.
43-4
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in

each mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

1
Ite
m
A
B
C
D
E
F
Display
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
PLAIN PAPER BW
DUP APP CNT
HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
HL_US HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
HEAVY PAPER BW
DUP APP CNT
Setting
range
Content
Black and white plain paper

duplex TH_UM set value
duplex TH_US set value
duplex applying number of
sheets
Black and white heavy paper
duplex TH_UM set value
duplex TH_US set value
duplex applying number of
sheets
70 - 220
26cpm
Group A
Group B
SW- SW- SW- SWA
B
A
B
190
195
Default value
31cpm
Group A
Group B
SW- SW- SW- SWA
B
A
B
190
195
35cpm
Group A
Group B
SW- SW- SW- SWA
B
A
B
195
195
70 - 220
190
195
190
195
195
195
0 - 255
70 - 220
190
195
190
195
195
195
70 - 220
190
195
190
195
195
195
0 - 255
Code descriptions
TH_UM
TH_US

HL_UM
HL_US

List of destination groups
Group
Group A
Group B
Destination
U. S. A
EUROPE
CANADA
U. K
INCH
AUS.
AB_A
AB_B
43-10
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the postcard feed cycle

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Item
Display
POSTCARD CYCLE
Content
Postcard feed cycle
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
43-20
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the low-temperature, lowhumidity (L/L) environment correction for
the fusing temperature setting of each
paper (SIM43-01).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Item
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
HL_UM READY LL
HL_US READY LL
HL_UM PLAIN BW LL
HL_US PLAIN BW LL
WARMUP FUMON HL_US T
LL
WARMUP FUMOFF LL
WARMUP END TIME LL
HL_UM THIN LL
HL_US THIN LL
HL_UM HEAVY LL
HL_US HEAVY LL
HL_UM LABEL LL
HL_US LABEL LL
HL_UM OHP LL
HL_US OHP LL
HL_UM ENV LL
HL_US ENV LL
HL_UM E-STAR LL
HL_US E-STAR LL
HL_UM PRE-JOB LL
HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL
HL_US WARMUP_120L LL
LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL
HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL
HL_US WARMUP_120H LL
HI_WU_TIME_LL
HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL
AB
HI_WU_END_TIME_LL
AC
HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL
AD
AE
HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL
LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL
AF
AG
JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL
HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2
LL
LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2
LL
AH
Content
Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under LL environment
Correction value for TH_US set value in ready standby under LL environment
Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under LL environment
Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under LL environment
Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under LL environment
Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL environment
Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment
Correction value for thin paper TH_UM set value under LL environment
Correction value for thin paper TH_US set value under LL environment
Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment
Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL environment
Correction value for label paper TH_UM set value under LL environment
Correction value for label paper TH_US set value under LL environment
Correction value for OHP-TH_UM set value under LL environment
Correction value for OHP-TH_US set value under LL environment
Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL environment
Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under LL environment
Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment
Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment
Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under LL environment
Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree Cor below under LL environment
Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree C or below under LL environment
Correction value for O, P applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment
Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree C or above under LL environment
Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree C or above under LL environment
Correction value for R, S applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment
Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above under LL
environment
Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above under LL
environment
Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (1) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above
under LL environment
Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying SIM43-1-U - W under LL environment
Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (1) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or below
Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL environment
Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (2) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above
Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (2) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or below
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
55
55
55
55
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
50
55
55
50
55
55
50
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
1 - 99
50
* WARMUP END TIME LL: 1 count = 1s change

Other correction values: 1 count = 1 degree C change
* Items C/D: Correction of "-5" is made for item C and Item D in the case of B5 size
Code descriptions
TH_UM
TH_US

HL_UM
HL_US

* Correction value: (-49 - +49), Input value: Actual input value (1 - 99)
Correction value
Input value
-49
1
-25
25
-5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
43-22
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the low-temperature, lowhumidity (L/L) environment correction for
the fusing temperature setting of each
paper (SIM43-04).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Item
Display
Content
HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL
HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL
PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL
HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL
HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL
HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL
Correction value for the upper TH_UM black and white plain paper duplex under the LL
environment
Correction value for the upper TH_US black and white plain paper duplex under the LL
environment
Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white plain paper duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for the upper TH_UM set value of black and white heavy paper duplex under the
LL environment
Correction value for the upper TH_US set value of black and white heavy paper duplex under the
LL environment
Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white heavy paper duplex under LL
environment
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
55
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
50
* PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL: 1 count = 1s change

Other correction values: 1 count = 1 degree C change
Code descriptions
TH_UM
TH_US

HL_UM
HL_US

* Setting value: Target value (-49 - +49), Input value: (Actual input value) 1 - 99
Setting value
Input value
-49
1
-25
25
-5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
44
44-1
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section.
Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

(The selected item is highlighted.)
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
CAUTION: Set the items to the default values unless a change is

specially required.
Item/Display
MD_VG
MD_DV_LIFE
MD_ENV
MD_DUPLEX
MD_LD
MD_LD_ENV
TN_LIFE
TN_ENV
TN_DUPLEX
TN_COV
TN_AREA
TN_DRIP
TC
Content
Membrane decrease (GB) Enable/Disable setting
DV life correction (GB, DVB) Enable/Disable setting
Environment correction (GB, DVB) Enable/Disable setting
Duplex print correction (GB, DVB) Enable/Disable setting
Membrane decrease life correction (laser power) Enable/Disable setting
Environment correction (laser power) Enable/Disable setting
Enable/Disable setting of the toner density life correction
Enable/Disable setting of the toner density environment correction
Toner density duplex print correction Enable/Disable setting
Enable/Disable setting of the toner density print ratio correction
Enable/Disable setting of the toner density area correction
Enable/Disable setting of the toner density correction unconditional supply
Enable/Disable setting of the transfer output correction
44-9
Purpose
Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high

density process control operation.
Section
Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
Setting range
Black text on
white
background
(Inhibit: 0=NO)
White text on
black
background
(Allow: 1=YES)
Default value
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
NOTE
: 15/Aug.
Mode
CPY/
PRN*1
1/2
(PROCESS)
REF (TS_OFF)
Left
Right
Left
Right
GB ***
DVB ***
GB ***
DVB ***
Left
Right
Left
Right
GB ***
DVB ***
GB ***
DVB ***
Left
Right
Left
Right
GB ***
DVB ***
GB ***
DVB ***
MD_VG
Left
GB ***
MD_DV_LIFE
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
GB ***
DVB ***
GB ***
DVB ***
GB ***
DVB ***
LD (CP)
LD (PRT)
LD (CP)
LD (PRT)
Left
Right
Left
Right
LD (CP)
LD (PRT)
LD (CP)
LD (PRT)
Left
Right
Left
Right
TN_TMP_AREA
LD (CP)
LD (PRT)
LD (CP)
LD (PRT)
***
TN_TMP_DATA
***
TN_HUD_DATA
TC_TMP_AREA
***
***
TC_TMP_DATA
TC_HUD_DATA
MD_VG_AREA
***
***
***
MD_DV_LIFE_AREA
MD_ENV_AREA
MD_DUPLEX_COUNTER
MD_LD_AREA
MD_LD_ENV_AREA
DESTINATION
Left
***
***
***
***
***
xx
MODEL TYPE
CRUM DEST_K
xx
xx
ALL (TS_OFF)
REF (TS_ON_C)
ALL(TS_ON_C)
REF (TS_ON_P)
ALL (TS_ON_P)
MD_ENV
MD_DUPLEX
CPY/
PRN*1
2/2 (LD)
REF (TS_OFF)
ALL (TS_OFF)
REF (TS_ON_C)
ALL (TS_ON_C)
MD_LD
MD_LD_ENV
OTHER
1/2
(TN/TC/MD)
2/2
(CRUM/CNT)
Item/Display
(*: Correction
value)
Page number
Right
Content
GB/DVB default value when TS is OFF

GB/DVB value after addition or
subtraction of the correction amount
when TS is OFF
Copy GB/DVB default value when TS is
ON
when Copy TS is ON.
Printer GB/DVB default value when TS is
ON
when Printer TS is ON
Drum membrane decrease correction
amount GB value
Process developer life correction amount
GB/DVB value
Environment correction amount GB/DVB
value
Duplex print correction amount GB/DVB
value
Laser power default value when TS is
OFF (CP/PRT)
Laser power value after addition or
when TS is OFF (CP/PRT)
Laser power default value when TS is ON
(CP/PRT)
Laser power value after addition or
when Copy TS is ON (CP/PRT)
Drum membrane decrease laser power
correction amount (CP/PRT)
Environment laser power correction
amount (CP/PRT)
Toner control display temperature/
humidity area
Toner control display temperature AD
value
Toner control display humidity AD value
Transfer display temperature/humidity
area
Transfer display temperature AD value
Transfer display humidity AD value
Membrane decrease drum traveling
distance area
Developer life area for process
Environment correction area
Duplex counter
Laser power area
Laser power environment area
Machine side management CRUM
destination
Model type of the machine
Crum destination
*1: The left of the correction amount indicates the execution result, and the right indicates the reference value.
Display
range
Default value
26/31cpm
35cpm
0 - 750
0 - 650
0 - 750
0 - 650
575
400
575
400
605
430
605
430
0 - 750
0 - 650
0 - 750
0 - 650
460
320
540
400
460
320
540
400
0 - 750
0 - 650
0 - 750
0 - 650
390
250
390
250
390
250
390
250
0 - 255
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
For default values refer
to "Default values for
each item".
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
1-8
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
4
0 - 1023
0 - 1023
1-8
0
4
0
4
0 - 1023
0 - 1023
1 - 15
0
0
1
0
0
1
0 - 15
1-8
0 - 300
0 - 15
0-8
1
1
0
1
4
1
1
0
1
4
0-1
Default values for each item

Mode
CPY/
PRN
Item/Display
REF (TS_OFF)
ALL (TS_OFF)
REF (TS_ON_C)
ALL (TS_ON_C)
LD (CP)
LD (PRT)
LD (CP)
LD (PRT)
LD (CP)
LD (PRT)
LD (CP)
LD (PRT)
35cpm machine
170
170
170
170
170
170
170
170
Default value
31cpm machine
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
26cpm machine
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
: 15/Aug.
46
44-14
Operation data display
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor.
Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
LSU
Section
Operation/Procedure
TH_US
TH_RA
HUD_RA
Purpose
Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy

mode.
Section
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine

temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
Item/
Display
TH_UM
46-2
Content
Display range
Fusing upper thermistor main

detection temperature
Fusing upper thermistor main
detection temperature A/D value
Fusing upper thermistor sub
detection temperature
Fusing upper thermistor sub
detection temperature A/D value
Temperature thermistor
Temperature thermistor A/D value
Temperature:
0 - 255 degree C (+/- 1
degree C)
AD value: 0-1023
Temperature:
0 - 255 degree C (+/- 1
degree C)
AD value: 0-1023
Temperature:
- 40.0-60.0 degree C (+/
- 0.1 degree C)
AD value: 0-123
Humidity:
5.0-90.0% (+/- 0.1%)
AD value: 0-1023
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Humidity sensor
Humidity sensor A/D value

panel.
* When the
3)
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy density is decreased.
Item/Display
A
AUTO1
Auto 1
AUTO2
Auto 2
TEXT
Text
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
Text/Printed
Photo
Developing system
TEXT/PHOTO
Text/Photograph
The identification number and the identification signal level of the

developing unit are displayed.
PRINTED PHOTO
Printed Photo
PHOTOGRAPH
Photograph
MAP
Map
AUTO1
Auto 1 (copy
to copy)
AUTO2
Auto 2
(copy to copy)
TEXT
Text
(copy to copy)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
Text printed
photo
(copy to copy)
Printed photo
(copy to copy)
44-43
Data display
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification information of the developing unit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display
A
DVCH
KIND K
DV_TYP_
SEL_K
DVCH_
AD_K
Content
K developing unit
identification
number
K developing unit
identification
detection
K developing unit
identification AD
value
Display
range
1-9
0-1
0 - 255
NOTE
The model
identification number of
the developing unit
which is backed up in
the EEPROM of the
machine.
0 = High (Open)
1 = Low (GND)
AD value of the
developing unit
identification voltage
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
Content
: 15/Aug.
46-4
46-8
Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image

send mode.
Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color

balance RGB.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)

panel.
1)
Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
panel.
2)
2)
* When the

panel.
3)
4)
3)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is

increased, and vice versa.
Mode
Item/Display
LOW
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
HIGH
D
E
F
G
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
Auto
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Auto
Text
Text/Printed Photo
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
Content
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
area and the high density area.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
target color is increased, and vice versa.
Item/Display
A
B
46-5
Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image

send mode.
LOW DENSITY POINT

HIGH DENSITY POINT
Low density correction amount

High density correction amount
Adjustment (RSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

panel.
* When the
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
mode, and the fax mode.
Section
Item/Display
Content
Operation/Procedure
A
COPY : LOW
SCAN : LOW
* When the
FAX : LOW
COPY : HIGH
SCAN : HIGH
FAX : HIGH
1)

panel.
2)
3)

Mode
LOW
HIGH
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
AUTO TEXT
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
AUTO TEXT
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
Auto/Text
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Auto/Text
Text
Text/Printed Photo
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
Content
Default
value
50
50
46-9
Purpose
3)
Purpose
Content

adjustment (high density)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
46-19
46-32
Setting
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the

density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode documents.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background

density reproducibility in the monochrome
auto copy mode.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
1)
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is

saved.
2)
3)
Item/Display
Content
Set value
AE_MODE
AE_STOP_COPY
Auto exposure mode

Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for copy)
AE_STOP_FAX
Auto B/W exposure

Stop (for FAX)
Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for scanner)
MODE1, MODE2
REALTIME/
STOP/
PRESCAN
ON/OFF
AE_STOP_SCAN
AE_FILTER
Auto exposure filter

setting
AE_WIDTH
AE exposure width
REALTIME/
STOP/
PRESCAN
SOFT
NORMAL
SHARP
FULL/PART
Default
value
MODE2
STOP

panel.

adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased.
ON
STOP
NORMAL
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
Content
COPY : OC
COPY : RSPF
SCAN : OC
SCAN : RSPF
FAX : OC
FAX : RSPF
Copy mode (for OC)

Copy mode (for RSPF)
Scanner mode (for OC)
Scanner mode (for RSPF)
FAX mode (for OC)
FAX mode (for RSPF)
Setting
range
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
Default
value
196
196
196
196
196
196
FULL
46-37
46-30
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub

scanning direction in the copy mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability

of monochrome mode color.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
1)
Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corresponding to the resolution mode with 10-key.
2)
3)
4)
Press [YES] key.
Item/Display
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow

images when copying color documents with red and yellow images
in the monochrome mode.
2)
SCAN
RESOLUTION
SW
Content
Scan resolution
selection
(COPY: COLOR)
Mode1
Mode2
Setting
range
0-1
0
1
Default
value
0
Applied to the copy mode only.

Item/Display
Mode
Scan
mode
Mode1
OC
RSPF
Mode2
OC
RSPF
Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)

25-99%
100-200%
201-400%
[Magnification [Magnification [Magnification
ratio]
ratio]
ratio]
600
600
1200
600
600
300
400
600
600
1200
A
B
R-Ratio
G-Ratio
B-Ratio
Content
Gray making setting (R)
Gray making setting (G)
Setting
range
0 - 1000
0 - 1000
Default
value
108
678
Gray making setting (B)

(1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from

the formula below.
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
values (Default).
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,
the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the density is increased.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased,
the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density in also decreased.
46-39
46-41
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send

images.
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.

(Normal)
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
Set the document on the document table.
2)
2)
3)
3)
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large

numeric value to decrease moire.
Item/Display
Content
200 x 100 [DPI] OFF
200 x 200 [DPI] OFF
200 x 200 [DPI] ON
200 x 400 [DPI] OFF
200 x 400 [DPI] ON
400 x 400 [DPI] OFF
400 x 400 [DPI] ON
600 x 600 [DPI] OFF
600 x 600 [DPI] ON
200 x 100 [DPI]

halftone OFF
200 x 200 [DPI]
halftone OFF
200 x 200 [DPI]
halftone ON
200 x 400 [DPI]
halftone OFF
200 x 400 [DPI]
halftone ON
400 x 400 [DPI]
halftone OFF
400 x 400 [DPI]
halftone ON
600 x 600 [DPI]
halftone OFF
600 x 600 [DPI]
halftone ON
Setting
range
0-2
Default
value
1
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-2
Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
EXECUTE AUTO
MODE
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
Adjustment/Setup

(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)

Item/Display
Content
EXPOSURE
LEVEL(ALL)
Used to adjust the FAX send

image density. (Collective
adjustment of all the modes)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Auto
Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Print
Auto
mode Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
1
(AUTO)
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the document and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-40
Purpose
Content
Default
value
50
46-42
46-43
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose

(Fine)

(Super Fine)
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)

Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE
MODE
AUTO
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
EXP2
H_TONE
EXP3
H_TONE
EXP4
H_ONE
EXP5
H_TONE
Content
Fine/Automatic
Fine/Exposure 1
Fine/Exposure 2
Fine/Exposure 3
Fine/Exposure 4
Fine/Exposure 5
Fine/Automatic/
Halftone
Fine/Exposure 1/
Halftone
Fine/Exposure 2/
Halftone
Fine/Exposure 3/
Halftone
Fine/Exposure 4/
Halftone
Fine/Exposure 5/
Halftone
Print
Fine/Auto
mode Fine/
Exposure 1
Fine/
Exposure 2
Fine/
Exposure 3
Fine/
Exposure 4
Fine/
Exposure 5
Fine/
Automatic/
halftone
Fine/
Exposure 1/
Halftone
Fine/
Exposure 2/
Halftone
Fine/
Exposure 3/
Halftone
Fine/
Exposure 4/
Halftone
Fine/
Exposure 5/
Halftone
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
112

Item/Display
A
B
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE
MODE
1
2
1
(AUTO)
AUTO
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
8
EXP5
9
AUTO
H_TONE
10
EXP1
H_TONE
11
EXP2
H_TONE
12
EXP3
H_TONE
EXP4
H_TONE
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the document and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
EXP5
H_TONE
Content
Super Fine/Auto
Super Fine/
Exposure 1
Super Fine/
Exposure 2
Super Fine/
Exposure 3
Super Fine/
Exposure 4
Super Fine/
Exposure 5
Super Fine/
Auto/Halftone
Super Fine/
Exposure 1/Halftone
Super Fine/
Exposure 2/Halftone
Super Fine/
Exposure 3/Halftone
Super Fine/
Exposure 4/Halftone
Super Fine/
Exposure 5/Halftone
Print
Super Fine/
mode
Auto
Super Fine/
Exposure 1
Super Fine/
Exposure 2
Super Fine/
Exposure 3
Super Fine/
Exposure 4
Super Fine/
Exposure 5
Super Fine/
Auto/
Halftone
Super Fine/
Exposure 1/
Halftone
Super Fine/
Exposure 2/
Halftone
Super Fine/
Exposure 3/
Halftone
Super Fine/
Exposure 4/
Halftone
Super Fine/
Exposure 5/
Halftone
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
112
1
(AUTO)
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
46-44
46-45
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose

(Ultra fine)

(600dpi).
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)

Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1
H_TONE
EXPOSURE2
H_TONE
EXPOSURE3
H_TONE
EXPOSURE4
H_TONE
EXPOSURE5
H_TONE
EXECUTE AUTO
MODE
EXP1
I
J
K
L
M
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
EXP2
H_TONE
EXP3
H_TONE
EXP4
H_TONE
EXP5
H_TONE
Content
Ultra Fine/Auto
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1
Ultra Fine/Auto/
Halftone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 1/Halftone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 2/Halftone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 3/Halftone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 4/Halftone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 5/Halftone
Print
Ultra Fine/
mode Auto
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 1
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 2
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 3
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 4
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 5
Ultra Fine/
Auto/
Halftone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 1/
Halftone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 2/
Halftone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 3/
Halftone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 4/
Halftone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 5/
Halftone

Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
1 - 99
50
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
1 - 99
50
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
1 - 99
50
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
1 - 99
50
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
1 - 99
50
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
1
(AUTO)
EXECUTE
MODE
112
Item/Display
AUTO
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
EXP2
H_TONE
10
EXP3
H_TONE
11
EXP4
H_TONE
12
EXP5
H_TONE
Content
600dpi/Auto 1
600dpi/Exposure 1
600dpi/Exposure 2
600dpi/Exposure 3
600dpi/Exposure 4
600dpi/Exposure 5
600dpi/Auto/
Halftone 1
600dpi/Exposure 1/
Halftone
600dpi/Exposure 2/
Halftone
600dpi/Exposure 3/
Halftone
600dpi/Exposure 4/
Halftone
600dpi/Exposure 5/
Halftone
Print
600dpi/
mode Auto
600dpi/
Exposure 1
600dpi/
Exposure 2
600dpi/
Exposure 3
600dpi/
Exposure 4
600dpi/
Exposure 5
600dpi/
Auto/
Halftone
600dpi/
Exposure
1/Halftone
600dpi/
Exposure
2/Halftone
600dpi/
Exposure
3/Halftone
600dpi/
Exposure
4/Halftone
600dpi/
Exposure
5/Halftone
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
112
1
(AUTO)
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
46-47
46-60
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy

and scan images (JPEG).
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color

auto copy mode.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
3)
The set value is saved.

Operation
mode
FILLING
(COLOR)
(COLOR
mode)*1
Item/Display
A
FILLING
(C)
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
FILLING
(GRAY)
(Monochrome
halftone
mode)*1
FILLING
(G)
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
PUSH
SCAN
(COLOR)
(Scanner
(Color
mode))
SCAN
(C) *1
MIDDLE
1
MIDDLE
2
MIDDLE
3
PUSH
SCAN
(GRAY)
(Scanner
(Monochrome
halftone
mode))
SCAN
(G) *2
MIDDLE
1
MIDDLE
2
MIDDLE
3
Press [OK] key.

Content
Low
compression
(Color)
Medium
compression
(Color)
High
compression
(Color)
Low
compression
(Gray)
Medium
compression
(Gray)
High
compression
(Gray)
Medium
compression
mode 1
Low
compression
Medium
compression
mode 2
Medium
compression
Medium
compression
mode 3
High
compression
Medium
compression
mode 1
Low
compression
Medium
compression
mode 2
Medium
compression
Medium
compression
mode 3
High
compression
Setting
range
Default
value
0 (LOW)
Item/Display
A
SCREEN
FILTER
LEVEL
H
L
1
AUTO
2
B
0
CPY
PUSH
AUTO
FILTER
LEVEL
SOFT
CENTER
HIGH
B/W
COPY
OFF
ON
COLOR
PUSH :
RGB
OFF
ON
B/W
PUSH
OFF
ON
B/W
PRINT
OFF
ON
0 (LOW)
1
(MIDDLE
2)
1
(MIDDLE
2)
*1: Disable without HDD.

*2: Setting of compression rate for images when the image
compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other
hand, however, the image quality of some documents may
be remarkably reduced.
Content
Sharpness
(filter)
adjustment
of dot
pattern
image in
auto copy
mode
Sharpness
(filter)
adjustment
for the
automatic
push scan
mode
(Text,
Printed
Photo /
Printed
Photo
images)
Soft filter
applying
setting in
monochro
me copy
mode
Soft filter
applying
setting to
image in
push scan
color mode
Soft filter
applying
setting to
image in
push scan
monochro
me mode
Setting of
ON/OFF of
soft filter
application
to
monochro
me print
images
Setting
range
Default
value
Strong
emphasis
Soft
emphasis
Auto
3 (Auto)
SOFT
CENTER
HIGH
1
2
3
OFF
ON
0
1
1 (ON)
OFF
ON
0
1
1 (ON)
OFF
ON
0
1
1 (ON)
OFF
ON
0
1
0 (OFF)
2
3
2
(CENTER)
46-61
Item/Display
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[SCR 1 HIGH]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[SCR 1 MIDDLE]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[SCR 1 LOW]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[SCR 2]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[SCR 3]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[LINE HALFTONE]
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.

Section
Content
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment mode.
2)
Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch

panel.
3)
Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
4)
Press [OK] key.
CAUTION: This must be set to the default unless any change is

specially required.
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from the default value, image quality trouble may
occur for some documents.
Item/Display
COLOR
AUTO
TPP
COPY(TPP)
MONO
AUTO
TPP
COPY(TPP)
[Color/Gray] Auto
[Color/Gray] Manual (Text print)
[Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print)
[Monochrome] Auto
[Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
[Monochrome] Copy document (Text print)
Default
value
25
1 - 49
25
1 - 49
25
1 - 15
1 - 15
1 - 49
25
46-62
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Content
Detection level
adjustment: High
density dots
Detection level
adjustment: Medium
density dots
Detection level
adjustment: Low
density dots
Detection level
adjustment: Dot 2
Detection level
adjustment: Dot 3
Detection level
adjustment: line
screen
Setting
range
1 - 49
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the

ACS, the area separation, the background
image process, and the auto exposure
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
SEGMENT: SWITCH
[TXT ON SCR]
SEGMENT: SWITCH
[LINE SCR]
SEGMENT: SWITCH
[SMALL SCR]
SEGMENT: SWITCH
[HIGH LPI]
SEGMENT: SWITCH
[TXT ON SCR IMAGE
SEND]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[BK TXT 1]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[CL TXT 1]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[TXT ON SCR 1]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[TXT ON SCR 2]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[TXT ON SCR AREA]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[HIGH LPI]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[BK]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[CL]
SEGMENT: ADJUST
[TXT ON BG]
Content
Detection ON/OFF:
Text on dot
Detection ON/OFF:
line screen
Detection ON/OFF:
Dot in a small area
Detection ON/OFF:
High line number
judgment select
Detection ON/OFF:
Text on image send
dots
Detection level
adjustment: Black text
1
Detection level
adjustment: Color text
1
Detection level
adjustment: Black text
2, Color text 2
Detection level
adjustment: Text 1 on
dots
Detection level
adjustment: Text 2 on
dots
Detection level
adjustment: Detection
area of text on dots
Detection level
adjustment: High line
number judgment
Detection level
adjustment: No
chrome judgment
Detection level
adjustment: Chrome
judgment
Detection level
adjustment: Text on
background
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
0
1)

panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
0-1
0-1
CAUTION: This must be set to the default unless any change is

specially required.
0-1
0-1
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from the default value, image quality trouble may
occur for some documents.
Item/Display
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 49
25
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 15
1 - 49
25
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
SW_ACS
TEXT_IMAGE
TEXT_BLANK
HT_LV
AE_AREA_LV
AE_LV_CC
AE_LV_MC
AE_LV_CS
AE_LV_MS
AE_JUDGE_
LV_L_U
Content
ACS judgment reference
area select
Text/Image judgment
priority level adjustment
Text/Blank judgment
priority level adjustment
Dot area judgment
threshold value
adjustment
Color AE judgment target
area adjustment
AE background detection
division result
adjustment:
For color copy
division result
adjustment:
For monochrome copy
division result
adjustment:
For color scan
division result
adjustment:
For monochrome scan
Color AE background
density threshold value
adjustment (lower limit)
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
1
0-6
0-6
0-6
0-6
0-8
0-8
0-8
0-8
0-4
Item/Display
Content
AE_JUDGE_
LV_L_O
AE_JUDGE_
LV_C
AE_
ONOFF_
CC
AE_
ONOFF_
MC
Color AE background
density threshold value
adjustment (upper limit)
Color AE background
detection level
adjustment (chroma)
AE mode ON/
ON
OFF switch:
OFF
For color copy
AE mode ON/
ON
OFF switch:
OFF
For monochrome copy
AE mode ON/
ON
OFF switch :
OFF
For color scan
AE mode ON/
ON
OFF switch :
OFF
For monochrome copy
Blank judgment level
adjustment (value)
Blank judgment level
adjustment (chroma)
Mode 0 developing
paper mode select
Mode 1 developing
paper mode select
Mode 5 developing
paper mode select
Mode 6 developing
paper mode select
AE_
ONOFF_
CS
AE_
ONOFF_
MS
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
BLANK_JUDGE_
LV_L
BLANK_JUDGE_
LV_C
MODE0_UNDER
MODE1_UNDER
MODE5_UNDER
MODE6_UNDER
Setting
range
0 - 10
Default
value
0
0 - 10
K
L
M
0-1
0
1
0 (ON)
0-1
0
1
0 (ON)
0-1
0
1
0 (ON)
0-1
0
1
0 (ON)
Item/Display
N
O
P
0 - 10
0 - 10
Content
COLOR COPY :
PRINTED PHOTO (COPY
TO COPY)
COLOR PUSH :
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR PUSH : TEXT
COLOR PUSH :
PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR PUSH :
PHOTOGRAPH
COLOR PUSH :
TEXT/PHOTO
COLOR PUSH : MAP
Copy document,
Printed photo
(color copy)
Text print
(color PUSH)
Text (color PUSH)
Printed photo
(color PUSH)
Photograph
(color PUSH)
Text/Photograph
(color PUSH)
Map (color PUSH)
Setting
range
1-9
Default
value
5
1-9
1-9
1-9
3
5
1-9
1-9
1-9
48
0
0
0-6
0-6
0-6
0-6
48-1
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

46-63
Purpose
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification

ratio is increased.
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low

density section.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corresponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
Section
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corresponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
Operation/Procedure
1)

panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.


adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased.
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR COPY : TEXT
COLOR COPY :
PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR COPY :
PHOTOGRAPH
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PHOTO
COLOR COPY : MAP
COLOR COPY : LIGHT
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
COLOR COPY : TEXT
(COPY TO COPY)
Content
Text print
(color copy)
Text (color copy)
Printed photo
(color copy)
Photograph
(color copy)
Text/Photograph
(color copy)
Map (color copy)
Light document
(color density)
Copy document,
Character print
(color copy)
Copy document,
Character
(color copy)
Setting
range
1-9
Default
value
3
1-9
1-9
3
5
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
5
6
1-9
1-9
Item/Display
A
CCD (MAIN)
CCD (SUB)
SPF (MAIN)
SPF (SUB)
SPFB (MAIN)
SPFB (SUB)
Content
SCAN main scanning
magnification ratio adjustment
(CCD)
SCAN sub scanning
(CCD)
RSPF document front surface
(Main scan)
RSPF document front surface
(Sub scan)
RSPF document back surface
(Main scan)
RSPF document back surface
(Sub scan)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
: 15/Aug.
48-5
49
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
Purpose
Scanner section
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
Operation/Procedure
1)
49-1
Section

panel.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Save the firmware to the USB memory.
Press [OK] key.
2)
Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
operation panel section.)
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is

adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is specified, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
this adjustment.
3)
Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,

change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
6)
2)
3)
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
MR (HI)
MR(MID)
MR(LO)
SPF(HI)
SPF(MID)
Content
Scanner motor (High speed)
Scanner motor (Reference speed)
Scanner motor (Low speed)
Document feed (SPF) motor
(High speed)
Document feed (SPF) motor
(Reference speed)
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
1 - 99
50
48-6
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each

motor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO]
2)

panel.
[HEAVY] keys on the touch panel.
4)
Select a target firmware.

Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
5)

Press [YES] key.
The selected firmware is updated.
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Item/Display
ICU (MAIN)
ICU (BOOTM)
ICU (BOOTCN)
ICU (SUB)
LANGUAGE
GRAPHIC
SLIST
PCU (BOOT)
PCU (MAIN)
FIN (BOOT)
FIN (MAIN)
SCU (BOOT)
SCU (MAIN)
FAX (BOOT)
FAX (MAIN)
ANIMATION
WEB HELP
3)
4)
Press [OK] key.
49-3
Purpose
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,

and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
Item/
Display
A POM
B ADUM
C MM
Content
Paper exit motor correction value
ADU motor correction value
Main motor correction value
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
Content
ICU Main section
ICU Boot section main
ICU Boot section CN
ICU Sub section (ARM9)
Language support data
program
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU Boot section
PCU Main section
Inner finisher boot section
Inner finisher main section
SCU Boot section
SCU Main section
FAX1 Boot section
FAX1 Main section
Animation data
WEB help
Error display in
case of abnormality
ICUM
ICUBM
ICUCN
ICUS
LANG
GRAPH
SLIST
PCUB
PCUM
FINB
FINM
SCUB
SCUM
FAXB
FAXM
ANIME
WEBHP
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the

HDD.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Insert the USB memory into the main unit.

* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE EMANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.
2)
Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The display is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
3)

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes
active from gray out.
4)
When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is

updated.
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
: 15/Aug.
49-5
Item/Display
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update.

N
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark

update.
3)
4)
5)
Press [YES] key.
Sub
scanning
direction
print area
correction
value
P
Q
R
S
The selected watermark is updated.
DENBMFT
DENBCS1
DENBCS2
DENBCS3
DENBCS4
DENBADU
DENB-HV
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
ADU correction value
1 - 99
55
Heavy paper
correction value
1 - 99
50
Content
Manual feed correction
value
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying

the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
50
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When

the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
B - F. (RRC-B) The timing to turning ON the registration roller after
receiving the registration signal is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
50-1
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjustment
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
2)

Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
default.
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
Lead edge
adjustment value
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Image loss
area
setting
value
Void area
adjustment
J
K
Off-center
adjustment
Magnificati
on ratio
correction
RRCA
RRCBCS1
RRCBCS234
RRCBMFT
RRCBADU
LEAD
Document lead edge

reference position
(OC)
Cassette
Registration
motor ON Cassette
timing
2,3,4*
adjustManual
ment
paper feed
ADU
FRONT/
REAR
OFFSET_
OC
Lead edge image loss

area setting
Side image loss area
adjustment
Lead edge void area
adjustment
Rear edge void area
adjustment
FRONT/REAR void
area adjustment
OC document offcenter adjustment
SCAN_
SPEED_
OC
SCAN sub scanning

magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
SIDE
DENA
DENB
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.

(0.1mm/step)
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.

Content
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
Item/Display
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/

step)
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1)
3)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the

value is increased, the timing is advanced.
Setting
range
0 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
0 - 99
30
0 - 99
20
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
20
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of

paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
50-5
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image

position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the

touch panel.
2)
3)

The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4)
Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.02.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the

paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Item/Display
Content
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
30
DEN-C
Used to adjust the print lead edge image

position.
(PRINTER MODE)
DEN-B
Rear edge void area adjustment
1 - 99
40
FRONT/REAR
FRONT/REAR void area adjustment
1 - 99
20
DENB-MFT
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS1
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS2
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS3
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS4
1 - 99
50
DENB-ADU
1 - 99
55
J
K
L
DENB-HV
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
DUPLEX
YES
NO
Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment

correction value
Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment
correction value
correction value
correction value
correction value
ADU rear edge void aria adjustment
correction value
Heavy paper correction value
Number of print
Tray selection
Manual paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Duplex print selection
Yes
No
1 - 99
1 - 999
1-5
1
2
3
4
5
0-1
0
1
50
1
2 (CS1)
NOTE
Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the
printer. When the adjustment value of this item is
decreased by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the
adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the
print area adjustment value in the sub scanning direction
for the paper transport direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and
right edges of paper. When the adjustment value is
increased, the void amount is increased.
1 (NO)
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
: 15/Aug.
50-6
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and

the image loss. (RSPF mode)
RSPF
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

panel.
2)
3)

Item/Display
SIDE1
SIDE2
Image
loss
amount
setting
SIDE1
Image
loss
amount
setting
SIDE1
Image
loss
amount
setting
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
OFSET_SPF1
OFSET_SPF2
SCAN_SPEED_SPF1
SCAN_SPEED_SPF2
Content
Front surface
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
Back surface
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
Front surface lead
edge image loss
amount setting
Front surface side

image loss amount
setting
Front surface rear
edge image loss
amount setting
Back surface lead
edge image loss
amount setting
Back surface side
image loss amount
setting
Back surface rear
edge image loss
amount setting
SPF front surface
SPF back surface
RSPF document
front surface
magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
RSPF document
back surface
magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
40
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
40
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing

is delayed.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is increased.
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-10
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

panel.
2)
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
A
B
C
D
E
F
Item/Display
MAIN-MFT
MAIN-CS1
MAIN-CS2
MAIN-CS3
MAIN-CS4
MAIN-ADU
Content
Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed)
Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1)
Print off center adjustment value (Duplex)
Setting range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 999
1-5
1
2
3
4
5
0-1
0
1
40
40
40
40
1
2 (CS1)
NOTE
Adjustment Item
List
CAUTION: If the adjustment items A - F are not properly adjusted,

G
H
I
J
K
L
this adjustment cannot be executed properly.

Registration motor ON timing adjustment
Manual paper feed
Standard cassette
DESK
ADU
Number of print
Tray selection
Manual paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Duplex print selection
Yes
No
SUB-MFT
SUB-CS12
SUB-DSK
SUB-ADU
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
DUPLEX
YES
NO
Adjustment pattern
print conditions
setting
1 (NO)
Item A - F: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side. 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-12
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center

position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

panel.
2)
3)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is

shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
A
B
C
Item/Display
OC
SPF (SIDE1)
SPF (SIDE2)
Content
Document table image off-center adjustment
SPF front surface image off-center adjustment
SPF back surface image off-center adjustment
Setting range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default value
50
50
50
: 15/Aug.
50-27
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment

of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]

key.
2)

panel.
3)
4)
FAX send
When
image
send mode
(Except for
FAX and
copy)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Item/Display
Image loss
LEAD_EDGE (OC)
amount setting
FRONT_REAR (OC)
OC
TRAIL_EDGE (OC)
Image loss
amount setting
SPF SIDE1
Image loss
amount setting
SPF SIDE2
Image loss
amount setting
OC
Image loss
amount setting
SPF SIDE1
Image loss
amount setting
SPF SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
LEAD_EDGE (OC)
FRONT_REAR(OC)
TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
Content
OC lead edge image loss amount setting
OC side image loss amount setting
OC rear edge image loss amount setting
Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting
Front surface side image loss amount setting
Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting
Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting
Back surface side image loss amount setting
Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting
OC lead edge image loss amount setting
OC side image loss amount setting
OC rear edge image loss amount setting
Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting
Front surface side image loss amount setting
Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting
Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting
Back surface side image loss amount setting
Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting
Setting range
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
Default value
30 (3mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
30 (3mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
30 (3mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
50-28
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image

loss, void area, image off-center, and image
magnification ratio.
SPF ADJ
(RSPF)
Section
Item/Display
ALL SIDE1
(Front
surface)
SIDE2
(Back
surface)
Section
Scanner
Document off-center
CS1
Sub scanning
magnification ratio
MFT
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with

SIM50-28.
CS1
CS2
* ADJ 12 Print image position, image magnification ratio, void

area, off-center adjustments (Manual adjustments)
* ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
* ADJ 14 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
SETUP/
PRINT
ADJ
Item/Display
ALL LEAD
* ADJ 15 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image
loss (Manual adjustments)
1)
Select an adjustment item with the menu button.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
3)
4)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
5)
Press [OK] key.

Content
Document lead edge
Document off-center
Sub scanning magnification ratio
Content
Document lead edge
CS2
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display
OC ADJ
MFT
CS1
CS2
MFT
Section
Scanner
OFF
SET
MFT
CS1
CS2
ADU
CS3
CS4
MFT
CS1
CS2
ADU
CS3
Content
Print off center
Print lead edge
Section
Engine
1
1
: 15/Aug.
51
2)
3)

When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF
timing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value
is increased, the timing is delayed. When the adjustment value
is changed by 1, the timing is changed by about 2ms. The setting range is -98 - +98ms.
51-1
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer

current.
Section
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)

B
panel.
4)
51-2
Display
TC ON
TIMING
TC OFF
TIMING
Default
value
50
Content
Transfer current ON timing setting
Transfer current OFF timing
setting
50
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and
the RSPF registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position
on the paper or when paper jams frequently
occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
(When RSPF model)

Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
2)
3)
Mode
SIDE1
SIDE2
ENGINE
Display/Item
A
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
NORMAL_THIN_HIGH
NORMAL_THIN_LOW
RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH
RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW
RANDOM_THIN_HIGH
RANDOM_THIN_LOW
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1
TRAY1(S)
TRAY1(L)
TRAY2(S)
TRAY2(L)
MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
LT size (216mm)
or less
LT size (216mm)
or above
LT size (216mm)
or less
LT size (216mm)
or above
LT size (216mm)
or less
1 - 99
25
1 - 99
25
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Content
RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value
(Plain paper/Small size)
Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value
(Plain paper/Large size)
Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value
Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value
Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)
Mode
Display/Item
ENGINE
Content
MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L)
Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)
MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (S)
MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (L)
I
J
K
L
MANUAL OHP
MANUAL ENV
MANUAL LBL
ADU PLAIN PAPER (S)
ADU PLAIN PAPER (L)
DESK (S)
DESK (L)
Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value

(Heavy paper/Small size)
Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value
(Heavy paper/Large size)
Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP)
Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope)
Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Label paper)
ADU/deflection adjustment value
ADU/deflection adjustment value
DESK/deflection adjustment value
DESK/deflection adjustment value
LT size (216mm)
or above
LT size (216mm)
or less
LT size (216mm)
or above
LT size (216mm)
or less
LT size (216mm)
or above
LT size (216mm)
or less
LT size (216mm)
or above
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Note on Large size and Small size

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)
6)
51-9
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
7)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the

separation voltage.
Section
Select an adjustment target item with scroll key.
2)
3)
Item
Display
DHV ON
DHV OFF
Content
Separation voltage ON/OFF
timing adjustment
Separation voltage OFF timing
adjustment
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
8)

The minimum width detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is

displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1)

Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1
2
3
4
TRAYVOLMAX
TRAYVOLA4R
TRAYVOLA5R
TRAYVOLMIN
Tray size volume maximum value

Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
Tray size volume minimum value
53-7
When the adjustment value is increased, the timing is delayed.

When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
by about 4ms. The setting range is -196 - +196ms.
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF document size

width sensor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
53
53-6
Purpose

panel.
2)
3)
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the

RSPF document width.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
2)
3)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.
4)
5)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width.
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
AD_MAX
AD_P1
AD_P2
AD_MIN
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
Max. width position

A4R width position
A5R width position
Min. width position
Setting
range
0 - 1023
0 - 1023
0 - 1023
0 - 1023
Default
value
84
509
808
961
53-8
Item/Display
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document
scan position.
Section
Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
2)
Document lead edge

measurement distance
Document lead edge
reference position
Setting
range
0-255
(0.1mm unit)
0 - 99
Default
value
50
MANUAL: RSPF mode document scan position adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
MEASUREMENT
DISTANCE
RRCA
Content
Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document

table.
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
adjustment value is saved.)
1)
2)

Item/Display
ADJUST
VALUE
Content
RSPF mode document scan
position adjustment (Scanner
stop position adjustment)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
5
* When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop position in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right.
* When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
shifted by 0.1mm.
53-9
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Set dirt detection for SPF scanning position.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)

Item/Display item, Details of display
Content
DIRT_ALARM_SET
SPF front surface optimum scan position detection setting (when

starting)
SIDEA_SCAN_POSIION _SET_START
SPF front surface optimum scan position detection setting (After a

job)
SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_JOB
SPF front surface optimum scan position detection level setting
SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV
OC dirt level setting
OC_DIRT_LV
SPF front surface dirt alarm level setting
SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV
SPF back surface dirt alarm level setting
SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET
SPF front surface streak delete shading setting
53-10
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) SPF dirt detection execution.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Item/Display
SPF SIDEA
OC
Content
SPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan
position 1 to 8) "-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt
OC surface dirt detection position (main scan
position 1 to 8) "-": No dirt, "*": Dirt
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
WEAK
MIDDLE
STRONG
WEAK
MIDDLE
STRONG
WEAK
MIDDLE
STRONG
WEAK
MIDDLE
STRONG
OFF
ON
Setting
range
0-1
0
1
0-1
0
1
0-1
0
1
2
0-2
0
1
2
0-2
0
1
2
0-2
0
1
2
0-1
0
1
Default
value
0
(OFF)
0
(OFF)
1
(ON)
1
(MIDDLE)
1
(MIDDLE)
1
(MIDDLE)
1
(ON)
55
Item/Display
H
TYPE
55-1
(Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
Purpose
PATTERN
1
PATTERN
2
Print
composing
method
PATTERN
3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine

control operations. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure

required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure
55-3
required.)
Purpose
Edging
type
OR
process
type
Nodeletecomposition type
Default
value
1
Input value
55-2
Purpose
Setting
range
Content
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Print
Input value
Blank
32
A
65
B
66
C
67
E
69
F
70
G
71
Print
Input value
H
72
I
73
J
74
K
75
L
76
M
77
N
78
Print
Input value
O
79
P
80
Q
81
R
82
T
84
U
85
V
86
Print
Input value
W
87
X
88
Y
89
Z
90
0
48
1
49
2
50
Print
Input value
3
51
5
53
6
54
7
55
8
56
9
57
Operation/Procedure
56
55-10
Purpose
56-1
Adjustment/Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan

only)
Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP

PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
PWB.)
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key.
1)
Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.
2)
2)
3)
Content
A
B
C
1ST DIGIT
2ND DIGIT
3RD DIGIT
First digit (left edge)

Second digit
Third digit
4TH DIGIT
Fourth digit
5TH DIGIT
Fifth digit
6TH DIGIT
COLOR
Sixth digit (right

edge)
Color specification
input
K
C
M
Y
R
G
B
Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.

Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.

Item/Display
Select a target content of data transfer.
Setting
range
1 - 90
Default
value
1
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is

displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
EEPROM -> HDD
HDD -> EEPROM
32 [blank:
20H]
65 - 90
[Alphabet:
41H("A) 5AH("Z")]
48 - 57
[Numeral:
30H("0") 39H("9")]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Transfer from EEPROM to HDD

Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
56-2
Data backup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.

SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and address data) to the USB
memory. (Corresponding to the device
cloning and the storage backup.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Classification
Operation
manual
NOTE
E-manual
56-3
Purpose
Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to

the USB memory.
Section
1)
2)
Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
Operation/Procedure
<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD Card HDD
1)
2)

<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card, HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD To USB MEMORY
3)
Content
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.

Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
3)


Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
Machine with the DSK installed

1)
2)
56-4
* IMPORT
Purpose
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card HDD

* EXPORT
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the

USB memory.
Section
3)
Enter the password with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
4)
Press [SET] key.
1)
5)
2)
Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
3)


Data list outside the backup targets

EEPROM/SD Card
PWB Type
Controller
PCU
SCU
Content
Machine serial No.
Product key information
Various counter
Trouble history
Machine serial No.
Various counter
Machine adjustment execute
history
Trouble history
Various counter
Trouble history
NOTE
56-5
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB

memory in the TEXT format.
Maintenance counter
Operation/Procedure
Section
Maintenance counter
1)
2)
Select a kind of data to be imported.
3)
Log
New N/A

Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
HDD
Classification
Japanese
FEP
Job end list
Copy counter/FAX
send counter etc.
Content
NOTE
56-6
User dictionary
Purpose
Job end list display data
(The image send series include
the preserved job list.)
Job log
*
*
*
*
Print history information

JAM history information
Trouble history information
Same position continuous jam
count value
* Charging information
* Life information
Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Import the SIM23-2 data to a USB memory

in the TEXT format.
Read from WEB is
enable.
Section
HDD
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Select a kind of data to be imported.
3)
: 15/Aug.
56-7
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Import the syslog data to a USB memory.

Section
HDD
60
60-1
1)
2)
Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
3)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations

(read/write) of the MFP PWB.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Data copy
Function (Purpose) Used to save the data in the SD card to the

HDD temporarily.
Section

Start the test.
56-11
Purpose
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Result display
OK
NG
NONE
INVALID
Description
Success
Fail
Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
Execution disable
Operation/Procedure
1)
SLOT
ICU SLOT-1
ICU SLOT-2
PCL SLOT-1
The data are saved temporarily to the HDD.

Error display
COMPLETE
WARNING
ERROR (HDD ACCESS ERROR)
ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK
WRITE ERROR)
READ ERROR)
ERROR (NO DATA ADJUSTMENT)
TROUBLE (U2-42)
Content
Normal completion
HDD unmounting
HDD access disable
Low level block IO error: write
Description
ICU standard memory
ICU expansion memory
Printer standard memory
61
61-1
Purpose
Low level block IO error: read

Inconsistent data
U2-42 occurrence
DIMM1
DIMM2
DIMM3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection.
Section
LSU
Operation/Procedure
1)
56-12
Purpose

When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Data copy
Function (Purpose) Used to copy the SD card data saved temporarily in the HDD with SIM56-11 to the
machine.
Display
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

The set values are copied from the HDD to the SD card.
Error display
COMPLETE
WARNING
NO DATA
ERROR (EXPORT DATA ILLEGAL)
READ ERROR)
ERROR (NO DATA ADJUSTMENT)
ERROR (SD ACCESS ERROR)
Content
Normal completion
SD/HDD unmounting
No data
Export data illegal
Low level block IO error: read
Inconsistent data (Error at the verify
check)
SD access error (File IO error)
Content
Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
Laser abnormality (K)
61-3
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/

FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.
2)

panel.
3)
4)

When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.
Mode
COPY
PR600/FAX
PR1200
Item/Display
A
B
A
B
A
B
LASER POWER (BW)

LASER POWER TS (BW)
LASER POWER (BW)
LASER POWER TS (BW)
LASER POWER (BW)
LASER POWER TS (BW)
Setting
range
Content
Laser power setting/BW

Laser power setting toner save/BW
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Default value
26/31
35cpm
cpm
machine
machine
160
170
170
160
170
160
160
170
170
160
170
160
Destination
linkage
62
62-6
62-1
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the

hard disk.
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD:

Excluding the Operation manual and the
watermark data)
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Operation/Procedure
2)
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
Select the self diag area.

The self diag operation is performed.
NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD,

use this simulation to cheek the HDD.
Used to execute the HDD format.

When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
SHORT S.T
EXTENDED S.T
Partial area diag

All area diag

normal display.
62-2
Purpose
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk

(partial).
Section
Normal completion -> "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed.

Abnormal end -> "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding section.
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
62-7
Purpose
62-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics

error log.
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk

(all areas).
Operation/Procedure
Section
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and

the result is printed.
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
1)

normal display.
Read/write operations are performed.

62-8
62-13
Data clear
Purpose
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD:

Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and the system area)
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Operation

Manual, watermark data only)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
Press [YES] key.
Section
Press [YES] key.
The operation manual data are deleted.
Used to execute the hard disk format.

normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
NG" is displayed.

normal display.
62-14
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize (remake) only the database file of the HDD.
62-10
Section
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.

Section
1)

Press [YES] key.
The database file is initialized
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

normal display.
Used to delete the job log data.

normal display.
62-11
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

Used to delete the document filing data.

normal display.
62-12
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format

in a hard disk trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.

When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system

data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
data storage area is cleared.
0
1
HDD
Operation/Procedure
2)
Operation/Procedure
Data clear
Enable
Disable (Default)
Operation/Procedure
63
1)
Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)

on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the document table.
2)
Select a target color of data display with [R] [G] [B] keys, and
press [OC] key.
63-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction

result.
Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
panel.
Item/Display
ANALOG GAIN
ODD
ANALOG GAIN
EVEN
DIGITAL GAIN ODD
TARGET VALUE
Content
Analog gain adjustment value (odd
number)
Analog gain adjustment value (even
number)
Digital gain adjustment value (odd
number)
Digital gain adjustment value (even
number)
Reference plate sampling average
value (ODD)
Reference plate sampling average
value (EVEN)
Target value
BLACK LEVEL
Black output level
ERROR CODE
Error code
(0, 1-14)
(for debug)
DIGITAL GAIN
EVEN
SMP AVE ODD
SMP AVE EVEN
RSPF WHITE
LEVEL 1ST
RSPF WHITE
LEVEL 2ND
NOTE

The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is performed.
Scanner
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
3)
When the operation is completed, data are displayed on the initial

screen.
63-4
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to

the reference position on the left rear frame side of the document table.
2)
Select a target color of data display with [R] [G] [B] keys, and
press [OC] key.
3)
Select a data display mode.
GAMMA THROUGH
COPY GAMMA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
First scan SPF front surface white

reference level
SPF front surface white reference level
of the second or later scanning
SCANNER GAMMA
SIT CHECK
4)

When the operation is completed, data are displayed on the
initial screen.
63-5
Purpose
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [SIDE A(OC)] key.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key
3)
The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
default.
Adjustment
Section
Operation/Procedure
(When RSPF model)
Used to perform shading.
normal display.
63-3
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment.
Section
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color

balance and gamma default setting.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
1)
SIT chart scan data

Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart
scan data
Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT
chart scan data
SIT chart scan data/Check result
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
63-2
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
Scanner
64
64-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set the print conditions.

Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Change the set values with 10-key.
2)

The test print (self print) is performed.
Item/Display
PRINT PATTERN
(1, 2, 17 - 19)
DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2)
DOT2 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2)
D
E
F
DENSITY (DOT1>=2 IF A:2)

MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE
THROUGH
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD DITHER
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
DUPLEX
YES
NO
PAPER TYPE
PLAIN
HEAVY
OHP
ENVELOPE
H
I
Content
Print pattern specification
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
Setting of print dot number (M parameter)
(Self print pattern: m by n)
Setting of blank dot number
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n)
Used to specify the print gradation.
Number of print
Exposure mode
No process (through)
specification
Text/Printed Photo
Text/ Photograph
Text
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Dither without correction
Tray selection
Manual paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Duplex print
Yes
selection
No
Paper type
Standard paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Setting range
1 - 58
(Printable only 1, 2, 17 - 19)
1-255
(Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
0-255
(Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
1-255
1 - 999
1-8
1
(Pattern 17-19: 2-8
2
except above: 1-8)
3
4
5
6
7
8
1-5
1
2
3
4
5
0-1
0
1
1-6
1
2
3
4
Default value
1
1
254
255
1
8
(STANDARD
DITHER)
2
(CS1)
1
(NO)
1
(PLAIN)
Print pattern of Item A

Pattern No.
Content
Grid pattern
2
17
Dot print
All background (halftone)
18
256 gradations pattern

(Other dither)
19
256 gradations pattern

(For text dither)
Pattern generating
section
LSU-ASIC
Halftone (IMG-ASIC
rear process)
NOTE
* Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
* Writing regardless of void. The first one is fixed to LD1.
-
* 16 gradations are printed in the main scan direction, and the following 16 gradations
are printed in the next line. (16 x 16 patch print)
* Printing is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge.
* Printing is made from 255 gradation, and 0 - 254 gradations are printed.
64-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

2)
3)
Item/Display
A
PRINT PATTERN
B
C
D
DENSITY
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
PAPER TYPE
Content
Specification of the print pattern
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
Used to specify the print gradation.
Number of print
Paper feed tray selection
Manual paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Paper type
Standard paper
Heavy paper
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
PLAIN
HEAVY
Setting range
1-3
Default value
3
1 - 255
1 - 999
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
128
1
3
(CS2)
Setting range
1-2
1 - 999
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
0
1
Default value
2
1
2
(CS1)

Pattern No.
1
2
3
Content
256 gradations pattern (B/W)
Halftone pattern (B/W)
Background dot print
64-5
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

2)

A
B
C
D
E
Item/Display
PRINT PATTERN
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
PAPER TYPE
PLAIN
HEAVY
TONER SAVE MODE
OFF
ON
Content
Number of print
Paper feed tray
Manual paper feed
selection
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Paper type
Standard paper
Heavy paper
Monochrome toner
not set.
save
set.

Pattern No.
1
2
Content
B/W
Service chart (B/W)
0
(PLAIN)
0
(OFF)
64-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

2)

A
B
C
D
E
Item/Display
PRINT PATTERN
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
PAPER TYPE
PLAIN
HEAVY
TONER SAVE MODE
OFF
ON
Content
Number of print
Paper feed tray
Manual paper feed
selection
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Paper type
Standard paper
Heavy paper
Monochrome toner
not set.
save
set.
Setting range
1
1 - 999
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
0
1
Default value
1
1
2
(CS1)
0
(PLAIN)
0
(OFF)

Pattern No.
1
Content
B/W
65-2
65
65-1
Purpose
Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
Section
Operation check/test
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
Operation panel section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the touch panel.
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
the touched position is displayed in real time.
Operation/Procedure
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.

When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to

the simulation sub number entry menu.

;<

In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.


65-5
66-2
Purpose
Operation check/test
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key

input.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on

the screen.
1)
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
is displayed.
FAX
When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following

screen is displayed.
* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed, the display is shifted
to the country code list screen.
* The currently set country code is displayed in the column of
"PRESENT:".
<Check target key>

JOB STATUS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
HOME
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AUDIT CLEAR
0
PROGRAM
CLEAR
STOP
CLEAR ALL/RESET
START (MONO)
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the

default value for the country code.
2)
Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The

entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and
[SET] key becomes active.
3)
When [SET] button is pressed after entering the country code,

[EXECUTE] button becomes active. The country code is displayed in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of
"NEW:" is cleared.
4)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and

[YES] and [NO] buttons become active. The country name is
displayed on the tile line.
5)
When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW

corresponding to the country code is initialized.
6)
After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE],

[YES], and [NO] buttons become inactive.
* When [C] key is pressed, the column of NEW: is cleared.
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page)

* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed on the initial screen, the
display is shifted to the country code list screen.
Use scroll keys to select the country select page.
Country code list
66
66-1
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2

- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the
soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.

* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is
cleared.
2)
Press [DATA] button.

The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
* When [SW NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the
initial screen.
3)
Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with

10-key.
* [1] -> [0]
[0] -> [1]
4)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the

setting is saved.
After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
JAPAN
U.S.A.
AUSTRALIA
U.K.
FRANCE
GERMANY
SWEDEN
NEWZEALAND
CHINA
SINGAPORE
TW
MIDDLEANDNEAREAST
SLOVAKIA
OTHER3
FINLAND
NORWAY
DENMARK
NETHERLANDS
ITALY
SWITZERLAND
AUSTRIA
INDONESIA
THAILAND
MALAYSIA
INDIA
PHILIPPINES
HONGKONG
RUSSIA
SOUTHAFRICA
SPAIN
PORTUGUESE
LUXEMBURG
BELGIUM
CZECH
HUNGARY
00000000
10110101
00001001
10110100
00111101
00000100
10100101
01111110
00100110
10011100
11111110
11111101
11111100
11111011
00111100
10000010
00110001
01111011
01011001
10100110
00001010
01010100
10101001
01101100
01010011
10001001
01010000
10111000
10011111
10100000
10001011
01101001
00001111
00101110
01010001
GREECE
POLAND
BRAZIL
KOREA
VIETNAM
Signal send table
01000110
10001010
00010110
01100001
10111100
NOSIGNAL
26.4 V34
16.8 V34
7.2 V34
12.0 V33
7.2 V17
2.4 V27t
0.3 V21
66-3
Operation test/Check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM

and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller
and display the result.
DP MAKE
33.6 V34
24.0 V34
14.4 V34
4.8 V34
14.4 V17
9.6 V29
0.3 FLG
ANSam
DP BRK
31.2 V34
21.6 V34
12.0 V34
2.4 V34
12.0 V17
7.2 V29
CED 2100
RINGER
28.8 V34
19.2 V34
9.6 V34
14.4 V33
9.6 V17
4.8 V27t
CNG 1100
No RBT
NO MSG
FAX
Section
Operation/Procedure
66-5
1)
Purpose

2)
When the memory check item button is selected, the display is

shifted to the memory check screen.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line

and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft
SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals,
refer to SIM66-04.)
3)

memory check of the selected item is started.
Operation/Procedure
* Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key.
4)
After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] button returns

to the normal display and the result of memory check is displayed.
Memory check status

NO CHECK
CHECKING
OK
NG A##
No check
During checking
Check complete OK
Check complete NG
Error occurring address or data

line is displayed for each item.
Section
FAX
1)

2)
When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
display.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and signals are sent.
4)
To end signal send:
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and

signal send is interrupted.
Check item
1
Check memory item

All Memory Device Check (once)
2
3
4
5
6
7
MFP SRAM (once)

MFP SRAM (repeat)
MODEM EEPROM <1> (once)
MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat)
MODEM SDRAM <1> (once)
MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat)
Remark
All the items are checked
once.
Check only once
Repeat check
Check only once in LINE1
Repeat check in LINE1
Check only once in LINE1
Repeat check in LINE1
66-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential registration

check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode. (If there is no confidential registration, no print is made.)
Section
The number in < > indicates the line.
Data output/Check
FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-4
Purpose
1)
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the

line and the main unit speaker. (Send level:
max.)
Section

confidential checkable is printed.
* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made even
though [EXECUTE] key is pressed.
2)
FAX
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the

normal display.
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the

right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.)
66-7
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
Purpose
2)
When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is highlighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
display.
Function (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the

image memory. (Confidential data are also
outputted.)
3)
Operation/Procedure
To end signal send:
1)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and signal send is interrupted.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all

image data saved in the image memory are outputted.
2)

normal display.
4)
Section
Data output/Check
FAX
66-8
66-11
Purpose
FAX
Section
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send
level: Max.)
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps

to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
Max.)
FAX
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)

1)

2)
When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is

highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display.
2)
When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is

display.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a

sound message is sent.
4)
To end signal send:
<Sound message table>

NONE (Mute)
MESSAGE3
(Message 3)
ALARM (Alarm)
PAUSE (Pause
melody)
MESSAGE4
(Message 4)
RINGER
(Ringing sound
(Speaker))
MESSAGE1
(Message 1)
MESSAGE5
(Massage 5)
EXT.TEL.RING
ER (External
telephone call)
MESSAGE2
(Message 2)
MESSAGE6
(Message 6)
300bps send signal table

NO SIGNAL
010101
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound message

Soft SW setting)
* For details of sound messages, refer to
the sound message table of SIM66-08.
Section
11111
00001
11110
00000
66-12
66-9
Purpose
FAX
Section
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps

Soft SW setting)
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps,
refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal
table.
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)

2)

display.
3)

4)
To end signal send:
1)

2)

display.
3)

4)
To end signal send:

66-13
66-10
Purpose
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send

image data. (The confidential data are also
cleared.)
Section
FAX
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM6614/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be
registered.)
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
Press [YES] button.
3)
After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the

machine.

* The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column
of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.)
2)
Enter a number with 10-key.

The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:].
After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only
[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by
one digit))
3)
When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the

entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of
[PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank.
66-14
Purpose
66-18
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS)

send test and to adjust the make time.
Section
FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line

and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)
FAX
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)

Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.

2)
3)
To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The button returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and

the previously set button returns to the normal display.
3)
4)
66-15
Purpose
To stop signal sending:

When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
display and signal sending is interrupted.
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS)

send test and to adjust the make time.
Section
66-21
FAX
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Check
1)

Function (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system

error, protocol monitor).
2)

dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
Operation/Procedure
3)
Section
FAX
* The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered

with SIM66-13.
1)
When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted

and the previously set button returns to the normal display.
To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The button returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
2)

[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and printing is started.
3)
66-16
Purpose
Adjustment
FAX information print content table
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test

and to adjust the send level.
Section

normal display.
FAX
REGISTERED
FILE MANAGEMENT
PROTOCOL LINE 1
MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1
Operation/Procedure
1)

2)

dial pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low
group of the signal send level.
3)
To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button. The button

returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
66-17
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line

and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
Section
FAX
66-22
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume.

(This simulation can be executed even
though the handset setting is set to NO.
When, however, the handset is not
installed, the sound volume cannot be
checked.) (Japan model only)
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as
the default sound volume.)
Operation/Procedure
1)

2)
Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MIDDLE 2:MAX)
2)
When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and

the previously set button returns to the normal display.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] button to deliver the selected on-hold tone.
3)
4)
To stop signal sending:
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume

cannot be checked. Execution is possible.
4)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and delivery of the on-hold tone is stopped.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal

display and signal sending is interrupted.
66-24
66-32
Data clear
Purpose
FAX
Section
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST save data.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the fixed data received from

the line and to display the result.
FAX
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Operation/Procedure
2)
Press [YES] button.
1)
3)
After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns

to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
The FAST save data are cleared.
* Fixed data check procedure

* The data received from the line is checked of the following
fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with
OK is displayed on LCD, if not NG is displayed.
66-29
* The judgment is made in 2 minutes.

Receive speed: 300BPS
Receive data: 00H
Judgment data: 100byte
Clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data

(the one-touch registration table, the FTP/
Desktop expansion table, the group expansion table, the program registration table,
the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
2)
Press [YES] button.
3)
After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns

to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
The telephone book data area cleared.
66-30
Function (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change,

The display is highlighted by status change.
1)

2)
The signal to be checked can be selected from the two

options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF."
3)
When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG

CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected,
they are normally displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1)

2)
HS1, HS2, RHS, and EXHS are highlighted when the signal is
detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not
detected.
Signal used for signal detection check

(When "FNET" is selected)
FNET
(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected)
TEL/LIU status change item description
BUSY TONE
Polarity inversion signal

Polarity inversion signal
Handset hook SW
External telephone hook SW
FAX
Section
Operation/Procedure
FAX
HS1
HS2
RHS
EXHS
Function (Purpose) Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display
the detection result. When a signal is
detected, the display is highlighted.
1)
Section
After completion of check, [EXECUTE] button returns to the

normal display. The result is displayed as "OK" or "NG."
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
2)
66-33
FAX
Section
Press [EXECUTE] button to check the fixed data received from

the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
CNG
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to

TEL/LIU.
1)

2)
Change the port setting.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the changed setting is

reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.
4)
To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] button again.

[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
1)
FAX send is performed.
2)

The send time in procedure 1) is displayed.
When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted.
Port which outputs to TEL/LIU

MR
FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
CION
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the send test and display

the time required for sending image data in
the test. Used to execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)
Section
FAX
Section
EC
DTMF
66-34
66-31
Purpose
CED
S.
66-36
66-43
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check send and receive data from

the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or the command line
individually.
FAX
Section
Section
1)

2)
Operation check
2)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing

to the power control is executed. When writing is normally
completed, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is displayed.
3)
After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
MFP controller I/F check item table

MFP -> MDMC (DATA once)
Data line Once
MFP -> MDMC (DATA repeat)
Data line Repeat
MFP -> MDMC (CMD once)
Command line Once
MFP -> MDMC (CMD repeat)
Command line Repeat
66-39
Setting
Purpose

* Use scroll keys to select the select item of the power control
adjustment value.
Select an item to be checked on the screen.
MFP <- MDMC (DATA once)

Data line Once
MFP <- MDMC (DATA repeat)
Data line Repeat
MFP <- MDMC (CMD once)
Command line Once
MFP <- MDMC (CMD repeat)
Command line Repeat
FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value into the

power control installed in the FAX BOX.
Set range and default value of each set value

Item
CI_LEVEL_JUDGE
CI_CYCLE_MIN
CI_CYCLE_MAX
CI_COUNT
RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE
EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE
RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE
SON_TIMEOUT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Set range
2 to 15
1 to 254
2 to 255
2 to 15
2 to 15
2 to 225
2 to 15
1 to 127
Default value
6
10
142
3
15
240
2
20
Function (Purpose) Used to check and change the destination

setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
FAX
Section
66-61
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set destination button is highlighted. (In the default state, JAPAN is set
as the destination.)
Select a destination button to set the destination. (In this
example, USA/CANADA is selected.) The selected button is
highlighted and the previously selected button returns to the
normal display.
* When the destination button is changed, the new destination
setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Destination setting table

JAPAN
CHINA
U.S.A/CANADA
ASIA&OTHERS
EUROPE
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW

(151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing
the soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
2)
Press [DATA] button.
3)
Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with

10-key.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
AUSTRALIA
* [1] -> [0]

[0] -> [1]
4)
66-42
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX.
Section
FAX
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)

setting is saved.
Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted

and YES] and [NO] buttons become active.
66-62
Purpose
Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a

USB memory in PDF file type.
Section
FAX
Press [YES] button.
Operation/Procedure
The power control program is rewritten.
1)
When rewriting of the power control program is normally completed, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
2)
Select data to be imported.
3)

Execute import of data selected in procedure 2).
When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed.
Error display
ERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE
ERROR: NO IMAGE DATA
ERROR
Content
No USB memory installed
No image data
Other errors
67
67-17
Reset
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer reset

Printer
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
NIC setting.)

normal display.
67-45
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the printer image filter and

trapping.
Printer
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

Item/Display
SHARPNESS:
B/W PRINT
Content
Monochrome
print
Setting
range
0-4
Default
value
2
NOTE
The greater
the set value
is, the
stronger the
filer
enhancement
is. The smaller
the set value
is, the
stronger the
filter
smoothness
is.
(0: Soft High,
1: Soft Low, 2:
Center, 3:
Sharp Low, 4:
Sharp High)
D.
Self diag
operation
Service
Manual
MX-M316N
[7] TROUBLESHOOTING
The machine always monitors its own state.
1. Error code and troubleshooting
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and

displays the trouble message.
A. General
A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is

nearly expired or is expired.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the
machine to minimize the damage.
B. Function and purpose
When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or

may not be stopped.
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
the LCD and lamp.
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simulation.
1)
Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a

trouble.)
2)
The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is

stopped on detection of a trouble.)
3)
By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be

quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.)
Monitors the machine

conditions.
4)
Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows

to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a consumable part.)
Detects/analyzes
the content.
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically

cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning messages must be cleared by a simulation.
C. Self diag message kinds

The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Class 1
User
Service
Class 2
Others
Warning
Trouble
Others
Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the

user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration,
etc.)
Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
-
Trouble/Warning
Warning
Trouble
The machine
is stopped.
The content
is displayed.
Trouble/Warning
Trouble
Troubleshoot
the cause.
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic
message with the
commands).
diagnostic (test
Reset
Standby
state
MX-M316N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 1
Warning
A consumable
part has reached
its lifetime
ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
the
consumable part.
No
OP
E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Error code and operatable mode
Trouble content
FAX board trouble
* FAX board
breakdown
HDD trouble
Operation disable
trouble 4
Power controller
trouble
Special function
trouble
* SD card
breakdown
* HDD breakdown
* HDD-ASIC
breakdown
* SCU
communication
error
* PCU
communication
error
* Backup battery
voltage fall
* External serial I/F
communication
error (RIC)
* Memory error
(included not
installed the
expansion RAM)
* Connection trouble
(Model data
discrepancy)
(MFPC detection)
* Serial number data
error
* HDD registration
data check sum
error
* Memory check
error when booting
* Image memory
trouble, decode
error
* Personal counter
connection trouble
* Power controller
error
* Watermark data
error
Laser trouble
* LSU breakdown
Engine trouble 1
(Model data
discrepancy) (PCU
detection)
Scanner
communication
trouble
Engine
communication
trouble
Backup battery
voltage fall trouble
Operation disable
trouble 2
Operation disable
trouble 3
Judgment
block
MFP
PCU
Trouble
code
(26cpm/
31cpm/
35cpm)
machine)
F6 (00, 01,
04, 21, 30,
97, 98)
E7 (07)
Operatable mode
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
Scan
(Push)
Scan
(Pull)
ScanTo
HDD
Print
List
print
FAX
Send
FAX
print
E7 (03)
E7 (04)
A0 (02)
E7 (80)
A0 (01)
E7 (90)
U1 (01)
U7 (50, 51)
U2 (00, 05,
10, 11, 22,
23, 24, 40,
41, 42)
A0 (11, 15,
20)
E7 (60, 61,
62)
U2 (30)
U2 (50)
E7 (96)
E7 (01, 49,
91, 92, 93,
94)
PC (00)
L8 (20)
U2 (60)
P1 (00, 01,
02)
E7 (20, 21,
28)
L6 (10)
A0 (21)
E7 (50)
F1 (50, 95)
*10
Trouble content
Engine trouble 2
* PCU troubles
(motor, fusing, etc.)
Paper feed tray 1

trouble
Paper feed tray 2
trouble
Paper feed tray 3
trouble
Staple trouble
* Paper feed tray 1

breakdown
* Paper feed tray 2
breakdown
* Paper feed tray 3
breakdown
* Staple breakdown
Finisher trouble
* After-process
breakdown
Other troubles
* Other troubles
Process control
trouble
* Process control
breakdown (PCU
detection)
(Model data
discrepancy) (SCU
detection)
* SCU CPT ASIC
error
* SCU ASIC error
(SCU detection)
* SCU EEPROM
error
* Scanner section
breakdown (mirror
motor, lens, copy
lamp)
* CCD breakdown
(shading, etc.)
Operation disable
trouble
SCU CPT ASIC

trouble
SCU ASIC trouble
(SCU detection)
Scanner trouble 1
Scanner trouble 2
CCD trouble
O: Operation enabled
Judgment
block
PCU
SCU
Trouble
code
(26cpm/
31cpm/
35cpm)
machine)
F2(40,64,
70,74)
H2(00,01)
H3(00,01)
H4(00,01)
H5(01)
L4(01,11,32,
34,35,40,
44,70)
L8(01,02)
U2 (90, 91)
F3 (12)
Operatable mode
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
Scan
(Push)
Scan
(Pull)
ScanTo
HDD
Print
F3 (22)
F3 (32, 42)
F1 (10)
List
print
FAX
Send
FAX
print
*10
F1 (00, 03,
15, 19, 20,
29, 37)
EE (EL, EU)
3
*10
3
*10
3
*10
4
*10
4
*10
F2 (39, 58)
O
*11
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
A0 (22)
UC (02)
UC (20)
U2 (80, 81)
L1 (00)
L3 (00)
E7 (10, 11,
14)
: Operation disabled
1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.

3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * However, it is
valid only when the escape tray setting has been made.
9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
*11: The trouble display is "Display to a 2-line message." (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
15: FAST notification function (When in U2-22, trouble notification cannot be made. If there is no abnormality in the FAX software or the
FAST data in U2-23, trouble notification can be made.)
(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power
MFP event
manager
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check
Trouble check is preformed in each block,
and the result is sent to the MFP.
H3, H4, H5
U1
U2
F3, U6
Each block
When the power is turned on,

check is made in each block.
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
Saved in the PCU

Saved in the MFP
Saved in each block
Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 16
sim task
SIM13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancel
SIM15: LCC/LCT(U6)trouble cancel, F3 cansel
SIM16: U2 trouble cancel
Trouble cancel command
Trouble cancel
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel status

is communicated.
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.
Process sequence
First
(Low priority)
i
(High priority)
Error code
U2
60
50
30
24
10
23
22
A0
15
20
U2
11
00
E7
96
U1
01
E7
60
Content
Watermark check error
HDD user authentication data check sum error (SD card when no HDD is installed)
MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error
MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error
Individual data check sum error of SRAM memory
SRAM memory check sum error
Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
MFP EEPROM read/write error
MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error
Battery trouble
MFP connection trouble
F. Error code list

Trouble
code
Main
Sub
code code
A0
01
02
11
15
20
21
22
E7
01
03
04
07
10
11
14
20
21
28
49
50
60
61
62
80
90
91
92
93
94
96
EE
EL
EU
F1
00
03
10
15
19
20
29
37
50
95
F2
39
40
58
64
70
74
F3
12
22
32
42
F6
00
01
04
21
30
97
98
H2
H3
H4
H5
L1
00
01
00
01
00
01
01
00
Trouble content
PCU PWB ROM error

SCU PWB ROM error
Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU)
Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU)
Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU)
MFP image data error
HDD trouble
HDD-ASIC error
SD card error
Shading error (Black correction)
Shading error (White correction)
CCD-ASIC error
LSU laser detection error
LSU LD deterioration trouble
LSU control Asic connection error
Water Mark data error
PCU connection trouble
MFP connection trouble (PCU)
MFP connection trouble (SCU)
MFP - SCU PWB communication error
MFP - PCU PWB communication error
FAX reception image data error
Copy image data error
Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print image data process error
Image file data process error (when importing file data)
Auto developer adjustment trouble (Over-toner abnormality)
Auto developer adjustment trouble (Under-toner abnormality)
Finisher - PCU PWB communication error
Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble
Staple operation trouble
Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble
Finisher alignment operation trouble F
Finisher alignment operation trouble R
Finisher cooling fan motor abnormality
Finisher data backup RAM error
Main unit - Finisher combination error
Paper exit option configuration error
Process thermistor trouble
Toner density sensor trouble
Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M)
Toner supply operation trouble
Improper toner cartridge detection
Toner cartridge CRUM error
Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble
FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error
FAX MODEM operation trouble
Improper combination of TEL/LIU PWB and FAX soft switch
FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (FAX detection)
Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine
Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main
machine destination
Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM)
Thermistor open trouble (TH_US)
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM)
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US)
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM)
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US)
5-time continuous jams of POSD
Scanner feed trouble
Trouble
detection
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
PCU
SCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
SCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Mechanism
Electricity
FAX
Supply
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
MFP
FAX
FAX
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
SCU
Option
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Trouble
code
Main
Sub
code code
L3
00
L4
01
11
32
34
35
40
43
70
L6
10
L8
02
20
P1
00
01
02
PC
U1
01
U2
00
05
10
11
22
23
24
30
40
41
42
50
U7
UC
60
80
81
90
91
50
51
02
20
Trouble content
Scanner return trouble

Main motor lock trouble
Shift motor trouble
Power source cooling fan trouble
LSU cooling fan trouble
Fusing cooling fan trouble
Ozone fan trouble
Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Toner motor lock trouble
Polygon motor trouble
Full wave signal width abnormality
Power controller communication trouble
PCI communication error
PCI fan error
Plasma generating device error
Personal counter not detected
Battery trouble
SD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents inconsistency
MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error
MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
SRAM memory check sum error
MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error
MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
SD card system storage data area error
HDD system storage data area error
Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error
HDD user authentication data check sum error
(SD card when no HDD is installed)
SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error
Vendor machine error
CPT - ASIC error
DOCC ASIC error
Trouble
detection
SCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
FAX
Supply
G. Details of error codes and countermeasures
A0-01
PCU PWB ROM error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
A0-02
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
A0-20
MFP
Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the PCU.
Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up
mode.
MFP
Installation of the normal firmware was performed
with a security kit enable.
Stop installation of the normal firmware.
Conflict firmware and EEPROM data

version (MFP)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
A0-21
MFP
The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc.
SCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause

version (SCU)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-01
MFP
Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Check the combination of the firmware.
Check & Remedy
E7-03
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
MFP
HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.)
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
booting.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
SD card error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy

version (PCU)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
MFP
Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC
PWB and HDD.
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality
(FAT breakage).
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness
of the MFPC PWB and HDD.
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the
HDD.
Replace the HDD.
HDD-ASIC error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
E7-07
MFP
Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble.
of the MFPC PWB.
HDD trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
E7-04
SCU
Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
MFP image data error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Firmware version inconsistency

(MFP - PCU)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
A0-15
MFP
The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc.
PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again.
Replace the PCU PWB.
SCU PWB ROM error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
A0-11
A0-22
PCU
Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
MFP
SD card trouble or contact error
MFPC PWB trouble.
Replace the SD card.
Check the SD card socket.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
E7-10
Shading error (Black correction)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-11
Shading error (White correction)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-14
SCU
Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
scanner lamp is turned OFF.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
CCD unit abnormality.
SCU PWB abnormality.
Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check the CCD unit.
Check the SCU PWB.
E7-21
LSU LD deterioration trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-28
LSU control Asic connection error
Trouble content
SCU
Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble
Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp
unit.
Check or replace the scanner lamp.
Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB.
Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white board.
Check or replace the CCD unit.
Check or replace the SCU PWB.
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-49
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy

SCU
SCU PWB trouble.
Improper Installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check the SCU PWB.
Check or replace the CCD unit.
Check or replace the SCU PWB.
E7-50
Trouble content
LSU laser detection error

Check & Remedy
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Laser optical axis misalignment
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble.
Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
connector between LD PWB and MFPC PWB.
Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check connection of the connector and harness
between the LD PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Replace the LSU.
E7-55
MFP
Watermark data trouble.
HDD trouble.
* When the wartermark data is not installed, U2-60
error occurs in booting.
Use SIM62-02/SIM62-03 to check HDD read/write.
If the result is NG, a remedy corresponding to E7-03
is required.
Use SIM49-05 to update the watermark data.
(Reinstallation)
PCU connection trouble
Detail
Cause
E7-20
Access error between the CPU in the PCU PWB and

the LSU control ASIC.
PCU
Improper connection of the communication connector
between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the
MFPC PWB
PCU PWB or MFPC PWB trouble.
between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Water Mark data error
CCD-ASIC error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Laser trouble
PCU
Laser deterioration, power reduction
Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
connector between LD PWB and MFPC PWB.
Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check connection of the communication connetctor
between the LD PWB and MFPC PWB.
Replace the LSU.
Unknown PWB identification information is detected

in the PCU PWB.
PCU
A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the
machine specifications is connected.
Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
LSU connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
LSU trouble.
PCU PWB information sum error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error

PCU
PCU EEPROM sum check error.
PCU EEPROM trouble.
PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
Replace the PCU EEPROM.
E7-60
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-61
E7-91
Unknown PWB identification information is detected

in the MFPC PWB.
MFP
A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the
machine specifications is connected.
Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
MFPC PWB trouble.
MFP connection trouble (PCU)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy

Compatibility trouble between MFP - PCU
MFP
Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the
PCU.
Check the MFPC PWB.
Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and
the PCU.
FAX reception image data error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-92
Copy image data error
Trouble content
E7-62
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-80
Check & Remedy
An error of copy image data process occurs.

(In Non ERDH)
MFP
Image data process abnormality
HDD trouble
Image compression data corruption
MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
MFP - SCU PWB communication error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-90
Detail
Cause
EEPROM PWB information check sum error

MFP
Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the
SCU.
Check the MFPC PWB.
Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and
the SCU.
An error of FAX reception image data process occurs.

MFP
HDD trouble
SD card trouble or contact error
MFPC PWB trouble
FAX control PWB trouble
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Replace or check installation of the SD card.
Replace the FAX control PWB.
E7-93
MFP
SCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check connection of the SCU PWB and the MFPC
PWB.
Check the ground.
Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print

image data process error
Trouble content
MFP - PCU PWB communication error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Detail
Cause
MFP
PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC
PWB.
Check the ground.
Check & Remedy
An image data process error occurs in the following

operation mode:
? Copy (in ERDH)
? Copy composing system function (Water mark)
? When in image send
? When filing documents
? When displaying the preview
? When printing with the GDI/PCL printer
? Copy composing system function (Water mark)
? When printing FAX send result table
MFP
HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
E7-94
Image file data process error

(when importing file data)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-96
File image process error (backup restore error) when

importing filing data
MFP
HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFPC PWB DIMM memory access trouble

MFP
Memory data corruption occurs
MFPC PWB trouble
the memory.
DIMM memory socket check
Replace the DIMM memory.
F1-03
Finisher paper exit roller lifting

operation trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-10
Staple operation trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble

(Over-toner abnormality)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
An abnormality occurred in execution of automatic

developer adjustment.
PCU
Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage error, toner concentration trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM25-2 to perform the auto developer
adjustment.
F1-15
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-00
An abnormality occurred in execution of automatic

developer adjustment.
PCU
Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage error, toner concentration trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM25-2 to perform the auto developer
adjustment.
F1-19
Check & Remedy
Lift motor trouble.

PCU
Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
tray lift motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Finisher alignment operation trouble F
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Finisher - PCU PWB communication

error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
PCU
Staple motor trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
motor.
position sensor.
Replace the staple motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Finisher paper exit tray lift operation

trouble
EE-EU Auto developer adjustment trouble

(Under-toner abnormality)
Trouble content
PCU
Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble
Harness and connector connection trouble
Home position sensor trouble
Finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
roller lift motor.
position sensor.
Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Check & Remedy

PCU
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check the connector and the harness between the
finisher and the PCU PWB.
PCU
Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Over-current to the motor.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor F.
position sensor.
Replace the paper alignment motor F.
F1-20
Finisher alignment operation trouble

R
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-29
PCU
Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Over-current to the motor.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor R.
position sensor.
Replace the paper alignment motor R.
F2-39
Process thermistor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-40
Toner density sensor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Finisher cooling fan motor

abnormality
Check & Remedy
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-37
Finisher cooling fan motor abnormality

MFP
Motor lock
Motor harness short/open.
Harness/connector connection trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
cooling fan (FCF).
Check connection from the finisher control PWB to
the motor.
Replace the fan motor.
F2-58
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
F1-50
Main unit - Finisher combination error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-95
PCU
Malfunction due to noises
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10, Finisher control
PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
PCU
The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
model is installed.
Install a proper finisher.
F2-64
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-70
PCU
The paper exit option configuration is improper.
Install a proper option.
PCU
Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
Process humidity sensor harness and connector
connection trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
harness and the connector.
Toner supply operation trouble
Paper exit option configuration error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
harness.
Replace the developing unit.
Temperature/humidity sensor trouble

(HUD_M/TH_M)
Finisher data backup RAM error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
PCU
Process thermistor trouble.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the process thermistor.
Check connection of the process thermistor harness
and the connector.
PCU
Toner motor trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
Replace the toner motor.
Replace the toner density sensor.
Connector and harness check.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit.
Improper toner cartridge detection
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-74
Toner cartridge CRUM error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F3-12
PCU
Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
and toner cartridge
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
F6-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
Remedy
Case 2 Cause

Case 3
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F3-22
C1LUD is not turned ON within the specified time.

PCU
C1LUD is not turned ON within the specified time.
C1LUD sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Check connection of the harness and the connector
of C1LUD.
Replace the lift-up unit.
MFPC PWB - FAX communication

trouble
Case 4
F6-01
Check
and
Remedy
Cause
Check
and
Remedy
Cause
Check
and
Remedy
FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and

harness trouble
FAX control PWB and the mother board.
FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage
Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
C2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.

PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Check the harness and the connector of C2LUD.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F3-42
FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and

harness trouble
FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB.
FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write

error
Trouble content
F3-32
MFP - FAX communication establishment error /

Framing / Parity / Protocol error
MFP
FAX control PWB trouble.

PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy

PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
Remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
Remedy
F6-04
FAX MODEM operation trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
Remedy
F6-21
FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble

FAX
FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.

Improper combination of TEL/LIU

PWB and FAX soft switch
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and

write)
FAX
FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check
and
Remedy
Cause
Check
and
Remedy
Incompatibility between the TEL/LIU PWB and the

FAX control PWB information (soft switch)
MFP
The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is
improper.
Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.
TEL/LIU PWB trouble.

Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
F6-30
FAX 1-chip microprocessor access

error (FAX detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check
and
Remedy
Cause
Check
and
Remedy
F6-97
FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and

write)
MFP
Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor,
or no program data written.
Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
program.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
Remedy
F6-98
Thermistor open trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble.

Incompatibility between FAX control

PWB and the main machine
Trouble content
H2-01
Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the

main machine
MFP
The FAX control PWB installed is improper.
FAX control PWB trouble.
Install a proper FAX control PWB.
H3-00
Fusing section high temperature

trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Incompatibility between the FAX

control PWB destination and the main
machine destination
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
Remedy
Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB

destination and the main machine destination
MFP
Incompatibility between the destination information
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6)
1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.
2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)
H3-01
Trouble content
Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Main thermistor open hardware detection trouble

PCU
Main thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Fusing unit not installed
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Replace the thermistor.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section.
Main heater lamp abnormally high temperature

software detection trouble
PCU
The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Main thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Power unit trouble.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
harness.
Replace the power unit.
Fusing section high temperature

trouble (TH_US)
Detail
Cause
H2-00
Sub thermistor open hardware detection trouble

PCU
Sub thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Fusing unit not installed
harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section.
Check & Remedy
Sub heater lamp abnormally high temperature

software detection trouble
PCU
The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Sub thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
harness.
H4-00
Fusing section low temperature

trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
H4-01
The fusing temperature does not reach the specified

level within the specified time from turning ON the
power relay.
PCU
Main thermistor trouble.
Main heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the thermostat.
Replace the HL control PWB.
Fusing section low temperature

trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
The fusing temperature does not reach the specified

level within the specified time from turning ON the
power relay.
PCU
Sub thermistor trouble.
Sub heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the thermostat.
Replace the HL control PWB.
H5-01
5-time continuous jams of POSD
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L1-00
Scanner feed trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L3-00
PCU
A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
remains.)
POSD sensor trouble
Fusing unit installation trouble
POSD sensor connector and harness connection
trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Fusing unit, drive section trouble
Replace the POSD sensor.
Check installation of the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing unit.
Check paper around the fusing unit section.
Check connection of the POSD sensor connector and
the harness.
Scanner feed is not completed within the specified

time.
SCU
Scanner unit trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
Scanner control PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble.
Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Replace the scanner unit.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor.
Scanner return trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Scanner return is not completed within the specified

time.
SCU
Scanner unit trouble
SCU PWB trouble
Scanner control PWB trouble
Scanner home position sensor trouble
Scanner motor trouble
Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Replace the scanner unit.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor.
L4-01
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L4-11
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
L4-43
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L6-10
The fan operation signal is not detected.

PCU
LSU cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.
Replace the LSU cooling fan.

PCU
Power cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Replace the power cooling fan.
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy

PCU
Fusing cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the fusing cooling fan.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L8-02

PCU
Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the fan.
Check the connector and the harness.
The polygon motor does not reach the specified RPM

within the specified time after starting rotation of the
polygon motor.
PCU
Polygon motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
motor.
Replace the LSU.
Toner motor lock trouble
Fusing cooling fan trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan

motor.
Replace the fan motor / the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the
harness.
Polygon motor trouble
Detail
Cause
L4-70

PCU
Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
and the fan motor.
PCU PWB trouble.
Fan motor trouble.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble
(No power supply to the fan motor)
Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Trouble content
Power source cooling fan trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
L4-35
No change in the shifter home position sensor signal

is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing.
PCU
Shift motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter
home position sensor.
Replace the shift motor.
Replace the shifter home position sensor.
LSU cooling fan trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
L4-32
The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of

the main motor.
PCU
PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the main motor
lock.
Replace the main motor.
Ozone fan trouble
Shift motor trouble
Trouble content
L4-34
L4-40
PCU
Toner motor abnormality
Improper connection or disconnection of the toner
motor and the harness.
PCU PWB abnormality
Use SIM 10-1 to check the toner motor operations.
Check connection of the toner motor harness/
connector.
Replace the toner motor.
Replace the
PCU PWB.
Full wave signal width abnormality
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
The full wave signal frequency is judged as abnormal.

(The detected frequency is over 65Hz or below
45Hz.)
PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Harness trouble.
L8-20
Power controller communication

trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
P1-00
PCI communication error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
P1-01
Communication establishment error / Framing /

Parity / Protocol error
MFP
PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connector connection
trouble.
Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB of the MFPC
PWB.
Check connector connection between the PCU PWB
and the MFPC PWB.
Check the ground of the main unit.
MFP
Communication error between the MFPC PWB and
the PCI.
Connection failure of connectors and harness
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI.
MFPC PWB trouble.
PCI control PWB trouble.
Check connection of the harness and connectors
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
(Refer to the necessary procedures after replacement
of the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the procedures.)
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
PC--
Personal counter not detected
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U1-01
Battery trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
Remedy
U2-00
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
U2-05
MFP
The PCI fan operation signal is not detected.
PCI fan trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and harness
between the PCI fan and the PCI control PWB.
necessary.
Check the PCI fan, and replace if necessary.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Plasma generating device error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
Connection failure of connectors and harness
between the plasma generating device and the PCI
control PWB.
Plasma generating device trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and harness
between the plasma generating device and the PCI
control PWB.
Replace the plasma generating device.
necessary.
U2-10
MFP
MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Strong external noises.
Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)
Check the power environment.
SD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents

inconsistency
Check & Remedy
P1-02
RTC backup battery voltage fall

MFP
1) Battery life
2) Battery circuit abnormality
Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
2.5V or above.
Replace the battery.
PCI fan error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
MFP
The personal counter is not installed.
The personal counter is not detected.
SCU PWB trouble.
The SD card or the MFPC PWB installed is improper.

(Erroneous detection of account management data)
MFP
The SD card was replaced.
The MFPC PWB was replaced.
SD card trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the SD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Manual, and perform the works.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication

index check sum error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
SRAM user index information (user authentication
basic data) check sum error.
MFPC PWB SRAM trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
(Index information data in the HDD are transferred to
the SRAM.)
perform the works.)
U2-11
MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check

sum error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-22
MFPC PWB SRAM memory check sum

error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-23
MFP
MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing
data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the
EEPROM.)
perform the works.)
MFP PWB SRAM trouble

MFP
MFP PWB SRAM trouble
Strong external noises
Access circuit trouble
The data of the communication management table in
the SRAM is initialized when an error occurs, register
the deleted data again
Use SIM16 to cancel the error
Replace the MFPC PWB
U2-24
MFPC PWB SRAM memory user

authentication counter check sum
error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-30
MFPC PWB and PCU PWB

manufacturing No. data inconsistency
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFPC PWB SRAM memory user

authentication counter check sum
error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy

(MFP)
MFP
SRAM trouble
Runaway of the control circuit due to the noise
MFPC PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Initialize automatically the data relating to the
content that check sum error occurs by the
power-OFF/ON.
The saved "Scan" and "Fax" data may be
deleted by auto initialization.
To check if there're any deletion of those data
above, by "Job Log".
If there're any deletions, ask customer to do
deleted job again.
Clear the U2 trouble by SIM16.
U2-40
Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved

in the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB.
MFP
When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB,
the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
on the new PWB.
perform the works.)
SD card system storage data area

error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-41
MFP
MFPC PWB SRAM trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The check sum error
detection data are calculated again to reset the
proper check sum data.)
perform the works.)
MFP
A file error occurs in the SD card system storage data
partition.
SD card trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the
HDD are written into the SD card and the machine is
automatically booted.
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
HDD system storage data area error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
area, disabling backup of the saved file of the
machine adjustment values in the SD card.
HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer
to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures
of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement."
U2-42
Machine adjustment data

storage data area) error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-50
(system
MFP
The saved file of the machine adjustment values in
the SD card and the HDD cannot be found or is
broken.
Both of the SD card set data and the HDD system
saved data area are broken.
HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
SD card trouble
Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
When replacing the HDD, the MFPC PWB, and the
SD card, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works
and procedures of HDD, MFPC PWB, and SD card
replacement."
Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the
adjustment values.
HDD*1 user authentication data check

sum error (SD card when no HDD is
installed)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
HDD trouble*1
MFPC PWB trouble
Check the data related to the check sum error
(address book, image send system registration data
(senders record, meta data)) and register again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Replace the HDD*1.
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Manual, and perform the works.)*1
U2-80
SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-81
SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-90
SCU
SCU PWB EEPROM trouble
SCU PWB trouble
SCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble
Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket.
Check the SIM adjustment value of the following
items, and adjust again if they are improper.
* Scanner-related adjustments
* Touch panel-related adjustments
To avoid missing of the counter data and the
adjustment values, use this simulation to save the
counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a
printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data
and the adjustment values.)
SCU
SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
SCU PWB trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
error detection data are calculated again to reset the
PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
*1: SD card when no HDD is installed.
U2-60
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
Watermark data trouble
HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Manual, and perform the works.)
Check & Remedy
PCU
PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and
adjust again if they are improper.
U2-91
PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U7-50
MFPC PWB - Vendor machine

communication error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U7-51
PCU
PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
error detection data are calculated again to reset the
Communication error between the MFP and the serial

vendor.
MFP
Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
(SIM26-3).
Vendor machine trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Change the specifications of the vendor machine
(SIM26-3).
Vendor machine error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)

Serial vendor machine trouble.
Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail code.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
UC-02 CPT - ASIC error

Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
SCU
SCU PWB trouble. (CPT-ASIC trouble.)
UC-20 DOCC ASIC error

Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
SCU
SCU PWB trouble. (DOCC-ASIC trouble.)
(1) Descriptions on E7-91 - 94 errors

Two-digit numbers with double parentheses are added to E7-91 - 94 error codes recorded in SIM22-6 indicate the detailed contents of the
errors.
The number in each digit has its own meaning.
(Example) E7-91(**)
The upper digit of the added code indicates the job kind at the occurrence of the error.
Error
code
E7-91
E7-92
E7-93
E7-94
The upper digit of

the added code
0*
1*
2*
3*
4*
5*
6*
7*
8*
9*
A* - F*
0*
1*
2*
3*
4*
5* - F*
0*
1*
2*
3*
4*
5*
6*
7*
8*
9*
A*
B*
C*
D*
E*
F*
0*
1*
2*
3*
4*
5* - F*
Image
type
Other
JPEG
JBIG
Mxx1ch
Mxx4ch
Other
JPEG
JBIG
Mxx1ch
Mxx4ch
Not Used
Other
JPEG
JBIG
Mxx1ch
Mxx4ch
Not Used
Other
JPEG
JBIG
Mxx1ch
Mxx4ch
Other
JPEG
JBIG
Mxx1ch
Mxx4ch
Other
JPEG
JBIG
Mxx1ch
Mxx4ch
Not Used
Other
JPEG
JBIG
Mxx1ch
Mxx4ch
Not Used
Job kind at the occurrence

of the error
* FAX (Internet FAX)
reception print (Other than
long size images)
* FAX (Internet FAX)

reception print
(Long size images)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
* OC copy (in Non ERDH)
*1
*1
*1
*1
* Copy print (in ERDH)

* Copy composing system
function (Custom Stamp,
Water mark)
*1
* Image send
* Document filing
* Preview display
*1
* GDI/PCL printer print
* Copy composing system
function (Custom Stamp,
Water mark)
*1
*1
*1
* Backup restore
(Filing data import)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1: Added code without generating

The lower digit of the added code indicates the kind and the content of the abnormality or the result of the automatic memory check executed
when the abnormality is detected.
*1
Memory
verify
NG
The upper digit of the
added code
i
Error detection circuit
1*, 6*, B*
2*, 7*, C*
3*, 8*, D*
4*, 9*, E*
JPEG
JBIG
Mxx1ch
Mxx4ch
*9
-
Lower digit of the added code Kind/Content of the error

*A
*B
*C
*D
*E
Head decoding
Improper Head decoding
Restart
Huffman
error detection
marker
error detection
marker
code
(ASIC detection) (CPU detection)
error
error
error
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
: Added code indicating that the memory and its peripheral must be focused for check in case of an error.
O : Added code indicating that doubtful sections are in a wider range such as the memory, PWB's, HDD, etc.
- : Added code without generating
*F
Other
abnormal
termination
O
O
O
O
(2) Countermeasures in case of E7-91 - 94

In case of E7-9x (11), E7-9x (21), E7-9x (31), E7-9x (41)
Cause
Check and remedy
In case of E7-91 - 94, the DIMM memory (DRAM) is automatically read/written to perform a simplified check. If an abnormality is detected
in that case, the added code becomes (*1).
Therefore, there is a strong possibility that an abnormality lies around the memory.
* Check the installing state of the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the
DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure that there is no error occurring again.)
* Use SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to check to insure that no error occurs.
* Replace the DIMM memory.
* Replace the MFPC PWB.
NOTE: Since the automatic memory check executed when E7-91 - 94 occurs is a simplified check, it cannot detect an abnormality with absolute certainty.
If the added code is (*1), there may be a memory abnormality. Even if it is not (*1), however, it cannot be said that there is no abnormality around the memory.
Other added codes
Cause
Check and remedy
Mostly because the data inputted to the ASIC for decoding are broken for some reason.
There is an abnormality in the process of read/write of the process data in the memory or the hard disk.
A great noise unexpectedly generated may be the cause.
For the cases of FAX or Internet FAX reception data, when broken data are saved, printing is performed every time when the machine is
booted, generating an error repeatedly. (E7-91)
(To clear the received data, execute SIM66-10.)
* Check the DIMM memory, the MFPC PWB, and the HDD to insure that there is no abnormality.
* When the job at occurrence of an error is FAX (E7-91), check the installing state of the FAX control PWB and the SC CARD PWB.
* Perform SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to insure that there is no NG.
* Perform SIM62-02 and SIM62-03 (HDD read/write check) to insure that there is no NG. (It is not required, however, when the job at
occurrence of an error is FAX.)
* Check the installing state of the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the
DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure that there is no error occurring again.)
* Replace the HDD.
* Replace the FAX control PWB.
* Replace the DIMM memory.
* Replace the MFPC PWB.
* Replace the SD card.
NOTE: When there is an abnormality around the HDD, E7-03 may occur.
If error E7-91 - 94 as well as E7-03 occurs, there is a high possibility that the error can be removed by replacing the HDD and the
MFPC PWB.
(3) Countermeasures against the case where nothing is displayed when the machine is booted
[Trouble content]
If nothing is displayed when the machine is booted, the error code cannot be checked and the cause is hard to identify.
One of the causes may be an abnormality in the boot program of the SD card. To check that, the following method is used.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the LED (red) upper the CPU heat sink on the MFPC PWB shown in the figure below is lighted when the power is supplied.
If the LED is lighted, it is judged as an abnormality of the SD card.
Red LED
Heat sink (CPU)
SD Card
[Countermeasures]
1)
Replace the SD card with a new one. (Be sure to use a service part.)
2)
Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
3)
Use SIIM66-62 to backup the FAX reception data from the HDD to a USB memory device. (If there is no FAX reception data, this procedure is not required.) (The FAX reception data are backed up in the PDF format. Supply the date to the user.)
4)
Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX and image send memory. (Ensure consistency between the HDD data and the image related memory.)
(4) Relation between the MFPC PWB LED status and errors
When the machine cannot be booted, check the LED status of the MFPC PWB to presume the error content and its cause.
<Process content and LED display>
LED status (Lighting)
OOOO
OOO
OO O
OO
O OO
O O
O
O
O
OOO
O
O O
O
O
O
O
Process operation content

CPU initial setting
Memory adjustment
Memory check
Program memory development
Interruption-related initialization
PCIe initialization
Basic device initialization
SD card initialization
SATA initialization
OS initialization (1)
Timer enabling
Serial driver enabling
I2C driver enabling
LCD initialization
Image process IP initialization
OS initialization (2)
Main process
Cause for halt during operation

Reus ASIC trouble
Memory and its peripheral circuit trouble
Memory and its peripheral circuit trouble
Memory-related trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
PCIe and its peripheral circuit trouble (SoC/ACRE, etc.)
Reus ASIC trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
SD card trouble
HDD trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
: LED ON / O: LED OFF
<When an error occurs>

LED status (Flashing)
OOO
OO O
OO
O OO
O
O
OOO
Error content
Nonsupport memory
Nonsupport memory (access speed)
Nonsupport memory controller
DDR-PHY setting error
Interruption handler process error
Memory check error
Memory combination error
Cause
Memory trouble
Memory trouble
Memory trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
Reus ASIC trouble
Memory trouble
Memory trouble
* In case of an error, the LED's flash as shown in the above table.

*
: LED ON / O: LED OFF
LED No.
D25/D24/D23/D22
3 / 2 / 1 / 0
2. JAM and troubleshooting

A. JAM code list
(1) Main unit
JAM code
TRAY1
(3)
PPD1_S1
JAM content
Cassette 1 paper feed JAM
(PPD1 not-reached JAM)
(C2PFD not-reached JAM)
C2PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper)
C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
Manual feed tray paper feed JAM
(PPD1 not-reached)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1_S2
PPD1_S3
PPD1_S4
PPD1_SA
POSD_N
POSD_S
POD1_N
POD1_S
POD2_N
POD2_S
POD3_N
POD3_S
DRUM
FUSER
PRI_JAM
FIN_ERR
MTR_ILG
SIZE_ILG
STOP_JAM
NO_MATCH

PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
POSD not-reached JAM
POSD remaining JAM
POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1 remaining JAM
POD2 remaining JAM
POD3 remaining JAM
Drum lock detection
Fuser winding detection
Image preparation wait timeout
Finisher communication abnormality detection
Motor driver trouble JAM
Size illegal JAM
Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
Parameter no matching
TRAY2
C2PFD_N3
C2PFD_N4
C2PFD_S2
C2PFD_S3
C2PFD_S4
TRAY3
C3PFD_N4
C3PFD_S3
C3PFD_S4
TRAY4
C4PFD_S4
MFT
PPD1_N2
PPD1_N3
PPD1_N4
PPD1_NA
PPD1_SM
RSPF
JAM code
SPPD1_N
SPPD1_S
SPPD2_N
SPPD2_S
SPPD3_N
SPPD3_S
SPPD4_N
SPPD4_S
SPPD5_N
SPPD5_S
SPSD_SCN
SPPD2_NR
SPPD2_SR
P_SHORT
SDFS_S
ICU_REQ
(2) Finisher
JAM code
FPPD1_N
FPPD1_S
FSTPD_S
FSTPL
FPRD_N
FPRD_S
JAM content
Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
Finisher staple JAM
Finisher compiler not-reached JAM
Finisher compiler remaining JAM
JAM content
SPPD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD1 remaining JAM
SPPD2 remaining JAM
SPPD3 remaining JAM
SPPD4 remaining JAM
SPPD5 remaining JAM
Exposure start notification timer end
SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
Short size JAM
Overlap feed detection jam/accompanied feed jam
ICU factor stop JAM
3. Image send communication report code

A. Outline and code system descriptions
B. Details
After completion of communication, the communication report

table, the communication management table, and the protocol are
described on the communication report column.
(1)
The communication report code is composed as follows:

Communication report: XX (XXXX)
The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
Communication report code of 00 - 99 (Refer to communication
report main code.)
The lower 4 digits of the communication report code:
Used by the serviceman.
The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to
communication report sub code 1.)
The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to
communication report sub code 2.)
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2
are in hexadecimal notation. (The others are in decimal
notation.)
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the
these models.
Communication report main code
Report
code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Final receive signal

(Send side)
Abnormal signal
NSF, DIS
CFR
FTT
MCF
PIP, PIN
RTN, RTP
No signal, DCN
PPR
RNR
CTR
ERR
Abnormal signal
NSF, DIS
CFR
FTT
MCF
PIP, PIN
RTN, RTP
No signal, DCN
PPR
RNR
CTR
ERR
V.8 Phase-1
V.8 Phase-2
V.8 Phase-3
Final receive signal (Receive side)

Abnormal signal
(SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
(PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
EOP
EOM
MPS
PRI-Q
DCN
PPS-EOP
PPS-EOM
PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
RR
CTC
EOR-Q
PPS-PRI-Q
Abnormal signal
SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
PPS-EOP
PPS-EOM
PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
PRI-Q
DCN
RR
CTC
EOR-Q
PPS-PRI-Q
V.8 Phase-1
V.8 Phase-2
V.8 Phase-3
CAUTION: For report codes 16 - 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICATION.
Report code
(Communication
result)
0 - 31
33
34
Display in the column of

result
Refer to previous table.
BUSY
CANCEL
35
36
37
38
NG35 XXXX
(No record paper)
(Record paper jam)
MEM. FULL
39
(Number of paper
unmatched)
(Relay not received)
LENGTH OVER
LENGTH OVER
(Communication) (OK)
ORIGINAL ERROR
(Picture quality error)
NO RESPONSE
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
TX DECODE ERROR
OK
OK REPLY RECEIVE
NO RX POLL
50
RX POLL FAIL
51
PASS # NG
52
(No confidential function in

remote party)
53
54
55
(Confidential not received)

(Confidential BOX NO NG)
(No relay function in
remote party)
56
NO REL RX
57
58
(Relay ID unmatched)
REJECTED
59
RX NO F-CODE POLL
60
NO F-CODE POLL
61
62
63
RX POLL # NG
F POLL PASS # NG
NO F FUNC
64
NO F-CODE
67
68
69
70
71
72
F PASS # NG
BOX NO. NG
MEMORY OVER
(JOB MEMORY OVER)
NG71 XXXX *1
(NG72 XXXX) *1
73
74
NG73 XXXX *1
NG74 XXXX *1
Content of communication interruption

Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>

Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
Speaking before data transmission
A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
Normal end of communication
OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
(Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
(Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.
In F code receiving : <Receive>
"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>
In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>
Memory over in quick online sending <Send>
In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>
In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>
In department management setting on the machine side:
* In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the
machine side is specified. <Send>
* In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>
In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>
When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
* The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match
with it. <Send>
* The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>
Report code
(Communication
result)
75
NG75 XXXX *1
76
NG76 XXXX *1
77
78
NG77 XXXX *1
NG78 XXXX *1
79
80
NG79 XXXX *1
NG80 XXXX *1
81
NG REPORT
82
NO REPORT
83
84
85
NG LIMIT
REJECTED
NG85 XXXX *1
86
RECEIVED
87
NG87 XXXX *1
88
NG88 XXXX *1
89
NG89 XXXX *1
90
91
NG90 XXXX *1
NG91 XXXX *1 *2
92
NG92 XXXX *1 *2
93
NG93 XXXX *1
94
NG94 XXXX *1
95
96
98
99
NG95 XXXX *1
NG96 XXXX *1
NG98 XXXX *1
NG99 XXXX *1
Display in the column of

result

* Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)
* When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered
on the machine side. <Send>
In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.
The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PCInternet FAX.
An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.
NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
* Check for disconnection of cables.
* A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.
* The port is set to DISABLE.
* Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
* When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error
response of 5XX)
In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet
FAX).
* Error of the disposition-modifier.
* The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed.
In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including
PC-Internet FAX).
* In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.
* Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet FAX
destination is not received.
In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.
In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
* Header acquisition error.
* Time-out during mail receive
In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
* The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
* There is no attached file.
In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
* Memory over
In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
* Cannot be stored in memory.
* The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
* Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
After reservation by re-operation of document filing, conversion for image send cannot be made.
Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
* The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
* An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is
executed.
When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
* An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
* Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.
*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG
For a communication result, "Communication error
XXXX" is displayed. "
" is the code number.
(XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
* When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
* Errors in ( ) are not used.
(2) Communication report sub code 1

The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2

Report code 2
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
60
61
62
63
64
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87

When the conditions after 01 do not apply.
Send length over
EOL time up
Carrier detection time up
Time up of the communication start command from the machine side
Time up in phase C (8 min)
Memory image decode error
Memory image decode error
Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.)
Not used
Not used
Polarity reversion detection
Invalid command reception
Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time)
PUT error
In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control.
In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary.
Command receive time-up from MFP controller
Not used
Not used
Polarity reversion detection
Invalid command reception
Fallback retry number over
Command retry number resend over
Time up (T5 timer)
Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode
In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control.
In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary.
When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time.
(V.34, other than V.34)
Not used
A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.)
DC current not detected (busy)
Dial tone not detected (busy)
Busy tone detection (busy)
T0 time up (Remote machine not responding)
T1 time up (Remote machine not responding)
In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding)
Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)>
Not used
In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding.
In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be
Enlarged.)
In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated.
In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend.
In resending data of document file, during conversion for resending, the number of IMS management pages exceeds the
upper limit (999). (IT occurs in OSA Scan to FTP also, resulting in memory over.)
E-mail header acquisition error
Time out occurs during e-mail receive.
Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive.
Network communication cannot be made due to port disable.
An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL.
There is no image in network communication (transfer).
There is no attached file in received e-mail.
The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported.
The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized.
ID error
Endian error
Version error
Tag data error
Tag parameter error
Header size error
Send/Receive
Send/Receive
Send
Receive
Receive
Receive
Send
Receive
Send
Send/Receive
Receive
Receive
Receive
Receive
Receive
Receive
Receive
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Send
Resend
Resend
Resend
Resend
Resend
OSAScanToFTP
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
Network send
Network send
Network send
Network send
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
Report code 2
88
90
91
92

Data error
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
Cannot be stored in memory.
Send/Receive
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
E-mail receive
When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."
4. Dial tone
When shipping from the factory, the dial tone detection when sending is set to Enable (changed from OFF to ON). When installing this
machine, be sure to check and confirm that the dial tone is properly detected and the auto dial sending is enabled.
Check to confirm that the continuous buzzer sound is heard when the on-hook key is pressed. (Press the on-hook key again to cancel the
buzzer sound.)
If facsimile communication cannot be executed normally through the IP telephone line, try the general telephone line.
Service Manual
MX-M316N
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE

1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases:
There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1)
When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.
1)
Update method using SIM 49-1
2)
When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the

machine.
2)
Update method using FTP
3)
Update method using the Web page
3)
When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for
repair to the machine.
4)
Update method using the CN update function (There are three

methods.)
4)
When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be

repaired.
Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.

When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
B. Notes for update

(1) Relationship between each ROM and update
Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROMs

installed in the other PWBs including options. Some combinations
of each ROMs versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.

Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Adapter
Firmware.sfu
USB Host
Firmware.sfu
Firmware.sfu
+
USB memory
Firmware.sfu
The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
* Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
* The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
* The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
MX-M316N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 1
5)
Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01

1)
Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware

into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation
panel.)
2)
Enter the SIM49-01.
Press [EXECUTE] key. ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]

becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected
firemware.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to

the update screen.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5
),/(
),/(
',5!)2/'(5
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
* The number of key changes according to the number of the

sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted.
6 (
5(0$,16)25 0,187(6
&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to

the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK]
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen
appears.
3)
Current version number and the version number to be updated

will be shown for each firmware respectively.
&/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the

screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
displayed.
6)
If the update is normal completion, following screen is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
&203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
4)
Press [ALL] key.
2.
All the firmware programs are selected.
Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)

Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded successfully.
7)
If the update is not normal completion, following screen is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
(55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
,&803&806&8%
* Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.

* In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine
side are ignored.
To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with
the firmware display key.
* If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
and cannot be pressed.
2.
B. Firmware update using FTP

FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1
Machine 3
10.36.112.83
10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2
Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52
10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page
4)
An Web browser (service technicians Web page) is used to update

the firmware.
1)
Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A

special firmware upgrade page appears.
2)
Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update completed. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
MX-XXXX
"Close the browser and open again to display latest information." will be displayed.
5)
3)
Check the firmware version of machine again.
After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firmware to the machine. Update processing begins. While processing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.
D. Firmware update using the CN update function

(There are three methods.)
(1) Outline
The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called
the CN update.
c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode

To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on
the MFP PWB and boot the machine.
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to
OFF (normal mode).
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode.
1)
Firmware update function

This function is used to update the firmware by transferring
data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the
SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options
by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the following points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update, this method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD
card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program.
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality
in the boot program.
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in the main program.
2)
Firmware version check function
d. Keys used in the CN update mode

The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
normal mode.
[UP]
[BACK]
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5

is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this
manual.)
3)
ROM making function

(This function is not used in the market, and not described in
this manual.)
b. Purpose
This function is used in the following cases:
1)
[DOWN]
When an error occurs during firmware update operation other

than the CN update.
When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware
update operation of other method than the CN update, this
method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD
card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program.
[MENU]
Key name
[OK] key
[MENU] key
[BACK] key
[UP] key
[DOWN] key
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be

used. In such a case, the SD card must be replaced with a new
one having the normal boot program.
[OK]
Functions in the CN update mode

Executes the selected function or item.
Selects a menu.
Selects a menu.
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
Selects an item.
Selects an item.
(2) Operating procedures
7)
Press [OK] key.

The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and
the file selection menu is displayed.
a. Firmware update function

This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB memory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX
PWB, and each option.
Firm Update
> F 0100P000.sfu
It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.

1)
The update target ROM is automatically selected.
2)
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a

section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update.
Display of file selection

8)
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this

method cannot be used. On that case, the SD card must be
replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.
When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
the main program (SD card).
a-1. Necessary items
1)
Insert the SD card to the MFP PWB of the machine.
2)
USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
Select the firmware file (SFU).

Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
[DOWN] key.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
menu returns to the original upper directory.
9)
Press [OK] key.

The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
minute.
NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level

lower directory.
Firm Update
Reading Data
a-2. Procedures
1)
Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP
PWB cover.
Display of file reading
2)
Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Tilt it to the

PWB side.)
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is

continued.
3)
Install the USB memory into the USB port.

USB memory installing position
Firm Update
Writing Data
IcuM
Display of the firmware update process

* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under
update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
display.
* During the update process, the display may flash instantaneously. It is a normal operation.
USB port
4)
Turn ON the power.
5)
Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes

more than ten seconds to display the menu.)
Update Program Init

Please wait
11) Check the update result.

Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
firmware programs.
Firm Update
Result : OK
IcuM
Firm Update
IcuM
Result : Not Update
Firm Update
Result : NG
IcuM
Display of the firmware update result

OK: Update is completed successfully.
NG: Update is failed.
Version Check
Conf : 00050000
Not Update: Update is not executed.

12) Turn OFF the power.
Display when booting is completed

6)
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
boots up normally.
Select the firmware update mode.

Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.

Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
copier basic menu.
Firm Update
From USB Memory
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.

16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.
Display of the firmware update mode
: 15/Aug.
Service Manual
MX-M316N
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance list
: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
When
calling
Process
section
Developing
section
Toner
cartridge
Transfer
unit
Scanner
section
LSU
section
Paper feed
section/
Transport
section
Fusing
section
Drive
section
Drum
: Lubricate
100
k
150
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
450
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
750
k
800
k
Cleaner blade
Side Seal F/R
MC unit
Separation pawl unit
Star ring
Process frame unit
Developer
Toner filter
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner sensor
BK
Transfer bearing
Transfer Gear
Anti-static pin
Mirror/Lens/CCD
Table glass/SPF glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/drive wire
Sensors
OC
Dust-proof glass
Paper feed roller

Pickup roller
Separation roller
Transport rollers
Transport paper guides
Torque limiter
Gears
Sensors
Upper heat roller
Pressure roller
Fusing separation pawl

(Upper)
Staring washer
Upper cleaning pad
Fusing separation pawl
(Lower)
Thermistor
Fusing gear
Pressure roller bearing
Paper guide
Delivery guide collar
Gears
Ozone filter
Exhaust ozone filter
Remark
Stearic acid powder
(UKOG-0312FCZZ)
Replace as Process frame unit
every 300K.
Usable for three PM cycles
Check the sensor head surface.
User replacement for every toner empty.
Belts
Filter
: Replace
: Cleaning
MX-M316N MAINTENANCE 9 1
Packed with the drum.

Air-blow the light guide bar.
Replace it every 100K or 1 year

of use.
Apply grease to specific position.

(Refer to grease map.)
Apply grease to specific position.

(Refer to grease map.)
Replace if necessary.
Refer to cleaning point.
Part replacement reference:
100K or 1 year of use.
grease.(Refer to grease map.)
Part replacement reference:
100K or 1 year of use.
Or, replace it every 6 month use.
Or, replace it every 6 month use.
Destination: North America and
Mexico only
Exit Paper
feed
section
Paper feed
section/
Transport
section
(RSPF)
When
calling
100
k
150
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
450
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
750
k
800
k
Torque limiter
Discharge brush
Transport rollers
Sensors
Scanning plate
Gears
Belts
OC mat
Transport rollers
Gears
Discharge brush
Transport paper guides
Sensors
Paper feed roller
Pickup roller
Separation roller
Remark
Replacement reference:
Replace according to the SPF
paper feed counter value.
SPF section roller:
100K or 1 year of use
When replacing the paper feed
roller, apply grease to the paper
feed shaft.
(UKOG-0013QSZZ)
Replacement reference:
Replace according to the SPF
paper feed counter value.
SPF section torque limiter:
400K or 2 years of use
Grease mapFusing section
Grease
UKOG-0255FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ
conntact point of plates.
conntact point of plates.
: 15/Aug.
Grease mapDrive section
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0013QSZZ
Grease
UKOG-0013QSZZ
Do not apply grease
on the fusing drive giar.
Grease
UKOG-0158FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0299FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ
Do not apply grease

on the tooth surface
show in the figure.
Cleaning pointFusing section
1
Clean the
Delivery guide collar
surface.
2. Other related items

A. Counter clear
Item
SIM
SIM 21-1
SIM 24-1
SIM 24-2
SIM 24-3
SIM 24-4
SIM 24-6
SIM 24-9
SIM 24-10
SIM 24-15
Maintenance cycle setting

Jam/trouble counter clear
Paper feed counter clear
Scan/Stapler/Stamp counter clear
Maintenance counter clear
Copy counter clear
Printer/other counter clear
FAX counter clear
Scanner mode counter clear
Remarks
*: When maintenance message is displayed, replace consumption part reaching the number of sheets of maintenance, then clear the replaced
part's counter only.
3. Display of maintenance execution timing

The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relations between the messages
and the counters are shown below.
A. Maintenance counter
Display condition
Display content
Maintenance required. Code: TA

Maintenance required. Code: TA
SIM26-38-A
set value
0 (Print continue)
Counter name
1 (Print stop)
0 (Print continue)
1 (Print stop)
Counter value
Print JOB Enable/

Disable
When 90% of the SIM21-1 set

value is reached.
Enable
Enable
Disable
When the SIM21-1 set value is

reached.
* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total).
B. Transfer unit
Display content
Maintenance required.: TK
Display condition
Counter name
Transfer unit print counter
Counter value
Print JOB Enable/

Disable
150K
Enable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter
and the use day counter.
C. Fusing unit
Display content
Maintenance required.: FK1
Maintenance required.: FK2
Display condition
Counter name
Fusing heat roller print counter
Pressure roller print counter
Counter value
Print JOB Enable/

Disable
150K
300K
Enable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing heat roller print counter, the accumulated rotation number counter
and the use day counter.
D. OPC drum
Display content
Maintenance required.: DK
Maintenance required.: DK
Display condition
Counter name
OPC drum print counter
OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter
Counter value
Print JOB Enable/

Disable
100K
550K rotations
Enable
* Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the drum print counter or the drum rotations accumulated number counter.
E. Developer
Display content
Maintenance required.: VK
Maintenance required.: VK
Display condition
Counter name
Developer print counter
Developer accumulated rotation number counter
Counter value
Print JOB
Enable/Disable
100K
550K rotations
* Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the developer print counter or the developer accumulated rotation number counter.
The developer rotation number is synchronized with the drum motor rotation number.
Enable
F. Toner
Status
Message
Close to Near End

(Near Near End)
Toner low.
(Do not replace cartridge until requested.)
Near End
Ready to scan for copy.

(Change the toner cartridge.)
Toner End
Print JOB
Enable/Disable
Display content
Change the toner cartridge.
Sim.26-69A
0
Display
(Default)
Enable
1
Not display
Sim.26-69C
0
Display
(Default)
-
Enable
1
Not display
-
Disable
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND

ASSEMBLY
1. Disassembly and Assembly table
Unit
A. Side door section/Duplex transport
section
B. Scanner section
C. Fusing section
D. Paper exit section
E. PWB section
F. Optical frame unit section

G. LSU section
H. Tray paper feed section/Paper
transport section
I. Tray paper feed section/Paper

transport section
J. Bypass tray section
K. Power section
L. Developing section
M. Process section
N. Others
Parts
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Contents
Transfer unit
Transfer roller
Transfer discharge plate
Duplex transport part
Table glass, SPF glass
Scanner unit
Drive belt, Drive wire
Rails
Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp
Lens, CCD
LED PWB, LED driver PWB
Fusing unit
Thermostat
Thermistor
Fusing PG
Lower separation pawl
Heater lamp
Cleaning felt
Heat roller
Pressure roller
Ozone filter
Cooling fan
First paper exit unit
Second paper exit unit
MFP PWB
PCU PWB
Operation panel PWB
Optical frame unit
LSU unit
Main drive unit
Paper feed clutch
Separation roller
PIN sensor
PS roller
Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation roller
Tray paper feed drive unit
Tray transport clutch/Tray paper feed clutch
Tray transport roller
Bypass tray unit
Bypass tray paper feed roller
Bypass tray separation roller
Bypass tray paper feed clutch
High voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Power switch
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
DV blade
Toner sensor
Drum unit
Main charger holder unit
Cleaning blade
Main motor
Tray open/close sensor
Paper empty sensor
Paper exit fan
DV cooling duct
Lift up motor
MX-M316N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 1
: 15/Aug.
2. Disassembly and assembly of each

unit
F side(35cpm)
A. Side door section/Duplex transport section

(1)
No.
1
2
3
4
Content
Transfer roller
(2)
(1)
(1) Transfer roller unit
R side
Open the bypass tray and remove the side door.

(3)
* When the transfer roller unit is fixed to the right door unit, check
that the high pressure spring of the transfer roller unit fits with the
right door unit.
(3)
(1)
Remove the transfer discharge plate holder from the pawl.

(2)
Remove the transfer roller unit.

(2)
(3)
Remove the transfer discharge plate holder and the transfer discharge plate.
(3)
(1)
(2) Transfer roller

Open the pawls. Remove the transfer roller unit. Then, remove the
E-ring, the TC roller collar, the transfer roller gear, the transfer roller
bearing R and the pin from the transfer roller.
F side(26/31cpm )
(1)
(2)
(1)
(4) Duplex transport part
B. Scanner section
Remove the rail inner unit.

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(1)
Name
Scanner unit
Rails
Lens, CCD
1)
Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the
table glass, and the SPF glass.
2)
Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.
Remove the side door reinforcing plate.
(2)
1)
Remove the side door auxiliary roller.
Scanner unit
Remove the RSPF unit/ OC cover if they are fixed to the
machine.
2)
Remove the operation panel unit.
3)
Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
4)
Remove the right cover, the left cover and the rear cabinet.
5)
Remove the scanner unit.
(3) Drive belt, Drive wire
(5)
1)
Remove the table glass.
1)
2)
Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound without clearance.
2)
Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.
3)
Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 1 mirror.
OK
NG
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the

figure below and fix it.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror
unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as
shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then
wind two turns furthermore around the pulley.
(6)
Lens, CCD
1)
2)
Remove the dark box, and the cover.
3)
Clean the lens, and the CCD.
(4) Rails
1)
2)
Grease each rail.
Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive

wires.
If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.
C. Fusing section
(7) LED PWB, LED driver PWB

1)
2)
Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base
plate.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(1)
3)
Contents
Fusing unit
Thermostat
Thermistor
Fusing PG
Heater lamp
Cleaning felt
Heat roller
Pressure roller
Fusing unit
1)
Remove the right sub cabinet.
1)
Remove the connectors of the fusing unit.
1)
Pull the right side part of the fusing unit shown in the figure
Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from the

LED driver PWB.
4)
Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect the
connector from the LED PWB.
5)
Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from
the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.

1)
Take out the fusing unit from the left side.
(4)
Fusing PG
1)
Remove the fusing PG.
1)
When the fusing PG is fixed, check the position of the fusing

PG by seeing the scale on the fusing unit.
(2) Thermostat
1)
Remove the thermostat cover.
1)
Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp and remove the

thermostat.
(5)
1)

Remove the spring and remove the lower separation pawl.
(3) Thermistor
1)
Remove the thermistor.
(6) Heater lamp
(7)
1)
Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp.
1)
Remove the fusing cleaning plate unit.
1)
Remove the screws fixing the upper fusing PG.
1)
Remove the cleaning felt.
1)
Remove the Front/Rear lamp fixing plates.
(8)
1)
1)
Cleaning felt

Remove the upper separation pawl.
Remove the heat lamp.
(9) Heat roller

1)
Remove the heat roller by removing the parts in order as

shown in the figure.
No.
1
2
3
4
(1)
Contents
Ozone filter
Cooling fan
Ozone filter
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the ozone filter.
(10) Pressure roller

1)
Remove the High voltage holder.
(2)
1)
2)
Cooling fan
Remove the harnesses from the power unit.
Remove the pressure roller.
2)
(3)
Remove the HV PWB.
1)

Remove the paper holding arm.
3)
4)
Disconnect the harness and remove the cooling fan with the
fan duct.
2)
Remove the paper full actuator.
3)
Remove the paper exit tray right cabinet.
4)
Remove the screw for adjusting the tension.
Remove the cooling fan from the fan duct.
5)
Remove the upper paper exit cover.
9)
10) Remove the right cover bottom and the right cover door.
6)
11) Remove the right front rear stay.

7)
Remove the harness of the First paper exit unit.
8)
Open the manual paper feed tray, and, remove the right door.
12) Remove the screws, and remove the first paper exit unit.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
13) Remove the paper exit drive unit.
1)
Remove the job separator.
2)
3)
Remove the harness of the second paper exit unit.
4)
Remove the right cover bottom and the right cover door.
14) Remove the belt, the shift gear pulley, the SP pin and the bearing.
15) Remove the delivery roller holder and the shifter PG unit.
16) Remove the shifter frame unit R, and remove the shifter bottom frame unit.
5)
Remove the screws, and remove the second paper exit unit.
E. PWB section
No.
1
2
3
(1)
Contents
MFP PWB
PCU PWB
Operation panel PWB
MFP PWB
1)
Remove the clamps, and remove the FFC.
6)
Remove the screws, and remove the sub roller unit.
7)
Remove the E ring, the SP pin, and gears
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the MFPC cover.
8)
Remove the screws, and remove the upper paper exit PG.
3)
Remove all harnesses and screws of the MFP PWB.

Then, remove the MFP PWB.
(2) PCU PWB

1)
4)
Remove the screws, and remove the Key PWB.
5)
Remove the FFC, the harnesses and the screws. Then,

remove the LVDS PWB.
Remove all harnesses and screws of the PCU PWB.

Then, remove the PCU PWB.
(3) Operation panel PWB

1)
Remove the screws fixing the operation panel unit.

No.
1
2)
3)
(1)
Remove the DFFC and the harness.
Contents
Optical frame unit
Optical frame unit
1)
Remove the right cover and the left cover.
2)
Remove the screws at the left side of the optical frame.
3)
Remove the screws at the right side of the optical frame.
Remove the earth and the harness , and remove the USB I/F
PWB.
4)
Remove the FCCs and the harness from the optical unit to the
SCNcnt PWB. Then, remove the optical frame unit.
G. LSU section
No.
1
4)
Remove the paper exit tray.
5)
Disconnect the harness of the LSU unit and the clamps.
6)
Remove the screws fixing the LSU unit. Then, remove the LSU
unit.
Contents
LSU unit
(1) LSU unit

1)
Open the front cover.
2)
Remove the screws fixing the paper exit tray.
3)
Open the tray and remove the left cover.
: 15/Aug.
H. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport

section
No.
1
2
3
4
Contents
Main drive unit
Paper feed clutch
PS roller
PIN sensor
(1) Main drive unit

1)
2)
Remove the flywheel.

6)
Remove the temperature humidity sensor.
7)
Remove the harness from the cable saddles.
Remove the power unit and the duplex motor.
3)
Remove the drum earth plate and the E-ring. Then, remove
the PS clutch.
8)
Remove the connectors.
4)
Remove the lift up motor.
9)
Remove the DUP motor.
5)
Remove the second drive unit.

: 15/Aug.
10) Remove the main drive unit.
3)
Open the front door and remove the PS knob.
4)
Remove the left E-ring.
5)
Remove the PS roller
(2) Paper feed clutch

1)
Remove the paper feed clutch from the main drive unit.
(3) PS roller
1)
the PS clutch.
(4)
2)
PIN sensor
1)
Remove the connector. And remove the harness.
2)
Remove the PS unit.
Open the right door and remove the PS right bottom guide PG.
3)
Remove the PIN sensor detection lever. Remove the connector, then, remove the PIN sensor.
I. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport

section
No.
1
2
3
4
(1)
Contents
Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation
roller
Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray

separation roller
1)
Open the tray.
2)
Remove the tray pick up roller, the tray paper feed roller and
the tray separation roller.
3)
Remove the tray separation roller is fixed, the dent part of the
clutch has to be fit with the tray separation roller.
(2) Tray paper feed drive unit

1)
2)
Remove the harness of the tray paper feed drive unit, and
remove the tray paper feed drive unit.
Remove the tray transportation roller by removing the gears as

(3) Tray transport clutch/Tray paper feed clutch

1)
Remove harnesses of the clutch and the E-rings. Then,

remove the tray transport clutch and the tray paper feed clutch
with caring the locking positions of the clutches.

No.
1
2
3
4
(1)
1)
Contents
Bypass tray unit
Bypass tray unit

Remove the bypass tray unit.
(4) Tray transport roller

1)
Remove the tray transport clutch, the tray paper feed clutch
and the gears.
(2)
1)

Remove the service cover.
2)
Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper
feed roller.
4)
Remove the separation roller cover.
5)
Remove the separation roller unit.
(3) Bypass tray separation roller

1)
Remove the tray arms.
6)
2)
Remove the bypass tray.
(4)
1)
3)
Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed roller.

Remove the E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper feed
clutch.
Remove the bypass frame unit.
K. Power section
No.
1
2
3
2)
Remove the power switch.
(1)
Contents
High voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Power switch
(2)
(1) High voltage PWB

1)
(1)
Remove all harnesses to the power unit, and remove the

power unit.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
(1)
(2) PCU PWB
1)
Remove all harnesses to the PCU PWB, and remove the PCU
PWB.
Contents
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV blade
Toner sensor
Developer
Remove the harness of developer cartridge from the developer

cover.
Remove the developer cover from the developer cartridge.
(3) Power switch

1)
Remove the harnesses to the power switch with pressing the

harnesses inside.
: 15/Aug.
Turn the MG roller to discharge developer.
DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment reference
0
Molt
edge
reference
0.3
0.3
0.5
Projection edge
reference
(4)
Molt
edge
reference
0.5
Projection edge
reference
DV blade
DV blade attachment reference
[Cross-section]

Bump
reference

0.5
(2) Toner filter unit

With the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it.
When replacing, clean the guide AS.
0.5
Rib reference
(5)
Toner sensor
* Clean the sensor only after removing used DV when replacing

DV.
* Without removing the MG roller, clean the sensor surface with
waste cloth in the arrow direction to remove toner.
(3) DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
M. Process section
(2)
1)
No.

Remove the main charger holder unit.
Contents
1
2
3
4
Drum unit
Cleaning blade
(1) Drum unit

1)
Rotate and remove the drum fixing plate. Then, remove the
drum unit.
2)
After removing the OPC drum, apply stearic acid powder

(UKOG-0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the OPC drum.
3)
After attaching the OPC drum to the OPC drum frame, use the
black protect sheet or copy paper, and manually rotate the
OPC drum two turns in the forward direction to remove stearic
acid powder applied to the OPC drum surface.
(3)
1)
(4)
1)
Cleaning blade
Remove the cleaning blade.

Remove the separation pawl unit.
- Do not touch the OPC drum surface except for the both ends
(5mm) of the OPC drum.
- Any section of the OPC drum may be touched from above the
black protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly.
1 : 15/Aug.
N. Others
(3)
1)
No.
Paper empty sensor

Remove the Desk PE actuator.
Contents
1
2
3
4
5
6
Main motor
Paper empty sensor
Paper exit fan / Ozone filter (Only North America)
DV cooling duct
Lift up motor
(1) Main motor

1)
1)
2)
3)
2)
Remove the paper empty sensor from the Paper feed frame.
1)
2)
Remove the harness of the main motor, and remove the main
motor.
2)
(4)
Paper exit fan
1)
Remove the delivery tray right.
2)
Open the manual paper tray, and remove the right door.
(2) Tray open/close sensor

1)
Remove the sensor cover. Then, remove the harness of the

tray open/close sensor, and remove the tray open/close sensor.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
1
3)
: 15/Aug.
7)
Remove the ozone filter, and remove the paper exit fan.
(Only in the North America)
4)
5)
6)
(5)
DV cooling duct
1)
2)
3)
Remove the connector cover, and remove the connectors.
Remove the paper exit fan duct, and remove the paper exit
fan. (Forwarding place except the North America)
4)
5)
Remove the main front cabinet left.
7)
(6)
6)
Remove the screws of the DV cooling duct and remove the DV

cooling duct.
Lift up motor
1)
2)
Disconnect the harness of the lift up motor and screws of the

lift up motor. Then, remove the lift up motor.
Remove the connector of the harness and screws of the DV

cooling duct unit. Then, remove the DV cooling duct.
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND

ASSEMBLY
1. Disassembly and Assembly table
Unit
A. Side door section/Duplex transport
section
B. Scanner section
C. Fusing section
E. PWB section

G. LSU section
H. Tray paper feed section/Paper
transport section
I. Tray paper feed section/Paper

transport section
K. Power section
M. Process section
N. Others
Parts
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Contents
Transfer unit
Transfer roller
Scanner unit
Rails
Lens, CCD
Fusing unit
Thermostat
Thermistor
Fusing PG
Heater lamp
Cleaning felt
Heat roller
Pressure roller
Ozone filter
Cooling fan
MFP PWB
PCU PWB
Operation panel PWB
Optical frame unit
LSU unit
Main drive unit
Paper feed clutch
Separation roller
PIN sensor
PS roller
Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation roller
Bypass tray unit
High voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Power switch
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV blade
Toner sensor
Drum unit
Cleaning blade
Main motor
Paper empty sensor
Paper exit fan
DV cooling duct
Lift up motor
: 15/Aug.
2. Disassembly and assembly of each

unit
F side(35cpm)
A. Side door section/Duplex transport section

(1)
No.
1
2
3
4
Content
Transfer roller
(2)
(1)
(1) Transfer roller unit
R side
Open the bypass tray and remove the side door.

(3)
* When the transfer roller unit is fixed to the right door unit, check
that the high pressure spring of the transfer roller unit fits with the
right door unit.
(3)
(1)
Remove the transfer discharge plate holder from the pawl.

(2)
Remove the transfer roller unit.

(2)
(3)
Remove the transfer discharge plate holder and the transfer discharge plate.
(3)
(1)
(2) Transfer roller

Open the pawls. Remove the transfer roller unit. Then, remove the
E-ring, the TC roller collar, the transfer roller gear, the transfer roller
bearing R and the pin from the transfer roller.
F side(26/31cpm )
(1)
(2)
(1)
(4) Duplex transport part
B. Scanner section
Remove the rail inner unit.

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(1)
Name
Scanner unit
Rails
Lens, CCD
1)
Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the
table glass, and the SPF glass.
2)
Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.
Remove the side door reinforcing plate.
(2)
1)
Remove the side door auxiliary roller.
Scanner unit
Remove the RSPF unit/ OC cover if they are fixed to the
machine.
2)
Remove the operation panel unit.
3)
Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
4)
Remove the right cover, the left cover and the rear cabinet.
5)
Remove the scanner unit.
(3) Drive belt, Drive wire
(5)
1)
1)
2)
Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound without clearance.
2)
Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.
3)
Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 1 mirror.
OK
NG
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the

figure below and fix it.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror
unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as
shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then
wind two turns furthermore around the pulley.
(6)
Lens, CCD
1)
2)
Remove the dark box, and the cover.
3)
Clean the lens, and the CCD.
(4) Rails
1)
2)
Grease each rail.
Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive

wires.
If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.
C. Fusing section
(7) LED PWB, LED driver PWB

1)
2)
Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base
plate.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(1)
3)
Contents
Fusing unit
Thermostat
Thermistor
Fusing PG
Heater lamp
Cleaning felt
Heat roller
Pressure roller
Fusing unit
1)
1)
Remove the connectors of the fusing unit.
1)
Pull the right side part of the fusing unit shown in the figure
Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from the

LED driver PWB.
4)
Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect the
connector from the LED PWB.
5)
Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from
the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.

1)
Take out the fusing unit from the left side.
(4)
Fusing PG
1)
Remove the fusing PG.
1)
When the fusing PG is fixed, check the position of the fusing

PG by seeing the scale on the fusing unit.
(2) Thermostat
1)
Remove the thermostat cover.
1)
Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp and remove the

thermostat.
(5)
1)

Remove the spring and remove the lower separation pawl.
(3) Thermistor
1)
Remove the thermistor.
(6) Heater lamp
(7)
1)
Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp.
1)
Remove the fusing cleaning plate unit.
1)
Remove the screws fixing the upper fusing PG.
1)
Remove the cleaning felt.
1)
Remove the Front/Rear lamp fixing plates.
(8)
1)
1)
Cleaning felt

Remove the upper separation pawl.
Remove the heat lamp.
(9) Heat roller

1)
Remove the heat roller by removing the parts in order as

No.
1
2
3
4
(1)
Contents
Ozone filter
Cooling fan
Ozone filter
1)
2)
Remove the ozone filter.
(10) Pressure roller

1)
Remove the High voltage holder.
(2)
1)
2)
Cooling fan
Remove the harnesses from the power unit.
Remove the pressure roller.
2)
(3)
Remove the HV PWB.
1)

Remove the paper holding arm.
3)
4)
Disconnect the harness and remove the cooling fan with the
fan duct.
2)
Remove the paper full actuator.
3)
Remove the paper exit tray right cabinet.
4)
Remove the screw for adjusting the tension.
Remove the cooling fan from the fan duct.
5)
Remove the upper paper exit cover.
9)
10) Remove the right cover bottom and the right cover door.
6)
11) Remove the right front rear stay.

7)
Remove the harness of the First paper exit unit.
8)
Open the manual paper feed tray, and, remove the right door.
12) Remove the screws, and remove the first paper exit unit.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
13) Remove the paper exit drive unit.
1)
Remove the job separator.
2)
3)
Remove the harness of the second paper exit unit.
4)
14) Remove the belt, the shift gear pulley, the SP pin and the bearing.
15) Remove the delivery roller holder and the shifter PG unit.
16) Remove the shifter frame unit R, and remove the shifter bottom frame unit.
5)
Remove the screws, and remove the second paper exit unit.
E. PWB section
No.
1
2
3
(1)
Contents
MFP PWB
PCU PWB
Operation panel PWB
MFP PWB
1)
Remove the clamps, and remove the FFC.
6)
Remove the screws, and remove the sub roller unit.
7)
Remove the E ring, the SP pin, and gears
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the MFPC cover.
8)
Remove the screws, and remove the upper paper exit PG.
3)
Remove all harnesses and screws of the MFP PWB.

Then, remove the MFP PWB.
(2) PCU PWB

1)
4)
Remove the screws, and remove the Key PWB.
5)
Remove the FFC, the harnesses and the screws. Then,

remove the LVDS PWB.
Remove all harnesses and screws of the PCU PWB.

Then, remove the PCU PWB.
(3) Operation panel PWB

1)
Remove the screws fixing the operation panel unit.

No.
1
2)
3)
(1)
Remove the DFFC and the harness.
Contents
Optical frame unit
Optical frame unit
1)
Remove the right cover and the left cover.
2)
Remove the screws at the left side of the optical frame.
3)
Remove the screws at the right side of the optical frame.
Remove the earth and the harness , and remove the USB I/F
PWB.
4)
Remove the FCCs and the harness from the optical unit to the
SCNcnt PWB. Then, remove the optical frame unit.
G. LSU section
No.
1
4)
5)
Disconnect the harness of the LSU unit and the clamps.
6)
Remove the screws fixing the LSU unit. Then, remove the LSU
unit.
Contents
LSU unit
(1) LSU unit

1)
2)
3)
: 15/Aug.
H. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport

section
No.
1
2
3
4
Contents
Main drive unit
Paper feed clutch
PS roller
PIN sensor
(1) Main drive unit

1)
2)

6)
Remove the temperature humidity sensor.
7)
Remove the harness from the cable saddles.
Remove the power unit and the duplex motor.
3)
the PS clutch.
8)
Remove the connectors.
4)
Remove the lift up motor.
9)
Remove the DUP motor.
5)
Remove the second drive unit.

: 15/Aug.
10) Remove the main drive unit.
3)
Open the front door and remove the PS knob.
4)
Remove the left E-ring.
5)
Remove the PS roller
(2) Paper feed clutch

1)
Remove the paper feed clutch from the main drive unit.
(3) PS roller
1)
the PS clutch.
(4)
2)
PIN sensor
1)
Remove the connector. And remove the harness.
2)
Remove the PS unit.
Open the right door and remove the PS right bottom guide PG.
3)
Remove the PIN sensor detection lever. Remove the connector, then, remove the PIN sensor.
I. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport

section
No.
1
2
3
4
(1)
Contents
Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation
roller
Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray

separation roller
1)
Open the tray.
2)
Remove the tray pick up roller, the tray paper feed roller and
the tray separation roller.
3)
Remove the tray separation roller is fixed, the dent part of the
clutch has to be fit with the tray separation roller.
(2) Tray paper feed drive unit

1)
2)
Remove the harness of the tray paper feed drive unit, and
remove the tray paper feed drive unit.
Remove the tray transportation roller by removing the gears as

(3) Tray transport clutch/Tray paper feed clutch

1)
Remove harnesses of the clutch and the E-rings. Then,

remove the tray transport clutch and the tray paper feed clutch
with caring the locking positions of the clutches.

No.
1
2
3
4
(1)
1)
Contents
Bypass tray unit
Bypass tray unit

Remove the bypass tray unit.
(4) Tray transport roller

1)
Remove the tray transport clutch, the tray paper feed clutch
and the gears.
(2)
1)

Remove the service cover.
2)
Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper
feed roller.
4)
Remove the separation roller cover.
5)
Remove the separation roller unit.
(3) Bypass tray separation roller

1)
Remove the tray arms.
6)
2)
Remove the bypass tray.
(4)
1)
3)
Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed roller.

Remove the E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper feed
clutch.
Remove the bypass frame unit.
K. Power section
No.
1
2
3
2)
Remove the power switch.
(1)
Contents
High voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Power switch
(2)
(1) High voltage PWB

1)
(1)
Remove all harnesses to the power unit, and remove the

power unit.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
(1)
(2) PCU PWB
1)
Remove all harnesses to the PCU PWB, and remove the PCU
PWB.
Contents
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV blade
Toner sensor
Developer
Remove the harness of developer cartridge from the developer

cover.
Remove the developer cover from the developer cartridge.
(3) Power switch

1)
Remove the harnesses to the power switch with pressing the

harnesses inside.
: 15/Aug.
Turn the MG roller to discharge developer.
DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment reference
0
Molt
edge
reference
0.3
0.3
0.5
Projection edge
reference
(4)
Molt
edge
reference
0.5
Projection edge
reference
DV blade
DV blade attachment reference
[Cross-section]

Bump
reference

0.5
(2) Toner filter unit

With the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it.
When replacing, clean the guide AS.
0.5
Rib reference
(5)
Toner sensor
* Clean the sensor only after removing used DV when replacing

DV.
* Without removing the MG roller, clean the sensor surface with
waste cloth in the arrow direction to remove toner.
(3) DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
M. Process section
(2)
1)
No.

Remove the main charger holder unit.
Contents
1
2
3
4
Drum unit
Cleaning blade
(1) Drum unit

1)
Rotate and remove the drum fixing plate. Then, remove the
drum unit.
(3)
1)
Cleaning blade
Remove the moquette F/R.
2)
After removing the OPC drum, apply stearic acid powder

(UKOG-0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the OPC drum.
CAUTION: If it disturbs the blade movement, replace it and attach

new one.
2)
3)
Remove the cleaning blade.
After attaching the OPC drum to the OPC drum frame, use the
black protect sheet or copy paper, and manually rotate the
OPC drum two turns in the forward direction to remove stearic
acid powder applied to the OPC drum surface.
(4)
1)

Remove the separation pawl unit.
- Do not touch the OPC drum surface except for the both ends
(5mm) of the OPC drum.
- Any section of the OPC drum may be touched from above the
black protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly.
1 : 15/Aug.
N. Others
(3)
1)
No.
Paper empty sensor

Remove the Desk PE actuator.
Contents
1
2
3
4
5
6
Main motor
Paper empty sensor
Paper exit fan / Ozone filter (Only North America)
DV cooling duct
Lift up motor
(1) Main motor

1)
1)
2)
3)
2)
Remove the paper empty sensor from the Paper feed frame.
1)
2)
Remove the harness of the main motor, and remove the main
motor.
2)
(4)
Paper exit fan
1)
Remove the delivery tray right.
2)
Open the manual paper tray, and remove the right door.
(2) Tray open/close sensor

1)
Remove the sensor cover. Then, remove the harness of the

tray open/close sensor, and remove the tray open/close sensor.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
1
3)
: 15/Aug.
7)
Remove the ozone filter, and remove the paper exit fan.
(Only in the North America)
4)
5)
6)
(5)
DV cooling duct
1)
2)
3)
Remove the connector cover, and remove the connectors.
Remove the paper exit fan duct, and remove the paper exit
fan. (Forwarding place except the North America)
4)
5)
Remove the main front cabinet left.
7)
(6)
6)
Remove the screws of the DV cooling duct and remove the DV

cooling duct.
Lift up motor
1)
2)
Disconnect the harness of the lift up motor and screws of the

lift up motor. Then, remove the lift up motor.
Remove the connector of the harness and screws of the DV

cooling duct unit. Then, remove the DV cooling duct.
MX-M316N
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
Service Manual
1.Operation panel
A.Mechanism relation diagram
LVDS PWB
LCD
KEY PWB
USB I/F PWB
B.Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB,
the USB I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB.
It displays the machine operation. It is provided with the USB I/F which
is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to
connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.
MX-M316N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 1
2. RSPF section (31opm)

(1)Outline
SCOV
SPFM
SPPD2
SRRC
12
SPRS
SPUC
11
2
13
SPPD1
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPWS
SOCD
6
10
SPLS1
SPLS2
Signal name
SCOV
SOCD
SPFM
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPRS
SPUC
SRRC
SPLS1
SPLS2
SPWS
Name
(RSPF)
Paper feed clutch
Registration roller clutch
Document size detector
No.
1
Name
Transport auxiliary roller
Registration roller (Drive)
Registration roller (Idle)
Transport roller 3 (Idle)
5
6
Transport roller 3 (Drive)

Transport roller 2 (Idle)
7
8

Paper exit roller (Idle)
Paper exit roller (Drive)
10
11
12
Document reverse gate

Document pickup roller
Paper feed roller
13
Separation roller
Function/Operation
Detects open/close of the RSPF cover.
Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
Detects paper pass.
Detects paper pass.
Detects paper pass.
Detects paper exit and switchback.
Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the paper exit roller
pressure when reversing paper.)
Controls the paper feed roller. (Controls the timing of paper feed.)
Detects the document width.
Function/Operation
Reduces friction between a document and the paper guide to transport the document smoothly to the
registration roller.
Transports a document to the transport roller 2. / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the
document scanning timing.
Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
the document.
Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
the document.
Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller.
Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
the document.
Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section.
Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the document.
Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning the
back surface.
Reverses a document when scanning images on the back surface.
Feeds a document to the paper feed roller.
Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a warp on paper between the registration roller and this roller
to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.
Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Document size detection
(3)
Size detection on the document tray
a. Paper feed operation
The document width is detected with the RSPF document width sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the RSPF document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged
from the document width and the document length according to the
table below.
The transport motor is turned ON and the power of the transport

motor is transmitted to the pickup roller by turning ON the paper feed
clutch.
Document size
AB series
Inch series
A5
B5
11" x 8.5"
A4
B5R
A4R
8.5" x 13"
B4
A3
11" x 17"
8.5" x 14"
8.5" x 13.4"
8.5" x 13.5"
8.5" x 5.5"
11" x 8.5"
A4
11" x 8.5"R
8.5" x 13"
8.5" x 14"
A3
11" x 17"
8.5" x 13.4"
Document length sensor

SPLS1
SPLS2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
RSPF paper feed and transport operations
The pickup roller descends to pickup the top document and feed it to
the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds a document to the transport section.
At that time, the document is separated by the separation roller to prevent double-feeding.
b. Single face scanning
The lead edge of the fed document is aligned (registration) by the registration roller, and passed through transport roller 1 to the document
scanning section, where images are scanned.
Then the document is passed through transport roller 2 to the paper
exit roller.
The rollers (the registration roller, transport rollers 1 and 2, the paper
exit roller) in the transport section are driven by the transport motor.
The paper exit roller (drive pulley) is pressed by the paper exit roller
pressure control solenoid.
When the read edge of the document passes the scanning section, the
both rollers are brought into close contact to supply the power for
paper exit.
1)
Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
2)
Paper feed start (1st sheet)
RSPF unit
The pick-up roller descends. (The transport motor is booted. And

the paper feed clutch is ON.)
3073
30,3
30,3
3)
Registration operation (1st sheet)

(Registration clutch ON)
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
clutch, the paper feed clutch is turned OFF.)
(2) Document scanning

The document scanning mode is available in 400dpi and 600dpi.
Resolution
400dpi
600dpi
Document transport speed

186mm/sec
124mm/sec
4)
Scanning start (1st sheet)
5)
Paper feed start (2nd sheet)
c. Duplex scanning
Images on the document surface are scanned, and detection of the
rear edge of the document by sensor SPPD3 triggers the following.
That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse gate,
the transport motor is reversed.
Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to switchback the document, returning it to the registration roller section and
aligning (registration) the document.
6)
Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Registration operation (2nd sheet)

Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the document

to the scanning section, scanning images on the back surface.
To reset the page order of the documents, the following operations are
made which are triggered by the detection of the rear edge of the document. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the
reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed.
to the paper exit section and discharge it.
7)
When a duplex document is scanned, the document lead edge section

and the rear edge section intersect. At that timing, the paper exit roller
pressure release solenoid is turned OFF to make a gap between the
paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle).
Scanning start (2nd sheet)
During the time from when the document rear edge passes the scanning section to when it is switch backed and send to the registration
roller section, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned
ON to keep the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle) in
contact.
8)
Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
1)
2)

Pick-up roller descending
9)
Scanning complete (2nd sheet)
3)
Registration operation (1st sheet, front surface)
4)
Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)
5)
After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is

pressed. (Solenoid ON)
6)
After stopping the operation, reversing is started.
10) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
11) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed clutch is ON, then, the
paper exit motor is rotated reversely at a low speed for a certain
time to lift the pickup roller.)
14) Scanning start (Second sheet)
7)
After reversing, registration operation is executed.

15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller is
pressed.
8)
After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pressure is released.
16) After discharge (First sheet), the reverse follower roller pressure
is released.
9)
Scanning start (First sheet, back surface)
10) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is

pressed.
11) After stopping the operation, reversing is started.
12) After reversing, registration operation is executed.
13) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pressure is released.
3. RSPF section (56opm)

(1)Paper feed section
SPPD2
SPM
SCOV
SPPD1
2
SPED
1
3
SPLS1
SPLS2
No.
1
2
3
Name
Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Signal name
SCOV
SPED
SPLS1
SPLS2
SPM
SPPD1
SPPD2
Function/Operation
Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
Name
Upper cover open/close sensor
Document sensor
RSPF paper feed motor
RSPF paper pass sensor 1
RSPF paper pass sensor 2
Function/Operation
Detects open/close of the RSPF upper cover
Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray
Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray
Feeds a document
Detects paper feed and the document size in random paper feed
Detects paper pass
(2)Transport section
SRRC
SPFM
SPPD3
SPRS
1
2
SOCD
SPPD5
4
3
No.
1
Name
Registration roller (Drive)
2
3
4

Paper exit roller (Drive)
Signal name
SOCD
SPFM
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPRS
SRRC
Function/Operation
Transports a document to the transport roller 2. Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the
document scanning timing
Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller
Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section
Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning
the back surface
Name
Registration roller clutch
Function/Operation
Detects open/close of the RSPF unit
Transports a document
Detects paper pass
Detects paper exit and switchback
Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller
Controls the registration roller (Controls the timing of document transport)
Document size
(1)Document size detection
AB series
Size detection on the document tray

The document width is detected by the document width sensor
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the document length
sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from the document width and the document length as shown in the table below.
When, however, mixed sizes of documents are loaded on the tray, the
maximum size is detected.
Inch series
A5
B5
11" x 8.5"
A4
B5R
A4R
8.5" x 13"
B4
A3
11" x 17"
8.5" x 5.5"
11" x 8.5"
A4
11" x 8.5"R
8.5" x 13"
8.5" x 14"
A3
11" x 17"
Document length sensor

SPLS1
SPLS2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
(Registration clutch ON)

3073
30,3
30,3
4)
Scanning start (1st sheet)
5)
Paper feed start (2nd sheet)
6)
Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Registration operation (2nd sheet)
(2) Document scanning

The document scanning mode is available in 400dpi and 600dpi.
Resolution
400dpi
600dpi
Document transport speed

279mm/sec
186mm/sec
(3) RSPF paper feed and transport operations

a. Paper feed operation
The transport motor is turned ON and the power of the transport
motor is transmitted to the pickup roller by turning ON the paper feed
clutch.

The pickup roller descends to pickup the top document and feed it to
the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds a document to the transport section.
At that time, the document is separated by the separation roller to prevent double-feeding.
b. Single face scanning
The lead edge of the fed document is aligned (registration) by the registration roller, and passed through transport roller 1 to the document
scanning section, where images are scanned.
Then the document is passed through transport roller 2 to the paper
exit roller.
7)
Scanning start (2nd sheet)
8)
Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
9)
Scanning complete (2nd sheet)
The rollers (the registration roller, transport rollers 1 and 2, the paper
exit roller) in the transport section are driven by the transport motor.
The paper exit roller (drive pulley) is pressed by the paper exit roller
pressure control solenoid.
When the read edge of the document passes the scanning section, the
both rollers are brought into close contact to supply the power for
paper exit.
1)
2)

The pick-up roller descends. (The transport motor is booted. And
the paper feed clutch is ON.)
3)
Registration operation (1st sheet)
10)Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
4)
Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)
5)
After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is

pressed. (Solenoid ON)
6)
After stopping the operation, reversing is started.
7)
After reversing, registration operation is executed.
8)
After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pressure is released.
9)
Scanning start (First sheet, back surface)
11) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed clutch is ON, then, the
paper exit motor is rotated reversely at a low speed for a certain
time to lift the pickup roller.)
c. Duplex scanning
Images on the document surface are scanned, and detection of the
rear edge of the document by sensor SPPD3 triggers the following.
That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse gate,
the transport motor is reversed.
to the scanning section, scanning images on the back surface.
To reset the page order of the documents, the following operations are
made which are triggered by the detection of the rear edge of the document. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the
reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed.
to the paper exit section and discharge it.
When a duplex document is scanned, the document lead edge section
and the rear edge section intersect. At that timing, the paper exit roller
pressure release solenoid is turned OFF to make a gap between the
paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle).
During the time from when the document rear edge passes the scanning section to when it is switch backed and send to the registration
roller section, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned
ON to keep the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle) in
contact.
1)
2)

Pick-up roller descending
10) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is
pressed.
3)
Registration operation (1st sheet, front surface)
11)After stopping the operation, reversing is started.
12) After reversing, registration operation is executed.
13) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pressure is released.
14) Scanning start (Second sheet)
15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller is
pressed.
16) After discharge (First sheet), the reverse follower roller pressure
is released.
4.Scanner section
MHPOS
5
7
MIRM
2
3
7
6
Signal
name
MHPOS
MIRM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Function/Operation
Scanner home position sensor

Scan motor
Name
CCD PWB
Scanner lamp drive PWB
Lens
1st mirror
2nd mirror
Light guide bar
LED PWB
Detects the scanner home position.

Drives the scanner unit. (scan, return operations)
Function/Operation
Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
Drives the scanner lamp
Reduces a document image (light) and project it to the CCD.
Leads a document image to the lens.
Converges the scanner lamp lights and radiates onto the document.
Generates the scanner lamp lights.
(1)General
This section performs the following operations.
1) Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
reflected image is scanned by the 3line (RGB) CCD elements to be
converted into analog image signals.
2) The analog image signals are converted into 10-bit digital signals
by the A/D converter.
3) The digital image signals are sent to the SCNcnt PWB for image
processing.
(2)Detailed descriptions
a. Optical section drive
The optical section is driven as follows: The drive power is transmitted
from the scanner motor (MIRM) through the belt to the drive pulley/
wire, and the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached to
the wire are driven.
The scanner motor (MIRM) is controlled with the signals sent from the
MCU PWB.
b. Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage which is
generated by the LED drive PWB with the control signals sent from the
SCNcnt PWB.
G
B
(Image data for 1 line)
c. Image scan and color separation

Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
reflected image is scanned by the 3line (RGB) CCD elements to be
converted into analog image signals.
R
Red component
image data
The color components are extracted into R, G, B by the three kinds of

CCD elements (R, G, B).
The red CCD extracts the red component of an image, the green CCD
extracts the green component, the blue CCD extracts the blue component. This operation is called color separation.
The document images are optically reduced by the lens and reflected
to the CCD.
The scan resolution is 600 dpi.
1)
The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted

into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
Each color pixel has 10bit information.
2)
The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image

process section.
CCD PWB
Analog IC
CCD
R
G
B
R,G,B Color filter
B
Blue component
image data
d. Image signal A/D conversion
The CCD element is apparently seen as one unit, but it includes the
four kinds of elements (R, G, B).
The CCD element scans the document in the main scanning direction.
Scanning in the sub scanning direction is made by shifting the scanner
unit with the scanner motor.
G
Green component
image data
AFE ADC
LVDS
Buffer
Timing
Generator
CCD Elements
e. Zooming operation
3LINES CCD UNIT
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing the

scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not made optically, but performed by the image process technology (software).
5. Manual paper feed section

A. Mechanism relation diagram
MM
MPFC
MPED
1
2
Signal name
Name
MM
Main motor
MPED
MPFC
Paper empty detector (Manual paper feed tray)

Paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed tray)
No.
1
2
Name
Paper feed roller
Separation roller

Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and
the scanner sections.
Detects paper empty. (Manual paper feed tray)
Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Apply the pressure to the paper feed roller in reverse direction and prevents the paper
from feeding it in layered condition.
Only the top sheet of paper is fed from the paper stack on the manual
bypass tray, the feed roller is pressed against the paper surface and
sent to the transport section.
The feed roller transports paper to registration section. Against the
paper, by applying a force in the direction opposite to the feed roller
from below, separation rollers are prevented double feeding of the
paper. On / OFF control of the feed roller is carried out by the Manual
Feed Clutch
This model does not have an automatic paper size detection function
in Multi-purpose tray.
6. Paper registration section

MM
RRC
MPWD
2
PIN
Signal name
Name
MM
Main motor
MPWD
PIN
Paper width detection sensor

P-IN sensor
No.
1
Name
Resist roller (Drive)
Resist roller (Idle)

Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the
scanner sections.
Detects the width of the paper.
Detects the entrance of the paper in front of the registration roller.
The Resist Roller (Drive) synchronizes the paper timing to the image on the Transfer Belt. A
buckle is created to eliminate any skew in the paper. The paper is then driven to the Transfer
section where the image is correctly timed for transfer onto the paper.
The Resist Roller (Idle) puts pressure on the back side of the paper allowing the Drive roller
to move the paper to the transfer section after proper buckle timing has occurred.
B. Operational description
The resist roller set controls the synchronization of the Image on the
Transfer Belt to the Timing of the paper making its way to the Primary
and Secondary Transfer section. Start stop movement is controlled by
the PS Clutch. Drive for the Registration roller comes from Main motor.
7. Paper feed tray section

MM
C1PUC
C1LUD
C1PED
C1LUM
2
3
1
Signal name
MM
Name
Paper feed tray 1 paper empty detector

Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the
scanner sections.
Detects the upper limit of the paper feed tray 1, and maintains the contact pressure between
paper on the top and the paper pickup roller to provide stable paper feed power.
Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray 1, and maintains the contact pressure between
paper on the top and the paper pickup roller to provide stable paper feed power.
Controls ON/OFF of the rollers (the paper pickup roller, the paper feed roller, the paper
transport roller 2) in the paper feed tray 1 section.
Detects paper empty in the paper feed tray 1.
Name
Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper separation roller (Paper feed tray 1)

Picks up paper on the top and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Separates paper to prevent double-feed.
Main motor
C1LUD
C1LUM
C1PUC
C1PED
No.
1
2
3
Paper feed tray 1 upper limit detector

Paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
B. Paper lifting operation
D. Paper feed operation
Set paper in the paper feed tray and insert the paper feed tray into the
machine. The lift plate lifts up.
The paper feed motor (CPFM) is turned ON, and then the paper feed
clutch (CPUC1) is turned ON.
Paper is lifted by the lift motor (CLUM).
The power of the paper feed motor (CPFM) is transmitted through the
paper feed clutch (CPUC1) to the paper pickup roller and the paper
feed roller.
When the paper feed tray 1 upper limit detector (CLUD1) detects the
top of paper, the lift motor (CLUM) stops and the contact pressure
between paper on the top and the paper pickup roller becomes the
proper level when paper is picked up.
When the paper remaining quantity is decreased, the lift plate lifts up
in each case to maintain the contact pressure between paper on the
top and the paper pickup roller at the proper level when paper is
picked up.
The paper pickup roller descends to pick up paper on the top and feed
it to the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section.
At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent double-feed.
C. Paper size detection operation

This model does not have a function to detect the paper size in the
cassette.
The paper size in the cassette is changed on operation panel.
8. Paper exit section

POM
OSM
POGS
5
SHPOS
FUFM
1
POD1
3
2
4
Signal name
FUFM
OSM
POD1
POM
SHPOS
No.
1
Name
Paper exit cooling fan
Offset motor
Paper exit motor
Shifter home positions sensor

Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
Offsets (shifts) paper.
Detects paper transport from the fusing section.
Drives the roller in the paper exit section.
Detects the shifter home position.
Name
Paper exit roller (drive)

To exit paper onto the exit tray and perform switch back operations when in duplex mode.
To apply pressure to a paper with the paper exit roller (Drive), to give a feeding force of the exit roller to
a paper.
Transport the paper from the fusing unit to the paper exit unit.
To apply pressure to a paper with the paper exit roller (Drive), to give a feeding force of the exit roller to
a paper.
To discharge static generated in the paper exit section.
Paper exit roller (idle)
Fusing rear roller (drive)
Fusing rear roller (idle)
Discharge Brush2
B. Paper exit operation

The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport
roller to paper exit roller, and then discharged to the inner tray.
When the paper is discharged to the right tray: The paper is transported to paper exit roller, and the paper exit motor is reversed. Then
the paper is passed over the right paper exit gate through paper exit
roller to the right tray.
9. Duplex section
ADUM
Signal name
ADUM
Name
Duplex motor
No.
1
Name
Paper feed roller (Idle)
Paper feed roller (Drive)

Drives the rear fusing roller and the paper exit roller with the duplex model.
Applies pressure to the back of the paper for drive to the Lower Duplex Transport Rollers
Drive Roller in upper Duplex section that transports paper to the Lower transport rollers in the Duplex
Section.
B. Operational description
The switched back paper which comes from paper exit section goes to
ADU section. The paper feed rollers are driven by the duplex motor
transporting the paper to the registration section
10. OPC drum section

A.
Mechanism relation diagram
MM
2
2
3
6
1
7
4
Signal name
MM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Name
Main motor
Name
OPC drum
Drum separation pawl
Sub blade (Cleaning seal)
Screen grid
Saw-teeth charger
Waste toner transport screw
Cleaning blade
Waste toner transport pipe
Function/Operation
Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the scanner sections.
Function/Operation
Forms electrostatic latent images by laser beams.
Separates paper from the drum.
Prevents against toner leakage from the cleaner section.
Helps to charge the OPC drum evenly with electric charges provided from the main charger.
Applies a high voltage to charge the OPC drum.
Waste toner in the OPC drum unit is transported to the waste toner collection section.
Cleans remaining toner on the OPC drum.
Transports toner from the cleaner unit to the waste toner box in the toner cartridge front section.
B.
Operational descriptions
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger,

then laser image beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the
laser (writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images.
1)
3)
After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the cleaning blade.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
Main corona unit
High voltage unit
Screen grid
CTL
CGL
Aluminum
layer
OPC drum
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The OPC
drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied
to the screen grid.
2)
Residual toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to the waste toner box section in the toner cartridge by the
waste toner transport screw.
4)
The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
Laser beam
LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser unit
to form latent electrostatic images.
CLT
CGL
layer
Aluminum
Laser beam
CLT
CGL
layer
Aluminum
After completion of the job, laser beams are radiated onto al the
surface of the OPC drum.
When laser beams are radiated onto the CGL of the OPC drum,
positive and negative charges are generated.
OPC drum
OPC drum
CTL
CGL
layer
Aluminum
When LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative

charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative
charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of
the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on the
OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive
and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage of the OPC
drum.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative

charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative
charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of
the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced
out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive
and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser beam are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
11. Toner supply section

TNM
Signal name
TNM
Name
Toner motor

Drives the toner cartridge.
The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is driven by the toner motor to supply toner to the developing unit.
The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is turned ON/OFF by the toner motor. The toner density in the developing unit is detected by the toner
density sensor. When the density falls below the specified level, the toner motor is turned ON to supply toner in the toner cartridge to the developing
unit. When the toner density reaches the specified level, the toner motor turns OFF to stop supply of toner to the developing unit. With the above process, the toner density in the developing unit is maintained at a fixed level.
12. Developing section

MM
TCS
2
2
Signal name
MM
TCS
No.
1
2
3
Name
Main motor
Toner sensor

Detects the toner density in the developing unit.
Name
Developing roller
Stirring roller
Toner filter

Forms electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible images.
Stirring roller Stirs toner and developer to charge toner negatively by friction.
Prevents toner splash and vacuum.
B. Developing operations
Electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC drum surface by the
laser (writing) unit (laser image beams) are converted into visible
images by toner.
layer
Aluminum
CGL
CTL
Drum
-400V
Toner in the developing unit is stirred by the mixing roller.

When toner is stirred, it is negatively charged by mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the developing
roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted and attached to the area on the
OPC drum where negative voltage is reduced by exposure.
On the other hand, the negative voltage at an area where exposure is
not made is higher than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not
attached.
: 15/Aug.
13. Transfer section

MM
5
4 3
35cpm
26/31cpm
5
4
3
Signal name
MM
Main motor
No.
1
Transfer roller
Name

Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the scanner
sections.
Name

Transfers toner images from the OPC drum surface to paper.
Apply the negative voltage to the paper which the positive voltage is applied to and discharge the
paper.
Transfer roller bearing
Transfer roller collar
Transfer roller drive gear
Discharge plate
3
4
5
TR bearing (F/R)
Transfer roller collar
TR gear
B. Transfer operation
The toner image on the photo conductor is transferred to the paper by
applying the positive high voltage to the transfer roller.
0HOTOCONDUCTOR/0#DRUM
$ISCHARGEPLATE
4RANSFERROLLER
4RANSFERMODE
#ONSTANTCURRENT
#LEANINGMODE
C. Cleaning operation
The unnecessary toner on the transfer roller is moved to the
conductor by changing the polar character of the transfer roller
negative high voltage type. Then, the unnecessary toner is
ported to the waste toner section by the cleaning blade of the
conductor.
photo
to the
transphoto
0HOTOCONDUCTOR/0#DRUM
$ISCHARGEPLATE
4RANSFERROLLER
4RANSFERMODE
#ONSTANTCURRENT
#LEANINGMODE
14. Fusing section

MM
TH_MY
TH_US
TS_UM
1
2
TS_UM
HL_PR
HLout
Signal name
MM
HL_PR
HLout
TH_MY
TH_US
Name
Main motor
Heater lamp control relay
Heater lamp
Thermistor UM
Thermistor US
TS_UM
Thermostat UM
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Heat roller
Pressure roller

Turns ON/OFF the control of the heater relay.
Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp.
Regulates Heat Roller Temperature at the end of the Heat Roller.
Regulates Heat Roller Temperature at center of the Heat Roller.
Fusing roller overheat protection. Cuts off power supply to heat lamp when over heat condition is
determined.
Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the heat roller (heating).
Presses toner on paper to fuse.
Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the heat roller (heating).
B. Fusing unit drive
C. Heater lamp drive
The driving of fuser unit is; the driving force is transported to fuser
roller, thru the Main motor (MM) and connection gears, based on the
controlling signal from PCU.
The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the thermistor is

sent to the PCU.
When the temperature is lower than the specified level, the heater
lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive circuit on
the HL PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and heating
the heat roller.
0#5
--
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller, the

thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off.
D. Fusing operation
Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat roller.
Heat Roller
Pressure Roller
The heater lamp is in the heat roller, which heats the heat roller to fuse
toner onto paper.
The pressure roller is made of silicon rubber because of the following
reasons and purpose.
1)
Paper is separated. (Since the heat roller is of higher hardness,

the pressure roller is deformed to separate paper toward the heat
roller.)
2)
The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for paper.
3)
By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without

deformation.
E. Fusing temperature control

The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the heat roller.
The roller temperature is detected by the thermistor sensor, and the
heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is maintained at the
specified level.
: 15/Aug.
15.Fan and Filter section

The machine is provided with the following fan to discharge air from the process section and cool the fusing section and the power unit.
Signal name
OZFM
PSFM
LSUFM
FUFM
Name
Ozone fan
Power supply unit cooling fan
LSU cooling fan
Paper exit cooling fan

Cools the developing unit generates the ozone from the main charger unit.
Cools the power supply unit.
Cools the LSU and the Developing unit
Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
The machine is provided with the following filter to remove ozone generated in the process section.
No.
1
2*1
Name
Ozone filter
Exhaust Ozone filter

Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
Take in an odor to exhaust.
*1:Destination North America and Mexico only
FUFM(TFM)
LSUFM
PSFM
2
OZFM
POGS1
POD2
MX-M316N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 1
WH_CS4
DSW C4
DSW_C4
C4PED
PTRC1
C4LUM
C4SS
C4PUC
C4PFD
CS PWB(A)
C4LUD
Paper Feed 4th Unit
HL_US
HL_UM
TH_US
TH_UM
Fuser Unit
DSW_POC
DSW
DSW_C3
C3
C3PED
WH_CS3
PTRC1
C
C3LUM
3LUM
C3SS
C3PUC
C3PFD
DSW_R
CS PWB(B)
C3LUD
CPFM
Paper Feed 3rd Unit
MTOP2
MPLD1
MPFC
MTOP1
TM_Count
POSD
MPED
TNM
ADUM
MPWD
Manual Paper Unit
Derivery 2 Unit
TFD2
OSM
TFD1
FUFM1
POM
SHPOS
TFD3
POD1
POD1
Derivery 1 Unit
POD3
PDGS2
PDGS2
Right Derivery Unit
PPD1
WH_CS2
DSW_C2
DSW
C2
C2PED
C2LUD
C2PFD
Paper Feed 2nd Unit
WH_CS1
PTRC2
C
C2LUM
2LUM
C2PUC
C2SS
CS PWB(A)
C1LUM
C1PUC
C1SS
C1PED
RRC
PSPS
C1LUD
Paper Feed 1st Unit
MM
CRUM
TCS
TH_RA
HUD_RA
PSFM
AC IN
Main Switch
WH Switch
CoinVender
HV-PWB
OZFM
Reactor
Power Supply Unit
WH PWB
PCU PWB
200V
MFPc PWB
SPLS2
SPFM
Inner Finisher
MHPS
MIRM
LED DRV PWB
LEDPWB
CCD PWB
SCN PWB
SPWS
SPLS1
SPRS
SPUM
STMPS
AC IN
LSUFM
PM
LD PWB
LSU Unit
HDD(250GB)
LVDS PWB
Operation Panel Unit
ORS-PD
ORS-LED
OC Switch
SPPD4
SPPD3
SPPD2
SPPD1
RSPF DRV PWB
SPFC
Scanner Unit
RSPF Unit
FAX Unit
(x1)
FAX Unit
(x1)
PNC
WH_SCN
Audior
SPRC
SPED
SCOV
SOCD
MX-M316N
[12]
ELECTRICAL SECTION
Service Manual
1. Block diagram
A. System block diagram
Main Cassette Unit

C1SS; Cassette Detector
C1PED ; Paper Empty
C1LUD ; Lift Up Detector
PPD1; Paper Pass Detect Sensor
TCS; Toner Control Sensor
ADUM ; Auto Duplex Motor
C1PUC ; Cassette1 Pick Up Clutch

RRC ; Resist Roller Clutch
C1LUMLift Up Motor
InterLock SW
TM-Counter
OZFM ; Ozon Fan Motor
PSPS ; Paper SeParate Solenoid
TH_UM/TH_US; Fuser Thermister

(x2 Analog)
POSD ; POUT Switching Pass Detector
POGS1 ; Pout Gate Solenoid1
POM ; Paper Output Motor
OSM ; Shifter-Motor
FUFM ; FuserUN Cooling Fan Motor
TFD1; Tray Full Sensor
POD1;Pout Sensor
SHPOS; Shifter HP Sensor
MTOP2Multi feed tray Position Sensor2
MTOP1Multi feed tray Position Sensor
CN53
CN50
CN49
CN22
CN33
CN38
CN36
CN43
CN51
TFD3; Right Pout

Tray Full Sensor

CN35
PIC Writer
SRAM
1Mbits
POF
TFD2; 2nd POUT

Tray Full Sensor
CN37
PIC
CN4
CPLD Writer
PTRC1:Desk vertical transport clutch1
C3PFD ; Paper Feed Detector

DWS_C3 ; Door Detector
C3PED ; Paper Empty
C3SS ; Casette Detector
C3PUC ; Pick Up Clutch
C3LUM ; Lift Up Motor
CS Relay PWB
Unit (TypeB)
CPFM ; Casette Paper Feed Motor
PTRC2:Desk vertical transport clutch2

DSW_C2 ; Door Detector
C2PED ; Paper Empty
C2PUC; Pick Up Clutch
CS Relay PWB(A)
Cassette Unit(TypeA)
CN14
EEPROM
64kbits
CN6
SCAN Cnt PWB
(72pinDIMM socket)
16Mbits
Flash ROM
CPLD
I 2C Bus
PCU-PWB
CPU
H8S/2373
CN3
POD2; 2nd Pout

sensor
Manual Paper Feed Unit

MPLD1; MFT Paper Length Sensor 1
MPWD; MFT Paper Width Sensor(Analog)
MPED; Multi Paper tray Empty sensor
APPD1; ADU Paper Pass Sensor
MPFC; Multi feed tray PickUp Clutch

DSW_C4 ; Door Detector
C4PED ; Paper Empty
C4PUC ; Pick Up Clutch
CS Relay PWB (A)
Reset
Expanded
p
I/O ASIC
Reset IC
Unit(TypeA)
Temp/Humidity CRUM
Sensor
CN32
CN27
POGS2; Pout
Gate Solenoid2
CN1
POD3; Right
Pout sensor
Right paper exit UnitOptional)

DSW_POC; Pout
Cover sensor
Data Bus(0..15)
*** See the Circuit diagrams for more details
Address Bus(0..20)
0)
NOVA-E PCU Connecting Diagram
CN16
CN44
CN45
CN48
CN55
CN12
CN9
CN54
LD-PWB
HV Unit
PSFM ; PowerSupplyUN Cooling Fan Motor
LSU-UN
Polygon-Motor
MFP-PWB
Coin
Vender
WH-PWB
LSU FAN Motor
Control
Power
Power Supply
CN10
CN47
MM; MAIN-Motor
Toner-Motor
CN52
CN8
Debug/Log
CN46
Inner Finisher
B. PCU PWB

126
75$
9KTGNGUU.#0
#FCRVGT
UART(1ch)
UART(1ch)
UART(2ch)
5GTKCN%0
&GDWI
(#:
PF
%0
.GXGN%QPXGTVGT
45%
GMII
&GDWI%0
'VJGT
USB2.0 Device
480Mbps
'VJGT2*;
)
1Gbps
UART(1ch)
Only Rev3.0
75$
$WU5YKVEJ
GMII
CN Update
5NKFG59
5GTKCN%0
8GPFGT
4+%2%+
#KT%NGCPGT
%*0,20
&UWD%0
75$&GXKEG
6[RG$%0
.#0,CEM
4,
USB2.0 Host
480Mbps
29/
(#0
%0
+06
EJ
+06
EJ
+06
EJ
nFAX12_PIN_INT
INT(WakeUp)
INT(Sleep)
'VJGT/#%
)
7#46
EJ
75$+(
&GXKEG
'VJGT/#%

PCIe x4 gen1
2.5Gbps
2%+G+(
NCPG
(LAN waiting state OFF)
&&4
+(
DDR3-800
&&41P$QCTF
)$
Reus
ASIC
$QCTFVQ$QCTF%QPPGEVQT
UART
7#46
EJ
(LAN waiting state ON)
)2+1
52+5&
UART(1ch)
SDHC Class6
6MB/sec
5&
5QEMGV
5&*%)$
75$*QUV
6[RG#%0
4GCT
2%+G+(
NCPG
.%&%+(
I2C
360kHz
+%
EJ
%QPVTQNNGT
Local Bus
I2C
360kHz
+%
EJ
%QPVTQNNGT
.QECN$WU
+(
I2C
95kHz
(2&.+0-
4GEKGXGT
46%
POF
54#/
/DKV
''241/
MD
MPU I/F
LDVS(LD)17.88MHz LD I/F
HSYNC
%NQEM)GPGTCVQT
75$*QUV
75$%0
(NCUJ&+//
5QEMGV
%2.&
.&%0
75$*7$
RQTV
6[RG#%0
(TQPV
USB2.0 Host
480Mbps
USB2.0 Host
480Mbps
2%+G
+%
EJ
%QPVTQNNGT
+06
EJ
.57+(
5%0+(
(2&.+0-
6TCUOKVVGT
75$+(
*QUV
5#6#+(
SATA gen2
3.0Gbps
5#6#%0
3.0Gbps
)$
,2056&
185126
*&&
UART
(1ch)
UART
(#:
UV
%0
(NCUJ&+//
&5-QRV
UART
nFAX12_PIC_INT
LDVS(Scan)
39.322MHz
LDVS(LCD)
43.97MHz
5%7%0
5%7
%0
2%7/QVJGT%0
,20126
/:'%:'%
185
2%729$
2+%
/KEQP
.%&2CPGN
.8&529$
LDVS(LCD)
43.97MHz
+%%#4&4GCFGT
5%729$
LDVS(Scan)
39.322MHz
UART
(1ch)
: 15/Aug.
C. MFP control PWB
D. Scanner control PWB
24.576
3.3
1.8
CCD-
(Main unit)
Tr
Tr
Tr
Tr
Tr
Tr
10V
3line color CCD
AFE/TG
CPUCLK
SCNcnt
AFE_CS
19.576MHz
CLK
Rx FPD Link
35bit
RGB
LSU-mother
10/5/3
SCN
ASIC
3.3
LVDS IC
Tx
28bit
Image data
1.2
CS3
RSPF UN
1210
125
53.3
CTRL_A10V
CTRL_A5V
CTRL_A3.3V
5VO
CPUCLK
Mirror.
MOTOR
DRIVER
24V
MOTOR
24V
5VN
151 and other ICs
LED
5VN
sensors other than SPEED
LED
MHPsensor
5VPWM
CS0orCS6
5VN
OCSW
5VN
CS2
SRAM
LSU- mothe
SPED
CS0
F-ROM
CPU
H8S/2373
RSPF Power
5VO
F-ROM
(ONboard)
E2PROM
24V
5VPWM
uart and others
LSU- mothe
SEL_A/B/C
Each sensor
HC151
5VN
LVDS PWB
ORS LED
Touch Panel
24V
analog
LCD Detection
PNL_SEL0
SCN
ASIC
Auditor(TBD)
CCFT CPU
CCFT_CPU
PNL SEL0
PNL_SEL0
/CCFT
nLCD_DISP
( ON/OFF )
CPLD
Image data
3.3V
DCDC
5V
28bit
5VN
LCD Power
24V
LED
LED
24V
5VN
/KEYIN
KEY CON
LSU- mothe
5VPWM
5VPWM
3.3V
10 keys and others
Buzzer
LED Matrix
5VO
NINFO_LED
NPWRSW
POW_LED
WU_LED
NWU_KEY
5VO
5VO
/BZR
24V
LED Drive
Circuit
12V
12V
24V
Power
supply
12V
INFO_LED(FAX reception LED)

WU_KEY (Reset Key)
WU_LED (Reset Key)
POW_LED(Main Power LED)
3.3V
5VN
PWRSW(Software SW)
3.3V
5V
SC_ACK
PCU_REQ
USB CN PWB
2. Power line diagram

A.AC power line diagram
(1) 100V
(2) 120V
(3) 200V
$
$
+/$&5<
series sensor
series sensor
B.AC power system diagram
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
CN10
6
5
8
3
7
9
10
/PM_CLK
/PM_LD
/PM_D
D-GND
24V
NC
NC
1
2
3
CN55
B03B-PASK-1
LSUFMOUT
GND
LSUFM_LD
B10B-PHDSS-B
4
2
1
LD_DA
D-GND
INT5V
CN12
28FMZ-BT
NC
NC
BD_HSYNC
D-GND
nREQ_PIC_INT
MPU_INTRO_N
nRES_PIC
MPU_PRINTST_N
nPOF_MFPC
LAN_CNT
PICVPPON
nWU_FAX
RXD_PIC
MPU_SIF_RxD
TXD_PIC
MPU_SIF_TxD
nCLR_PIC
MPU_SIF_CLK
nREQ_PIC
MPU_SIF_RST
PWM(PGC)
nCTS_PCU
RxD_PCU
RTS_PCU
TxD_PCU
RES_PCU
D-GND
D-GND
PCU PWB
PAP-03V-S
PHDR-10VS-2
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
9
6
8
7
10
11
12
CN52
B12B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
BD_HSYNC_N
LDD_LDEN1_N
LDD_SH1_N
D-GND
LDD_LDERR_N
LVDS_LD1P
LVDS_LD1M
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
1
3
2
179228-3
LSUFMOUT
GND
LSUFM_LD
AMP292156-3
179228-3
NC
NC
BD_HSYNC
D-GND
NREQ_PIC_INT
MPU_INTRO_N
NRST_PIC
MPU_PRINTST_N
NPOF_MFPC
WOLAN_ON
PICVPPON
NWU_FAX12_LAN
RXD_PIC
MPU_SIF_RX
TXD_PIC
MPU_SIF_TX
NCLR_PIC
MPU_SIF_CLK
NREQ_PIC
MPU_SIF_RST
PICPGC_RSVPWM
nCTS_PCU
RXD_PCU
nRTS_PCU
TXD_PCU
nRES_PCU
D-GND
D-GND
28FMZ-BT
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN46
MFPC PWB
179228-5
RD
WH
SH
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
1
2
3
4
5
RD
WH
SH
PHDR-12VS-2
PM
LSUFM
POLYCLK
/LOCK
/START
GND
24V
2-292173-5(AMP)
PHDR-12VS-2
VREF
GND
VCC
GND
nBD
nENB
nS/H
GND
nLDERR
DT_P
DT_N
GND
B12B-PHDSS-B
10
11
12
2
1
3
8
9
4
7
5
6
JP1
LD PWB
3. Actual wiring chart
A. LSU section
1
3
2
7
9
8
13
15
14
19
21
20
25
27
26
CN45
PHDR-30VS-1
nPOF_SCN
+5VO_DUTY
nSPED
D-GND
+5VO
D-GND
nPOW_LED
nPWR_SW
nWU_LED
nWU_KEY
nERR_LED
nINFO_FAX_L
CN6
1
2
3
4
11
7
8
5
9
6
12
10
B12B-PHDSS-B PHDR-12VS-2
PCU PWB
PHDR-10VS-2
CN35
8
7
5
3
6
4
9
10 (NC)
1 (NC)
2 (NC)
B10B-PHDSS-B
nLCD_DISP
nRES_SCN
TXD_SCN
RXD_SCN
nRTS_SCN
nCTS_SCN
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
29 SH
30 PK
28 WH
23 SH
24 PK
22 WH
17 SH
18 PK
16 WH
11 SH
12 PK
10 WH
5 SH
6 PK
4 WH
B30B-PHDSS-B
DGND
LCD_DATA3+
LCD_DATA3DGND
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKDGND
LCD_DATA2+
LCD_DATA2DGND
LCD_DATA1+
LCD_DATA1DGND
LCD_DATA0+
LCD_DATA0-
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
DGND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
DGND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
DGND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
DGND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
DGND
MFPC PWB
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
PHDR-34VS-1
SOCD
(NC)
nLCD_DISP
CN_nRES_SCN
CN_RXD_MFPC
CN_TXD_MFPC
CN_nCTS_MFPC
CN_nRTS_MFPC
GND
CN_nPOF
+5VO
SPED
GND
+5VPWM
CN_nPCU_REQ
CN_nSC_ACK
GND
CN_nSCU_RES_REQ
GND
LCD_A3_P
LCD_A3_M
GND
LCD_CLK_P
LCD_CLK_M
GND
LCD_A2_P
LCD_A2_M
GND
LCD_A1_P
LCD_A1_M
GND
LCD_A0_P
LCD_A0_M
CN_LCDSEL0
FX16M1-41P-HC
CN13
1 (NC)
2
3 (NC)
4
5 (NC)
6 (NC)
7 (NC)
8 (NC)
9 (NC)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 (NC)
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25 (NC)
26
PHDR-26VS-1
B26B-PHDSS-B
+5VO
+5VO
CN_nHOME_KEY
CN_BZR
CN_nHOME_LED
GND
GND
GND
+5V
GND
CN_PD
+5V
CN_PDSEL2
CN_PDSEL1
CN_PDSEL0
GND
CN_nOPELED_F0
CN_OPELED_SEG0
CN_nOPELED_F2
CN_nOPELED_F1
+3.3V
CN_OPELED_SEG2
CN_OPELED_SEG1
CN_nOPELED_F3
+5V
CN_nKEYIN
SMP-07V-NC/SMR-07V-N
3
3
GND
4
4
POW_LED
nPWRSW
1
1
5
5
WU_LED
2
2
nWU_KEY
6 ERROR_LED
6
7
7
DATA_LED
27
31
19
21
23
25
24
26
34
22
28
29
18
20
30
32
33
B34B-PHDSS-B
17
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN11
16
13
14
10
11
12
9
7
8
4
5
6
3
1
2
15
SH
PK
WH
SH
PK
WH
SH
PK
WH
SH
PK
WH
SH
PK
WH
(NC)
(NC)
16 SCANDATA_0N
15 SCANDATA_0P
14 GND
13 SCANDATA_1N
11 SCANDATA_1P
12 GND
9 SCANDATA_2N
7 SCANDATA_2P
10 GND
5 SCANCLKOUT_N
3 SCANCLKOUT_P
6 GND
1 SCANDATA_3N
2 SCANDATA_3P
4 GND
8 +3.3V
B16B-PHDSS-B
PHDR-16VS-2 CN5
GND
nLCD_DISP
GND
CN_LCDSEL0
GND
LCD_A3_P
LCD_A3_N
GND
LCD_CLK_P
LCD_CLK_N
GND
LCD_A2_P
LCD_A2_N
GND
LCD_A1_P
LCD_A1_N
GND
LCD_A0_P
LCD_A0_N
GND
CN_nCCFT
CN_nXL(X2)
CN_YH(Y2)
CN_nYL(Y1)
CN_XH(X1)
GND
+5V_LVDS
+5V_LVDS
+5V_LVDS
+5V_LVDS
GND
GND
+24V_LVDS
+24V_LVDS
+24V_LVDS
+24V_LVDS
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CN4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
FX16M2-41S-0.5SV
SCN CNT PWB
PHR-6
6
GND
5
PD
4
5V
3
PDSEL2
2
PDSEL1
1
PDSEL0
B6P-PH-K-S
ORS-PD PWB
CN1
41 GND
40 nLCD DISP
39 LCDSEL1_10H
38 LCDSEL0_43H
37 GND
36 LCD_A3_P
35 LCD_A3_M
34 GND
33 LCD_CLK_P
32 LCD_CLK_M
31 GND
30 LCD_A2_P
29 LCD_A2_M
28 GND
27 LCD_A1_P
26 LCD_A1_M
25 GND
24 LCD_A0_P
23 LCD_A0_M
22 GND
21 /CCFT
20 /XL_X2_SDA
19 YH_Y2_SCL
18 /YL_Y1_INT
17 XH_X1_CS
16 GND
15 5V
14 5V
13 5V
12 5V
11 GND
10 GND
9 24V
8 24V
7 24V
6 24V
5 GND
4 GND
3 GND
2 GND
1 GND
20555-041E
GHR-07V-S
FPC
FPC
BHSMR-02VS / BHSR-02VS-1
1 VLED+ 1
2 VLED- 2
BACK LIGHT
TOUCH PANEL
LCD module
LCD7.0 Unit
Operation panel unit
CN2
1 GND
2 POW_LED
3 nPWRSW
4 WU_LED
5 nWU_KEY
6 ERROR_LED
7 DATA_LED
BM07B-GHS-TBT
KEY PWB
CN1
7 NC
9 /BZR
8 GND
4 SEG0LEDBPR
2 /F2G0
1 /F1D2
11 3.3V_EXT
6 SEG2D0
5 SEG1LEDCPR
3 /F3G1
10 /KEYIN
GHR-11V-S
BM11B-GHS-TBT
(NC)
CN4
S3B-PH-SM4-TB
VLED+
1
(NC)
2 (NC)
VLED3
XH(X1)
/YL(Y1)
/XL(X2)
YH(Y2)
CN3
1
2
3
4
52271-0469
GND
GND
NC
3.3V_LCD
3.3V_LCD
3.3V_LCD
3.3V_LCD
NC
ENAB
HSYNC
VSYNC
CK
GND
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
G7
G6
G5
G4
G3
G2
G1
G0
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
R0
U/D
L/R
GND
CN2
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
LVDS PWB
B. Operation section
AUDITOR
(OPTION)

(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
PHR-13
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN-2
3.3V
1
GND
2
CPU_RXD
3
CPU_TXD
4
RXD_MFPC
5
TXD_MFPC
6
BM06B-GHS-TBT
CN-16
1
CN_AU_PNC
2
CN_AU_COPY
3
CN_AU_CA
4
CN_AU_READY
5
CN_AU_AUD
6
+5V
7
GND
8
+24V
9
CN_COL
10 CN_AU_TC
11 +24V
12 CN_AU_nPNC-a
13 GND
B13B-PH-K-S
CN-14
CN_SPPD1
1
CN_SPPD2
2
CN_SPFM_A
3
CN_SPFM_XA
4
CN_SPFM_B
5
CN_SPFM_XB
6
CN_SPFMO1
7
CN_SPM_A
8
CN_SPM_XA
9
10 CN_SPM_B
11 CN_SPM_XB
12 CN_SPMO1
13 CN_SPRS
14 CN_STMPS
15 CN_SRRC
16 CN_SRRS
17 CN_SPWS
18 CN_SEL_A
19 CN_SEL_B
20 CN_SEL_C
21 CN_SEL_OUT
22 CN_SPPD4
23 CN_SPFMO2
24 CN_SPPD3
25 (NC)
26 +5V
27 CN_SPED
28 CN_SOCD
B28B-PHDSS
CN-17
1
+5V
GND
2
/OCSW
3
4
+24V
CN_nSIZE_LED1
5
CN_nSIZE_LED2
6
B6B-PH-K-S PHR-6
CN-8
+24VPD
1
+24VPD
2
CL_ON
3
GND
4
GND
5
5597-05CPB7F
CN-7
1
MIM_XA
2
MIM_B
3
MIM_A
MIM_XB
4
B4B-PH-K-S PHR-4
CN-10
1
MHPS
2
GND
+5V
3
B3B-PH-K-S PHR-3
CN-3
GND
1
GND
2
GND
3
GND
4
GND
5
GND
6
GND
7
GND
8
GND
9
CN_TG_CS
10
CN_AFE_SDO
11
AFE_SDIO
12
AFE_SCLK
13
AFE_CS
14
CN_RES_CCDAD
15
GND
16
A3.3V
17
A3.3V
18
A3.3V
19
A3.3V
20
A3.3V
21
A3.3V
22
GND
23
A5V
24
A5V
25
A5V
26
GND
27
A10V
28
A10V
29
GND
30
CN_TA_N
31
CN_TA_P
32
GND
33
CN_TB_N
34
CN_TB_P
35
GND
36
CN_TC_N
37
CN_TC_P
38
GND
39
CN_TCLK_N
40
CN_TCLK_P
41
GND
42
CN_TD_N
43
CN_TD_P
44
GND
45
CN_TE_N
46
CN_TE_P
47
CCD_SEL2
48
CCD_SEL1
49
GND
50
FH48-50S-0.5SV
SCN CNT PWB
CN-15
12 GND
11 GND
10 +24V
+5VO
9
+24V
8
+5V_RSPF
7
+12V
6
+5V
5
+3.3V
4
+3.3V
3
GND
2
GND
1
B12B-PHDSS
SRA-21T-4 F-GND
179228-3
MIM
MHPS
+24V
CN_nSIZE_LED1
CN_nSIZE_LED2
GND
175489-3
1
5V
2
/OCSW
3
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
ORS LED PWB
OCSW
24V_IN
1
24V_IN
2
LAMP_ON/OFF
3
GND
4
GND
5
5597-05APB
LED_anode
GND
LED_cathode/
LED_anode/
GND
LED_cathode
LED DRV PWB

S6B-PH-K-S
1
MIM_XA
2
MIM_B
3
MIM_A
MIM_XB
4
PHR-4 B4B-PH-SM4-TB
3
MHPS
GND
2
+5V
1
EHR-3 VHPLG217L5A-1
CCD PWB
CN-2
GND
50
GND
49
48
GND
GND
47
GND
46
GND
45
GND
44
GND
43
GND
42
GND
41
SDO_C
40
SDI_C
39
SCLK_C
38
CS_C
37
RESET_C
36
GND
35
+3.3V_IN
34
+3.3V_IN
33
+3.3V_IN
32
+3.3V_IN
31
+3.3V_IN
30
+3.3V_IN
29
GND
28
+5V_IN
27
+5V_IN
26
+5V_IN
25
GND
24
+10V_IN
23
+10V_IN
22
GND
21
TX0N
20
TX0P
19
GND
18
TX1N
17
TX1P
16
GND
15
TX2N
14
TX2P
13
GND
12
TXSYNCN
11
TXSYNCP
10
GND
9
TX3N
8
TX3P
7
GND
6
TX4N
5
TX4P
4
GND(CCD_SEL2)
3
GND(CCD_SEL1)
2
GND
1
FH48-50S-0.5SV
PHR-6
GHR-03V-S
GHR-03V-S
LED PWB-R
CN-1
SM03B-GHS
1 LED_anode
2 (N.C.)
3 LED_cathode
LED PWB-F
CN-1
SM03B-GHS
1 LED_anode
2 (N.C.)
3 LED_cathode
C. Scanner, RSPF section
PHR-2
PHR-4
179228-3
179228-7
S4B-PH-K-S
+5V
1
HUD_RA
2
GND
3
4
TH_RA
AMP292130-3
TM_COUNT
1
D-GND
2
3
5VLED
292132-7
1
24V
2
GND
3
NC
4
CLK
5
ON/OFF
6
CW/CCW
7
LD
2
1
C1LUM_D
PGND
HUD_RA/TH_RA
OZFM
TM COUNT
PSFM
TNM
MM
RRC
C1PUC
C1LUM
ADUM
1
2
3
4
5
INT24V
/ADUMA
/ADUMB
/ADUMXA
/ADUMXB
AMP292156-3
1
3
OZFMOUT
2
2
OZFM_LD
3
1
DGND
179228-3
179228-3
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC
24VCL
1
1
2
2
/RRC
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC
1
1
24V
2
2
/C1PUC
PAP-05V-E / PALR-05VF-E
1
1
INT24V
/ADUMA
2
2
/ADUMB
3
3
4
4
/ADUMXA
5
5
/ADUMXB
PHR-4
PHR-6
XAP-03V-1
PHR-9-R
PHR-12
INT24V
PGND
PGND
/MM_CLK
/MMD
CW/CCW#
/MM_LD
(TM_COUNT)
DGND
5VN
CN32
5VN
1
HUD_RA
2
DGND
3
TH_RA
4
B4B-PH-K-S
OZFMOUT
3
OZFM_LD
2
DGND
1
B6B-PH-K-S
CN33
6
5
4
CN48
PSFM_V
1
PSFM_LD1
2
D-GND
3
B03B-XASK-1
TNM_D
2
PGND
1
B9B-PH-K-R
CN52
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
11 24V
12 /RRC
B12B-PH-K-S
24V
/C1PUC
C1LUM_D#
C1LUM_D#
DGND
6
7
8
9
10
INT24V
/ADUMA
/ADUMB
/ADUMXA
ADUMXB/
CN49
1
2
3
4
5
CN51
2
3
10
11
12
/APPD1
DGND
APPD1_5V
6
5
4
C1PED
DGND
C1PED_5V
C1LUD
GND
C1LUD_5V
CN35
3.3V
1
CRM_DT
2
CRM_CLK
3
DGND
4
B4B-PH-K-E
/C1SS
3
DGND
2
C1SS_5V
1
B9B-PH-K-S
CN53
9
8
7
3
/PPD1
2
DGND
PPD1_5V
1
B6B-PH-K-S
24V
TCS
DGND
CN50
6
5
4
24V
13
/MPFC
14
B14B-PHDSS
7
8
9
4
5
6
CN37
1
2
3
/MPED
DGND
MPED_5V
MPWD_3.3V
MPWD
DGND
/MPLD1
DGND
MPLD1_5V
/MTOP2
1
4
DGND
B4B-PH-K-S
/MTOP1
DGND
PCU PWB
PHR-4-BL
PHR-9
PHR-6
PHDR-14VS-2
PHR-4
/MTOP2
DGND
3
4
3.3V
MPWD
D-GND
4
5
6
/APPD1
D-GND
APPD1_5V
3
2
1
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
179228-3
PHNR-04-H
SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
24V
1
1
/MPFC
2
2
4
5
6
PS unit
1
2
3
AMP292130-3
/PPD1
DGND
PPD1_5V
PHNR-04-H
179228-3
PHR-3
179228-3
179228-2
179228-2
1
2
3
1
2
3
TSHR-04V-K
179228-3
179228-3
179228-3
1
2
3
MPED
MPWD
AMP292130-3
/MPED
DGND
MPED_5V
S3B-PH-K-S
3.3V
MPWD
DGND
MPLD1
MTOP1
MTOP2
AMP292130-3
/MPLD1
DGND
MPLD_5V
292250-2
/MTOP1
DGND
292250-2
/MTOP2
DGND
PHR-4
B4B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
TCS
DV unit
MPFC
Manual paper tray unit
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
Manual paper feed tray unit
3
1
2
4
3.3V
CRM_SDA
CRM_SCL
GND
CRUM
Toner cartridge
C1SS
C1LUD
AMP292130-3
C1LUD
D-GND
C1LUD_5V
AMP292130-3
/C1SS
DGND
C1SS_5V
C1PED
AMP292130-3
C1PED
D-GND
C1PED_5V
Paper feed unit
PPD1(PIN)
BU04PTRPH(D)(LF)(SN)
2
DVSET
3
3
24VCL
2
TCS
4
1
DGND
1
4
CZHR-06V-S/BU06P-TZ-S/CZHR-06V-S
/MPED
6
1
DGND
5
2
MPED_5V
4
3
4
5
6
PALR-06VF/PAP-06V-S
/MPLD1
1
1
D-GND
2
2
MPLD1_5V
3
3
3
4
PALR-04VF/PAP-04V-S
/MTOP1
1
1
2
2
DGND
D. Drive, Manual feed, DV, Tray 1 section, FAN
POD1
TO Finisher
DGND
292250-2
DSW_POC
1
DSW-POC
Job separator
MX-TR18
179228-2
179228-3
AMP292130-3
TFD2
1
DGND
2
TFD2_5V
3
TFD2
179228-3
AMP292130-3 179228-3
POD2
1
DGND
2
POD2_5V
3
POM
AMP292130-3
TFD1
1
D-GND
2
5VN
3
OSM
POGS1
179228-3
179228-3
POD2
TFD1
AMP292130-3
POD1
1
GND
2
5VLED
3
SHPOS
TFM
AMP292130-3
SHPOS
1
GND
2
5VNPD
3
Delivery unit
Dsub15pin
JAC-15P-3/JAC-15S-3
PGND
1
1
+24V
2
2
/FIN_CRDY
3
3
FIN_STS
4
4
/RES
5
5
N.C
6
6
N.C
7
7
N.C
8
8
N.C
9
9
N.C
10
10
/FIN_SRDY
11
11
FIN_CMD
12
12
+5V
13
13
/FIN_DET
14
14
F-GND
15
15
PAP-05V-E / PALR-05VF-E
INT24V
1
1
POMA
2
2
POMB
3
3
/POMA
4
4
/POMB
5
5
AMP292156-6
(NC)
6
1
24V
5
2
/B
4
3
/A
3
4
B
2
5
A
1
6
179228-6
179228-6
XAP-03V-1/XARR-03VF
24V
1
1
/POGS1a
2
2
/POGS1b
3
3
AMP292156-3
FUFM_V
1
3
GND
2
2
FUFM_LD1
3
1
179228-3
179228-3
SMR-02V-N
1
To PCU
2
CN11
SRA-21T-3
F-GND
TFD1
DGND
TFD1_5V
(NC)
OSM_INT24V
/OSMXB
/OSMXA
/OSMB
/OSMA
B-5 POM_INT24V
B-4 /POMA
B-3 /POMB
B-2 /POMXA
B-1 /POMXB
B28B-CZWHK-V-B-1
B-8
B-7
B-6
B-14
B-13
B-12
B-11
B-10
B-9
(NC)
(NC)
24V
/POGS1a
/POGS1b
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
PHR-9
CN46
TxD_FIN
1
RxD_FIN
2
/DTR_FIN
3
/DSR_FIN
4
RES_FIN
5
/TRC_FIN
(N.C)
6
RES_FINin
7
5VN
8
DGND
(N.C)
9
B9B-PH-K-S
PWB
CN3
10 POD2
DGND
9
POD2_5V
8
TFD2
7
DGND
6
TFD2_5V
5
DSW_POC
4
DGND
3
POUT2B_DET
2
DGND
1
CZHR-10V-S B10B-CZHK-B-1
CZHR-14V-S
CZHR-14V-S
FUFM_V#
DGND
FUFM_LD1
A-8
A-7
A-6
A-11 POD1
A-10 DGND
A-9 POD1_5V
CN43
A-14 SHPOS
A-13 DGND
A-12 SHPOS_5V
5
4
3
8
7
6
CN1
11
10
9
CZHR-11V-S
CN9
24V
1
DGND
2
/CV_COPY
3
/CV_COUNT
4
/CV_START
5
/CV_CA
6
/CV_CLCOPY
7
/CV_COLOR1
8
/CV_STAPLE
9
/CV_COLOR0
10
/CV_DUPLEX
11
5VN
12
/CV_SIZE0
13
/CV_SIZE1
14
/CV_SIZE2
15
/CV_SIZE3
16
B16B-PNDZS
CN38
24VCL
1
/PSPS
2
B2B-XH-A-E
XHP-2
CN22
24V
1
DGND
(NC)
2
INT24V
3
VHR-3N
B3P-VH
POUT2A_DET
2
DGND
1
B11B-CZHK-B-1
24V
/POGS2a
/POGS2b
TFD3
DGND
TFD3_5V
POD3
DGND
POD3_5V
PCU PWB
TFD3
DGND
TFD3_5V
4
5
6
TO COIN VENDOR
24VCL
1
1
2
2
/PSPS
PALR-03VF/PAP-03V-S
24V
1
1
/POGS2a
2
2
/POGS2b
3
3
4
5
6
PALR-06VF/PAP-06V-S
POD3
1
1
DGND
2
2
POD3_5V
3
3
INT24V
24V
XARR-03VF/XAP-03V-1
1
1
24V
2
2
/POGS2a
3
3
/POGS2b
TFD3
POGS2
AMP292130-3
TFD3
1
DGND
2
TFD3_5V
3
POD3
PSPS
Interlock switch
179228-3
179228-3
MX-TR17
AMP292130-3
POD3
1
DGND
2
POD3_5V
3
E. Paper exit (1st, 2nd, Right), ILSW, Finisher, CV section
PHR-7
CN12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(NC)
11
12
13
PAP-13V-S
CN13
1
2
3
4
(NC)
5
6
PAP-06V-S
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
B06B-PASK-1
CN11
1
2
3
4
5
(NC)
6
VHR-6N
CN14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
+12V
+12V
+5VN
+5VN
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
B13B-PASK-1
24V1
24V2
24V2
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
B6P-VH-B
DCCNT1
DCCNT2
FW
HLOUT_1
HLOUT_2
DGND
/HL_PR
B7B-PH-K-S
PS PWB
1
2
SMP-02V-NC
24V2
P-GND

3.3V
3.3V
DGND
DGND
9
10
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
B6P-VH
VHR-4N
VHR-6N
24V2
12V
D-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
SCN CNT PWB
DGND
+5VL
+5VL
DGND
MFPC PWB
+5VO
6
B10P-VH-B
5VN
7
8
12V
DGND
3
4
DGND
24V
CN16
1
CN47
1
2
3
4
B4P-VH
VHR-10N
TO Finisher
CN45
INT24V
1
DGND
2
DVBS_PWM/
3
DVBS_REM/
4
THV-_REM/
5
THV_REM/
6
DHV_REM/
7
TCDA#
8
GBS_PWM/
9
MHV_REM/
10
24V
11
B11B-PH-K-S 11CK-6H-P
PCU PWB
CN44
PSFM_V#
10
(NC)
PSFM_LD2
9
(NC)
DGND
8
(NC)
nRY_CNT
7
nOFF_CNT
6
FW
5
HL_UM_out
4
HL_US_out
3
DGND
2
HL_PR
1
PHR-10
B10B-PH-K-S
11CK-6H-P
HV
B11B-PH-K-S
11 INT24V
10 GND
9 DVBS PWM
8 DVBS REM
7 THV- REM
6 THV REM
5 DHV REM
4 TCDA#
3 GB PWM
2 MHV REM
1 24V
DVBS
B2P-VH
DHV
(NC)
THV
GB
MHV
VHR-2N
PS-187(White)
PS-187(Red)
DHV
THV
(To DV Drawer)
SPS-01T-187
SPS-01T-187
GB
MHV
F. DC power supply section, High voltage section
VLP-03V

1
AC SW
Live-in
Live-out
Neutral-out
VLP-02V
CN36
7
6
5
4
TH_UM
3
DGND
2
TH_US
1
DGND
B7B-PH-K-S 07CK-6H-PC
POSD
DGND
POSD_5V
CN5
WH_CNT
1
24V
2
B02B-PASK-1
Reactle
1
2
3
VLR-03V/VLP-03V
1
LIVE2
2
N.C
3
HL-OUTPUT2
VLR-02V/VLP-02V
1
LIVE1
2
HL-OUTPUT1
(NC)
04CK-6H-PC /BU04P-TR-P-H/PHNR-4-H
4
1
TH_UM
3
2
DGND
2
3
TH_US
1
4
DGND
03CK-6H-PC /BU03P-TR-P-H/PHNR-3-H
3
1
POSD
2
2
DGND
3
POSD_5V
1
(NC)
1
2
Japan : Standard / Other : Option
Dehumidify heater SW
Live-WH
1
172074-1 or PS-187
172074-7 or PS-187-R
1
Live-WH
CN2
1
Live-WH
2
(N.C)
(NC)
Live-WH
3
VHR-3N-R
B2P3-VH-R
CN4
Neutral_WH
1
(N.C)
2
(NC)
Live_WH
3
B2P3-VH VHR-3N
CN3
Neutral_WH
1
(N.C)
2
(NC)
Live_WH
3
B2P3-VH VHR-3N
Japan : Standard
Other : Option
CN1
Live_WH
1
(N.C)
2
(NC)
Neutral_WH
3
VHR-3N-BK B2P3-VH-BK
PAP-02V-S
WH PWB
200V series only
CN7
1
Neutral HL out1
2
(NC)
(NC)
3
Neutral HL out2
VHR-3N-R
B2P3-VH-RD
CN6
1
HEATER(L)
HEATER(L)
2
B02P-VL
CN10
1
LiveR-out
2
(NC)
(NC)
3
LiveR-in
B2P3-VH-B-E
CN5
1
Live-PCI
(NC)
2
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
3
Neutral-PCI
B2P3-VH-BK
PCU PWB
Neutral-in
3
B04P-VL
1
SW IN (LIVE)
PS-250-R(RED)
1
SW IN (NEUTRAL)
PS-250-R(RED)
VLP-04V
PS-250
SW OUT (NEUTRAL)
PS-250
SW OUT (LIVE)
AC cord
SRA-51T-4
CN1
1
Live
2
(NC)
3
Neutral
B03P-VL
INLET
Live
F-GND
Neutral
SRA-51T-4
CN1
1
Live
2
(NC)
3
Neutral
VLP-03V B03P-VL
AC cord
CN2
4
200V series
100V series
CN4
WH
3
Neutral-WH
2
(NC)
(NC)
1
Live-WH
B2P3-VH-B VHR-3N BK
PS PWB
CN54 PAP-03V-S
1
WH_24V
2
(NC)
(NC)
3
/WH_CNT
B03B-PASK-1
PCU PWB
D1.25-M3(Ni)
D1.25-M3(Ni)
POSD
Thermistor sub
Thermistor main
AMP292130-3
POSD
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD
3
WH-SCN
2nd paper tray unit
WH-CS2
1st paper tray unit
WH-CS1
Scanner unit
Fusing unit
ELP-02V/ELR-02VF
2
Live-WH
1
Neutral-WH
ELP-02V/ELR-02VF
2
Live-WH
1
Neutral-WH
D1.25-M3(Ni)
2
1
2
1
ELR-02V / ELP-02V
WH-N(SCAN)
2
WH-L(SCAN)
1
Heater lamp1
Heater lamp2
Thermostat2
Thermostat1
ELP-02V/ELR-02VF
2
Live-WH
1
Neutral-WH
ELP-02V/ELR-02VF
2
Live-WH
1
Neutral-WH
D1.25-M3(Ni)
2
1
2
1
2
1
Japan : Standard
Other : Option
G. AC power supply section, Fusing section
H. Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4 section
2nd paper tray unit

(MX-M266FP/MX-M316FP/MX-M316G/MX-M266N/MX-M316N/MX-M315N/MX-M315U : Standard)
(MX-M265N/MX-M265U : Option(MX-CS12))
PCU PWB
B28B-PUDSS-1(CN14) PUDP-28V-S
P-GND
24V
5VN
24V
NC
(C2LUM)
(PTRC2)
(C2PUC)
NC
(C4LUM)
(C4PUC)
(Y2)
(C3LUM)
(Y3)
(CASSELA)
(PTRC1)
(CASSELB)
NC
(CASSELC)
(C3PUC)
(CPFMA)
(CPFMB)
(CPFMXA)
(CPFMXB)
(Y1)
OPCASSEL
D-GND
D-GND
Option Cassete I/F PWB
B28B-PUDSS-1(CN5)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
P-GND
24V
5V
24V
NC
LUM2
TRCL2
PCL2
NC
LUM4
PCL4
(Y2)
LUM3
(Y3)
CSSELA#
TRCL3
CSSELB#
NC
CSSELC#
PCL3
AI#
BI#
/AI#
/BI#
(Y1)
OPCASSEL
D-GND
D-GND
B24B-PUDSS-1(CN9)
P-GND
24V
5V
24V
LUM4
NC
(Y2)
PCL4
(Y3)
LUM3
TRCL3
CSSELA#
NC
CSSELB#
PCL3
CSSELC#
BI#
AI#
/BI#
/AI#
OPCASSEL
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
PUDP-28V-S
B3B-PH-K-S(CN3)
/PCL2
NC
24V
1
2
3
Tray 2 paper feed

clutch
B3B-PH-K-K(BK)(CN2)
/TRCL2
NC
24V
1
2
3
Tray 2 vertical
transport clutch
5V
DF11-4DS-2C
B8B-PH-K-S(CN8) PHR-8
D-GND
PPD2
5V
PAP2
DRS2
LUD2
NC
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
5V
PPD2
D-GND
Tray 2
transport
detector
1
2
3
5V
PAP2
D-GND
Tray 2 paper
empty
detector
1
2
DRS2
D-GND
Tray 2 door
detection SW
1
2
3
5V
LUD2
D-GND
Tray 2 upper
limit detector
179228-3
179228-3
179228-2
179228-3
D-GND
DF11-6DS-2C
B3B-PH-K-E(BL)(CN7)
CSS2
NC
D-GND
1
2
3
PHR-3-BL
1
2
CSS2
D-GND
Tray 2 presence
detection SW
2
1
LUM2D
P-GND
Tray 2 lift motor
179228-2
B3B-PH-K-R(RD)(CN1)
LUM2D
NC
P-GND
1
2
3
03CK-6H-P
02CK-6H-P
To 2nd FAX
(Option)
CN29
GND
1
GND
2
3
+3.3V_F
4
+3.3V_F
5
nCNCT_FAX
6
FAXD_TXD_N
7
FAXD_TXD_P
8
+5V_(off)
9
nRES_FAX
10
FAXCS_TXD_P
11
FAXCS_TXD_N
12
GND
13
FAXD_RXD_N
14
FAXD_RXD_P
15
GND
16
FAXCS_RXD_P
FAXCS_RXD_N
17
+5V_(off)
18
GND
19
nFAXD_RTS
20
GND
21
nFAXD_CTS
22
FLVPP
23
nFAXCS_RTS
24
+5V_A
25
nFAXCS_CTS
26
+3.3V_F
27
+24V
28
+3.3V_F
29
GND
30
PGND
31
B31B-CSRK(L)(SN)

2
+5VHD
DGND
3
B03B-PASK
CN50
1
DGND
CN22
DGND
1
SATA_TXP
2
SATA_TXN
3
DGND
4
SATA_RXN
5
SATA_RXP
6
DGND
7
6SAT07P-328B-B5
CN41
INT5V
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
24V_FAX
4
5V0_FAX
5
3R3V_FAX
6
3R3V_FAX
7
3R3V_FAX
8
B8B-PH-K-S-B
[USB Hub]
CN43
SHIELD4
15
DGND4
14
D4+
13
D412
VBUS4
11
SHIELD3
10
DGND3
9
D3+
8
D37
VBUS3
6
SHIELD1
5
DGND1
4
D1+
3
D12
VBUS1
1
BM15B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN)
MFPC PWB
PAP-03V-S
PHR-8
GHR-15V-S
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
SRA-21T-4
F-GND
PHR-8
Shield4
DGND4
D4+
D4VBUS4
(NC)
CN47
INT5V
8
DGND
7
DGND
6
24V
5
5VO
4
3.3V
3
3.3V
2
3.3V
1
B8B-PH-K-S
OPTION
SRA-21T-4
F-GND
Shield1
1
DGND1
2
D1+
3
D14
VBUS1
5
B05B-PASK-1
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
USB-A
4
3
2
1
USB
(HD14 only)
SATA SIGNAL&POWER
GND
1
SATA_TXP
2
SATA_TXN
3
GND
4
SATA_RXN
5
SATA_RXP
6
GND
7
3.3V
1
3.3V
2
3.3V
3
DGND
4
DGND
5
DGND
6
+5VHD
7
+5VHD
8
+5VHD
9
DGND
10
DGND
11
DGND
12
+12V
13
+12V
14
+12V
15
HDD
Shield1
DGND1
D1+
D1VBUS1
USB Connector PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
PCU PWB
PAP-05V-S
(NC)
CZHR-06V-S
I. USB, FAX, PCI, HDD section
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
B28-PHDSS-B
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPFMA
SPFMA/
SPFMB
SPFMB/
SPFMO1
SPMA
SPMA/
SPMB
SPMB/
SPMO1
SPRS
STMPS
SRRC
SPFC
SPWS
SELA_
SELB_
SELC_
SSELO
SPPD4
SPFMO2
SPPD3
SPPD5
+5VPD
SPED
SOCD
CN14
B12B-PHD-SS
GND
GND
3.3V
3.3V
5V
12V
5VB
24VPD
5VO
24VPD
GND
GND
CN15
SCN-CNT PWB
(NC)
(NC)
SRA-21T-3
PHDR-28VS-1
(NC)
(NC)
PHR-12
SRA-21T-3
GND2
GND2
+3.3V
+5V
+24VPD
+24VPD
GND2
GND2
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPFMA
SPFMA/
SPFMB
SPFMB/
SPFMO1
SPRMA
SPRMA/
SPRMB
SPRMB/
SPRMO1
SPRS
STMPS
SRRC
SPFC
SPWS
SELA
SELB
SELC
SSELO
SPPD3
SPPD4
+5VPD
4
3
2
1
CN I
SPED/
N.C(SOCD/)
+5VO
+5VB
B34-PHDSS-B
34
33
8
7
6
5
2
1
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
CN A
PHR-4 B4B-PH-K-S
PHDR-34VS-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN G
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CN B
1
2
3
4
5
CN E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN H
B10B-PH-K-S
+5V_SPLS1
SPLS1
GND2
GND2
SPLS2
+5V_SPLS2
AVCC
SPWS
GND2
N.C.
B10B-PHDSS-B
+24VPD STMPS
(+5VPD)
+5VPD
N.C.
SPPD4
(GND2)
GND2
GND2
STMPU
STMPS/
B8B-PH-K-S
+24VPD SRRC
SRRC/
+5VPD
SPPD3
GND2
SOCD
GND2
+5V SOCD
CN C
B5B-PH-K-S
(+24VPD SPFC)
(SPFC/)
+24VPD SPRS
SPRS/
N.C.
B12B-PH-K-S
SPED
GND2
+5V SPED
+5VPD
SPPD1
GND2
+5VPD
SPPD5
GND2
+24VPD SCOV
GND2
+24V SCOV SW
B6B-PH-K-S
SPFMA/
+24VPD_SPFM
SPFMA
SPFMB
+24VPD_SPFM
SPFMB/
B6B-PH-K-R
SPUMA/
+24VPD_SPUM
SPUMA
SPUMB
+24VPD_SPUM
SPUMB/
RSPF DRIVER PWB
PHR-10
PHDR-10VS-2
PHR-8
PHR-5
PHR-12
PHR-6
PHR-6R
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
PHR-6R
PHR-6
SPF
6
5
4
3
2
1
SPUM
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24VPD SPRS
SPRS/
1
2
SRRC/
+24VPD SRRC
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
292254-4
GND2
STMPU
STMPS/
+24VPD STMPS
4
3
2
1
179228-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
AVCC
SPWS
GND2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
179228-4
SRA-21T-4
+5VPD
SPPD3
GND2
SOCD
GND2
+5V SOCD
1
2
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
1
2
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
SPFMA/
+24VPD_SPFM
SPFMA
SPFMB
+24VPD_SPFM
SPFMB/
SPUMA/
+24VPD _SPUM
SPUMA
SPUMB
+24VPD _SPUM
SPUMB/
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
SPED
GND2
+5V SPED
+5VPD
SPPD1
GND2
+5VPD
SPPD5
GND2
SRRC
SPRS
SOCD
GND2
+5V SOCD
+5VPD
SPPD3
GND2
(OPTION)
+5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1
GND2
BL
BR
GY
SPWS
2
1
3
AVCC
SPWS
GND2
GND2
SPLS2
+5VPD SPLS2
179228-3
SPLS2
3
1
2
+5VPD
SPPD4
GND2
STMPS
179228-3
SPLS1
1
2
3
179228-3(BLACK)
SPPD4
1
2
3
179228-3
SOCD
1
2
3
SRA-21T-4
+24VPD SCOV
SCOV SW
179228-3(BLACK)
SPPD3
2
1
PS-187/SPS-01T-187
SCOV
SPPD2
1
2
3
179228-3(BLACK)
SPPD1
1
2
3
179228-3(BLACK)
1
2
3
179228-3
SPED
J. RSPF (56opm) section
SCAN CONTROL PWB
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPFMA
SPFMA/
SPFMB
SPFMB/
SPFMO1
SPMA
SPMA/
SPMB
SPMB/
SPMO1
SPRS
STMPS
SRRC
SRRS
SPWS
SELA_
SELB_
SELC_
SSELO
SPPD4
SPFMO2
SPPD3
(NC)
5VPD
SPED
SOCD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
CN14
B28B-PHDSS
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN15
B12B-PHDSS
GND
GND
24V
5VO
24V
5VB
12V
5V
3.3V
3.3V
GND
GND
(NC)
SRA-21T-3
SAA-21T-3.5L
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
1
2
3
4
5VB
5VO
SOCD
SPED
GND
GND
SPPD1
SPPD2
24VPD
24VPD
5V
3.3V
SPFMA
SPFMA/
SPFMB
SPFMB/
SPFMO1
SPUMA
SPUMA/
SPUMB
SPUMB/
SPUMO1
SPRS
STMPS
SRRC
SPFC
SPWS
SELA
SELB
SELC
SELOUT
SPPD3
SPPD4
5VPD
GND
GND
CN-I
B4B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN-A
B34B-PHDSS
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5V_SPLS1
SPLS1
GND
GND
SPLS2
5V_SPLS2
AVCC(3.3V)
SPWS
GND
(NC)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN-H
B10B-PH-K-S
5VPD
5VPD
(NC)
SPPD4
GND
GND
GND
STMPU
/STMPS
24VPD STMPS
CN-D
B10B-PHDSS-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN-C
B8B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
CN-E
B5B-PH-K-S
24VPD
/SRRC
5VPD
SPPD3
GND
SOCD
GND
5V SOCD
24VPD
/SPFC
24VPD
/SPRS
(NC)
SPED
GND
5VB SPED
5VPD
SPPD1
GND
5VPD
SPPD2
GND
24VPD
GND
DSW_24VPD
CN-B
B12B-PH-K-S
/SPFMAout
24VPD_SPFM
SPFMAout
SPFMBout
24VPD_SPFM
/SPFMBout
CN-F
B6B-PH-K-S
RSPF DRIVER PWB
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
SRA-21T-4
6
5
4
3
2
1
SPFM
SRA-21T-4
SPFMA/
+24VPD_SPFM
SPFMA
SPFMB
+24VPD_SPFM
SPFMB/
+24VPD SPUC
SPUC/
1
2
+24VPD SPRS
SPRS/
1
2
+24VPD SRRC
SRRC/
1
2
+5VPD
SPPD3
GND2
SOCD
GND2
+5V SOCD
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
AVCC
SPWS
GND2
1
2
3
SRA-21T-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
1
2
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-4
179228-3
SPED
GND2
+5V SPED
+5VPD
SPPD1
GND2
+5VPD
SPPD2
GND2
SRRS
SPRS
SPUC
SRA-21T-4
+24VPD SCOV
SCOV SW
SOCD
GND2
+5V SOCD
+5VPD
SPPD3
GND2
BL
BR
GY
SPWS
2
1
3
SPLS2
+5VPD
SPPD4
GND2
AVCC
SPWS
GND2
GND2
SPLS2
+5VPD SPLS2
+5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1
GND2
179228-3
3
1
2
SPLS1
179228-3
1
2
3
SPPD4
6-179228-3(BLACK)
1
2
3
SOCD
179228-3
1
2
3
SPPD3
6-179228-3(BLACK)
2
1
SCOV
PS-187/SPS-01T-187
SPPD2
1
2
3
6-179228-3(BLACK)
SPPD1
1
2
3
6-179228-3(BLACK)
1
2
3
SPED
K. RSPF (31opm) section
Service Manual
MX-M316N
[13]
OTHERS
1.
VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
A. HDD/SD card memory map

(1) HDD partition
Option HDD installed
HDD size = 160GB (Actual size 149GB)
Outer
tracks
offset
(GB)
0
[GB]
[I-1] 14GB
10
20
[I-2] 72GB
30
40
50
60
70
[I-3] 1GB
Not used
80
90
[S-1] 2.5GB
100
[S-5] 16GB
[S-2]
[S-3] 2GB Not used
0.5GB
120
140
[S-7] 2GB Not used
[S-8] 16GB Not used
130
Inner
tracks
[S-4] 2GB Not used
[S-6] 4GB
110
[I-4] 1GB [L-1] 1GB
[S-9] 6GB
[S-10] 8GB
[L-2] 1GB
[GB]
(2) HDD data contents

I-1
I-2
I-3
I-4
L-1
No.
File system
Image data
Image data
Image data
Image data
Not available
S-1
Universal
S-2
Universal
S-3
S-4
S-5
S-6
S-7
S-8
S-9
S-10
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
L-2
Universal
Stored data
Image data (ERDH/Temporary storage)
Image data (Document filing)
Not available
FAX/Internet Fax receive images
System storage data (Address book, image send system registration data (sender's
information, meta data, etc.), FSS collection data)
Download font
User macro
Database system file
System log
System setting data (Backup)
Document filing (Database)
Job log (Database)
Job completion list
Not available
Not available
Spool area for printer
Application work area (User file used in USB direct print)
Not available
Not available
Data backup when installing DSK (User data (Address book, account information))
e-manual
Watermark
Not available
MX-M316N OTHERS 13 1
NOTE
1000 documents, 3000 images
3000 documents, 20000 images
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
(3) SD card partition

SD card size = 4GB (Actual size 3.6GB)
100
200
300
400
500
600
[L-101] 500MB
[S-101] 500MB
[S-102] 500MB
[S-105]
100MB
700
800
900
[MB]
800
900
[MB]
[S-103] 924MB
[I-101] 1GB
2
3
[GB]
Option HDD uninstalled

SD card size = 8GB (Actual size 7.2GB)
100
[L-101] 500MB
[S-103] 924MB
[S-104]
200MB
200
300
400
500
600
[S-101] 200MB
[I-101] 500MB
700
[S-102] 200MB
[S-105]
100MB
[I-102] 500MB
3
4
5
[I-103] 4GB
6
7
[GB]
(4) SD card data contents

No.
L-101
File system
Not available
S-101
Universal
S-102
S-105
S-103
Universal
Universal
Universal
I-101
Image data
Stored data
ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Boot animation
Boot (CN Update mode)
ARM9 firmware
lang.sfu (language data)
graph.sfu (Animation data)
font
web help
spdl
Option FontROM
Same as above (Mirror)
Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
Key operator setting storage data
IMS job management data
FAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty)
FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential between new and old)
Account management information
FAX/Internet Fax receive images (for backup) (HDD 1-4 area data backup)
NOTE

No.
L-101
File system
Not available
S-101
Universal
S-102
S-105
S-103
Universal
Universal
Universal
S-104
I-101
I-102
I-103
Universal
Image data
Image data
Image data
Stored data
Boot animation
Boot (CN Update mode)
ARM9 firmware
lang.sfu (language data)
graph.sfu (Animation data)
font
web help
spdl
Option FontROM
S-101 area data backup (mirror)
Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
Key operator setting storage data
IMS job management data
FAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty)
FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/User authentication data
System log
S-105 area data backup (mirror)
FAX/Internet Fax receive images
FAX/Internet Fax receive images (Backup)
ERDH work
NOTE
Not used when an option

HDD is installed.
2.
Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD and the SD Card
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)

CAUTION: Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1)
Attach the flash ROM, the memory, the EEPROM, the SD card etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the main unit.
CAUTION: Ground your body with grounding band during the work.
2)
When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.
3)
Set as follows after restarting the main unit.

At this timing, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.
(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-02 (clear the software switches related to FAX).
CAUTION: Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.
B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacement

Note for HDD replacement
Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
HDD storage data and backup
Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
Reinstall and update procedures of watermark data.
(1) HDD storage data and backup

Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage data
cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the HDD
storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
No.
Data kind
Before installation
(When shipping
from the factory)
Available
Not available
After installation
(After use by
users)
Available
Available
Enable/
Disable of
data backup
Disable
Enable
Not available
Available
Enable
Not available
Available
Enable
*1
Sim56-2 /
Device cloning /
Storage backup
Sim56-2 /
Device cloning /
Storage backup
Sim56-2
Not available
Available
Disable
Not available
Disable
Backup means
Enable/
Disable of
data reinstall
Enable
Enable
Data reinstall
procedures
1
2
e-Manual
Address book
Not available
Available
Disable
Not available
Disable
Image send series

registration data (Senders
information, meta data, etc.)
User authentication
Account management
Japanese FEP dictionary
(Learning)
Chinese FEP dictionary
(Learning)
JOB LOG
Not available
Available
Enable
Disable
8
9
10
JOB completion list

New N/A (FSS) information
User font (Added)
Not available
Not available
Not available
Available
Available
Available
Disable
Disable
Disable
Perform with
WEB PAGE.
Not available
Not available
Not available
Disable
Disable
Enable
Service
or User
11
User macro
Not available
Available
Disable
Not available
Enable
12
Document filing
Not available
Available
Enable
Enable
13
Some of system setting

data
Not available
Available
Enable
14
15
Watermark
FAX reception data
Available
Not available
Available
Available
Disable
Enable
Perform with
WEB PAGE.
Sim56-2 /
Device cloning /
Storage backup
*2
Sim66-62
4
5
6
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.
Sim49-3
Sim56-2 /
Device cloning /
Storage backup
Sim56-2 /
Device cloning /
Storage backup
Sim56-2
Reinstall
operator
Perform with
WEB PAGE.
Perform with
WEB PAGE.
Perform with
WEB PAGE.
Sim56-2 /
Device cloning /
Storage backup
Sim49-5
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be

backed up
(3)
a. Work contents and procedures
a. Display when HDD breakdown
Procedures
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
When a new HDD

(blank HDD, service part) is
When a used HDD
used, or when a HDD which
(used in the same
is normal but a program
model) is used *
error occurs in it is used.
Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing)
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB
memory.)
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User
or servicing)
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
data are given to the user.)
Replace the HDD.
Boot the complex machine.
Boot the complex
Formatting is automatically
machine.
performed.
The trouble code, U2-05,
is displayed. -> Cancel
with SIM16.
Since a blank HDD is
Use SIM62-1 to format
automatically formatted, there
the HDD.
is no need to perform
formatting procedure with SIM.
Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
Fax models.)
Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. -> Use SIM49-5 to
install the watermark data to the HDD. -> After booting the
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
to import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
Step 2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)
Replacement procedures when the HDD storage data

cannot be backed up due to breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 is
popped up.
In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD must
be replaced.
b. Work contents and procedures
Procedures
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
When a new HDD

(blank HDD, service part) is
used, or when a HDD which
is normal but a program
error occurs in it is used.
Install a HDD to the machine,
and boot the complex machine.
Formatting is automatically
performed.
When a used HDD

(used in the same
model) is used *
Install a HDD to the
machine, and boot the
complex machine.
The trouble code, U2-05,
is displayed. -> Cancel
with SIM16.
Use Sim62-1 to format
the HDD.
Since a blank HDD is

automatically formatted, there
is no need to perform
formatting procedure with SIM.
When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
data are given to the user.)
Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
Fax models.)
Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. -> Use SIM49-5 to
install the watermark data to the HDD. -> After booting the
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
shipping.
(4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD storage

Operation Manual data
1)
(5)
1)
Obtain the Operation Manual data.
Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web
site (Tech-DS home page).
Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on the
web site (Tech-DS home page).
Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing

the file hierarchy.
Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing

the file hierarchy.
NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the
HDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in the
memory are compared with the files in the HDD and only
the files which satisfy the following conditions are written
into the HDD.
To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx" and

"**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation Manual data
(**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files are copied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also are copied.
NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the
HDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in the
memory are compared with the files in the HDD and only
the files which satisfy the following conditions are written
into the HDD.
Watermark data reinstall and update procedures

Obtain the watermark data.
The file size is different.

The time stamp is different.
The file exists only in the USB memory.
2)
The file size is different.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
The time stamp is different.

The file exists only in the USB memory.
CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to
another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be
overwritten and a trouble may be generated.
2)
&/26(
:$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5
),/(
),/(
',5!)2/'(5
',5!:0

6,08/$7,21
7(67
12
&/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5
),/(
),/(
',5!)2/'(5

',5!0$18$/
3)
Insert the USB memory into the machine.

When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1.

3)
4)
Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to the
watermark data install menu.)
5)

Insert the USB memory into the machine.

When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1.
4)
Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen shifts
to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
5)
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons are

changed from gray-out to active display.
6)
When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data are

installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of
an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.

[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons are
changed from gray-out to active display.
6)
When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual is

installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of
an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
C. Procedures necessary for SD card replacement

(1) SD card data and backup
Some SD card storage data can be backed up, and some data cannot. Some SD card storage data can be reinstalled, and some data cannot.
If the SD card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the SD card referring to the
storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the SD card.
The SD card includes the following data.
SD card backup
Partition
number
L-101
ICU firmware data
S-101
ICU firmware fixed data

(Pre-install)
S-102
S-105

(Mirror)
System data
S-103
User data
I-101
Enable/Disable
of data backup
Disable
Stored data
FAX reception data

lang.sfu
graph.sfu
Boot animation
Boot (CN)
ARM9 firmware
font
web help
spdl
Option FontROM
Same as above
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable/Disable
of data reinstall
Enable
Data reinstall
procedures
SIM49-1
(BOOT cannot be
installed again.)
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enble
Enable
SIM49-1
SIM49-1
SIM49-1
SIM49-1
SIM49-1
Setting value data file (System

setting/SIM setting data (Image
quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
System setting data
Key operator custom setting data
(Data changed from the default)
Disable
SIM56-2
Enable
SIM56-2
Enable
Enable
sim56-02
System setting data backup device cloning
Enable
Enable
SIM56-2
FEP learning data (Japanese/

Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential
between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/
User authentication data
Home screen customize data
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
FAX/Internet Fax reception image

data
Enable
1)
Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB memory.
2)
When the operation panel home screen has been customized,

backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function.
3)
When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use

SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data cannot
be restored to the machine.)
4)
Replace the SD card with a new one.
5)
6)
Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory. (This is in order

to obtain consistency between the HDD data and the image
related memory.)
7)
Backup means
Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
Enable
sim56-02
Enable
SIM56-2
Enable

SIM66-62
Enable
8)
Disable
Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the device

cloning function.
CAUTION: When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the specified SD card supplied as a service part.
The firmware required for booting must be included in
the SD card used in this machine. The commercially
available SD cards have no such data.
NOTE: MEMO: When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be canceled by SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be
some trouble in the SD card.
SD card backup
Partition
number
L-101
Enable/Disable of
data backup
Disable
Stored data
ICU firmware data
S-101

(Pre-install)
S-102
S-105

(Mirror)
System data
S-103
User data
I-101
FAX reception data
I-102
FAX reception data

lang.sfu
graph.sfu
Boot animation
Boot (CN)
ARM9 firmware
font
web help
spdl
Option FontROM
Same as above
Backup means
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable/Disable
of data reinstall
Enable
Data reinstall
procedures
SIM49-1
(BOOT cannot be
installed again.)
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
SIM49-1
SIM49-1
SIM49-1
SIM49-1
SIM49-1
Setting value data file (System

setting/SIM setting data (Image
quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
System setting data
Key operator custom setting data
(Data changed from the default)
Disable
SIM56-2
Enable
SIM56-2
Enable
Enable
sim56-02
Enable
Enable
SIM56-2
FAX reception data (For power

shut off and paper empty)
FEP learning data (Japanese/
Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential
between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/
User authentication data
Home screen customize data
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Address Data
Enable

data
data (Backup)
Enable
sim56-02
Enable
SIM56-2
Enable
Enable

System setting data backup storage backup
Enable

System setting data backup storage backup
SIM66-62
Enable
SIM66-62
Disable
1)
Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB memory.
2)
When the address book has been registered, use the storage
backup function to backup the address book data.
3)
When the operation panel home screen has been customized,

backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function.
4)
When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use

SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data cannot
be restored to the machine.)
5)
Replace the SD card with a new one.
6)
7)
Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory.
8)
Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
9)
Restore the address book data backed up in the procedure 2). By

using the storage backup function.
Enable
Disable
CAUTION: When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the specified SD card supplied as a service part.
The firmware required for booting must be included in
the SD card used in this machine. The commercially
available SD cards have no such data.
NOTE: When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be canceled by
SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be some trouble in the SD card.
10) Restore the data backed up in procedure 3) by using the device

cloning function.
3.
HDD/SD card SIM format operation
The relations between SIM62/66 and formatted (deleted) data are as follows:
*1: Physical format ("0" is written to the all area.)
*2: Logical format (Only the management area is initialized.)
*3: Nothing is done.
SIM66-10 FAX image memory clear
SIM62-8 Hard disk format (Excluding the system area)
HDD
HDD
Partition
number
I-1
I-2
I-4
L-1
S-1
S-10
S-2
S-3
S-5
S-6
S-9
Partition
ERDH work + Temporary storage
Document filing data (Standard + User)
FAX/Internet Fax reception data
System storage data
User data 1
Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark)
Application #1 (Job log data)
Redial information of the address book
Printer spooler
Application work
DSK data save
*3
*3
*2
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
Partition
number
I-1
I-2
I-4
L-1
S-1
S-10
S-2
S-5
S-6
S-9
Partition
System storage data
User data 1
Printer spooler
Application work
DSK data save
*1
*1
*1
*3
*1
*3
*1
*1
*1
*1
SD Card
SD Card
Partition
number
I-101
L-101
S-101
S-102
S-103
S-105
Partition
ICU firmware
ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install)
ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror)
User data 2
System data (System setting/ SIM setting data
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
*2
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
Partition
number
I-101
L-101
S-101
S-102
S-103
S-105
Partition
ICU firmware
User data 2
*1
*3
*3
*3
*1
*3
SIM62-10 Job complete list (Job log data) delete
SIM62-1 Hard disk format
HDD
HDD
Partition
number
I-1
I-2
I-4
L-1
S-1
S-10
S-2
S-5
S-6
S-9
Partition
System storage data
User data 1
Printer spooler
Application work
DSK data save
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*3
*1
*1
*1
*1
Partition
number
I-1
I-2
I-4
L-1
S-1
S-10
S-2
S-5
S-6
S-9
Partition
System storage data
User data 1
Printer spooler
Application work
DSK data save
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*2
*3
*2
*3
SD Card
SD Card
Partition
number
L-101
S-101
S-102
S-105
S-103
I-101
Partition
ICU firmware
User data 2
*3
*3
*3
*3
Partition
number
I-101
L-101
S-101
S-102
S-103
S-105
*1
*1
Partition
ICU firmware
User data 2
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
SIM62-11 Document filing data delete

HDD
Partition
number
I-1
I-2
I-4
L-1
S-1
S-10
S-2
S-5
S-6
S-9
Partition
System storage data
User data 1
Printer spooler
Application work
DSK data save
*2
*2
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*2
*3
*3
SD Card
Partition
number
I-101
L-101
S-101
S-102
S-103
S-105
Partition
ICU firmware
User data 2
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
SIM62-13 Hard disk format (Manual area only)

HDD
Partition
number
I-1
I-2
I-4
L-1
S-1
S-10
S-2
S-5
S-6
S-9
Partition
System storage data
User data 1
Printer spooler
Application work
DSK data save
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*2
*3
*3
*3
*3
SD Card
Partition
number
I-101
L-101
S-101
S-102
S-103
S-105
Partition
ICU firmware
User data 2
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
4.
SERVICE WEB PAGE
A. General
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Menu/Item
Password Setting
Output of Test Page
Font/Form Download
Device Cloning
Filing Data Backup

User Control
User Control 2
Job Log
Save Job Log

View Job Log
Update of Firmware
Administration Settings
Syslog*1
Storage/Send Settings
Save/ Delete Syslog
View Syslog
Function and content

Used to set the password to enter the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Used to print out the test page (system setting contents).
Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and other resources are downloaded to the HDD and controlled.
(PS, PCL5 only)
Used to import/export the system setting information in XML format. By importing the export file to the other device, the
setting values and setting contents of the device can be copied to another device. This function is useful to set the same
setting to two or more machines efficiently.
Used to import/export the document filing data in the unit of folder.
Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the screen is shifted to the setting screen of user management.
Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group by authority of the serviceman.
(Select among preset items.)
Used to save the Job Log.
Used to display the Job Log.
Used to update the firmware version.
Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
Keep all the items selected.
Used to save or delete the log data.
Used to display the log data.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested in order to troubleshoot,
use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.
5.
Details and operation procedures
A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page

exclusively used for the serviceman
1)
Boot a browser program.
2)
Enter the specified

URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the servicing page menu.
C. Output of Test Page
MX-XXXX
Default password: "service"
MX-XXXX
1)
Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.

When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the items
in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out.
D. Font/Form Download
NOTE: The password can be optionally changed in the Password Setting menu.
MX-XXXX
If the password is changed and forgotten, use SIM24-31 to

reset the password to the default.
B. Password Setting
MX-XXXX
(1)
Download of Font, Form, and Macro
1)
Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.
2)
Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)

3)
Click "Download" button.
4)
Click "Submit" (registration) button.

The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2)
Delete of downloaded font
Procedures to delete a file separately

* The password can be optionally changed in the following procedures.
1)
Enter a new password.
2)
Enter the new password again to make confirmation.
3)
1)
Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,

and click "Delete" button.
2)
Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press Yes

key.
3)

The file in the HDD is deleted.
(3)
Procedures to delete all the files at a time
1)
Click "Initialize" button.
2)
Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press OK

key.
3)
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files can

be set to write protect.
E. Device Cloning
G. User Control 1
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
1)
Enter the password to log in.

Default Password: admin
The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.
(1) Export
1)
Select an item to be backed up.
2)
Click "Execute" button.
H. User Control 2
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
MX-XXXX
When the password is set, the set password must be entered

when importing.
(2) Import
1)
Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up file.
(File name: *****.bin)
2)
Click "Execute" button to execute import.

If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
3)
Reboot the machine.
F. Filing Data Backup

1)
Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group.
(The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group must
be set in advance.)
MX-XXXX
(Example of use)
The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the Pages
Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions in
advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in this
mode for servicing work.
I. Job Log
(1)
MX-XXXX
(1) Export
1)
Save Job Log
Select the folder to be backed up.

The list display conditions can be specified by changing the index
and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
2)

Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File name:
*****.bin)
3)
Click "Update" button.
(2) Import
1)
Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
2)
3)
Click "Update" button.
The target file is imported.
1)
Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job Log
to save it.
(2) View Job Log
MX-XXXX
1)
Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting, all
the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items which
are not to be displayed.)
2)
Click "Show" (display) button.

The Jog Log is displayed.
J. Update of Firmware
MX-XXXX
1)
Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.
2)
After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.

The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now processing..." is displayed.
K. Syslog
(3)
Save/ Delete Syslog
There are following functions in the Syslog mode.

This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to troubleshoot
when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshooting,
use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.
Syslog
Administration Settings
Storage/Send Settings
Save/ Delete Syslog
View Syslog
MX-XXXX
Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Set all the items selected.
Log data save, delete
Log data display
MX-XXXX
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.
(4)
View Syslog
MX-XXXX
(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

Set to the default.
MX-XXXX
1)
Select a Syslog item to be displayed.
2)
Click "Show" button.

The Syslog is displayed.
L. FSS (Field Support System) Setting

(2) Storage/Send Settings
1)
Set the following items.

Use Proxy Server: Yes/No
Keep all the items selected.
Setting of Scheduled Polling: Allow/Inhibit

Interval of Scheduled Polling: 1 - 60 min
Setting of Manual Polling: Allow/Inhibit
Status Notification: On/Off
MX-XXXX
2)
Click the Submit (Registration) button.
MX-XXXX
6.
TOOL LIST
Name
SIT chart
Gray test chart
Color image density sensor calibration jig
Kynar powder
Grease (HANARL FL-955R)
Conduction grease (FLOIL GE-676)
Grease (FLOIL G-313S)
Grease (JFE552)
Stearic acid powder
Grease (FLOIL GP-501MR)
Grease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020)
Grease (MOLYKOTE BR-2 Plus)
Part code
UKOG-0280FCZZ/UKOG-0280FCZ1
UKOG-0162FCZZ
UKOG-0318FCZZ
UKOG-0123FCZZ
UKOG-0299FCZZ
UKOG-0012QSZZ
UKOG-0307FCZZ
UKOG-0235FCZZ
UKOG-0312FCZZ
UKOG-0013QSZZ
UKOG-0158FCZZ
UKOG-0097FCZZ
Note
For transfer belt

Other shaft
OPC drum
RSPF paper feed roller shaft
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Lead-Free
5mm
Solder composition
code (Refer to the
table at the right.)
Solder composition
Solder composition code
Sn-Ag-Cu
Sn-Ag-Bi
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi
Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
Bi-Sn-Ag-P
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK
Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT

solder is about 220C, which
is about
40C higher
than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
XXXX
BYSHARP
CORPORATION
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature
components.
Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
ALLofRIGHTS
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
tip after completion of soldering work.
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,

photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT

(Danish)
ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English)
Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions.
(Finnish)
VAROITUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French)
ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish)
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German)
Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
BATTERY DISPOSAL
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES
CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE)
QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
#/092)'(4 "9 3(!20 #/20/2!4)/.

!LL RIGHTS RESERVED
0RODUCED IN *APAN FOR ELECTRONIC $ISTRIBUTION
.O PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE REPRODUCED
STORED IN A RETRIEVAL SYSTEM OR TRANSMITTED
IN ANY FORM OR BY ANY MEANS
ELECTRONIC MECHANICAL PHOTOCOPYING RECORDING OR OTHERWISE
WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE PUBLISHER
4RADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
v -ICROSOFT 7INDOWS 7INDOWS 7INDOWS -E 7INDOWS .4
7INDOWS 7INDOWS 80 7INDOWS 6ISTA 7INDOWS 7INDOWS
7INDOWS 7INDOWS 3ERVER 7INDOWS3ERVER

3ERVERAND )NTERNET %XPLORERARE
7INDOWS
REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OR
TRADEMARKS OF -ICROSOFT #ORPORATION IN THE 53!AND OTHER COUNTRIES
v 0OST3CRIPT IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v -ACINTOSH -AC /3 !PPLE4ALK %THER4ALK ,ASER 7RITER AND 3AFARI ARE REGISTERED
TRADEMARKS OR TRADEMARKS OF !PPLE #OMPUTER )NC
v )"- 0#!4 AND 0OWER 0# ARE TRADEMARKS OF )NTERNATIONAL "USINESS -ACHINES
#ORPORATION
v !CROBAT 2EADER #OPYRIGHT !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED !LL RIGHTS
RESERVED !DOBE THE !DOBE LOGO !CROBAT AND THE !CROBAT LOGO ARE TRADEMARKS OF
!DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v 0#, IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF THE (EWLETT 0ACKARD #OMPANY
v 3HARPDESK IS A TRADEMARK OF 3HARP #ORPORATION
v !LL OTHER TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHTS ARE THE PROPERTY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE OWNERS
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions
CS Promotion Center
First Edition : April 2015
Latest edition: June 2016

Service Sharp MX-M266N

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Service Sharp MX-M266N

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

1

NOTE FOR SERVICING

PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING

1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

3. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii

4. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

8. Relation between model names and names

3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

4. Dial tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

2. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2. Other related items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

4. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS

3. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

NOTE FOR SERVICING

* Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.

1. Precautions for servicing

* Keep the power cable away from a heat source.

3. Note for installing site

* Place of extreme vibrations

* When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it,

2. Warning for servicing

* Poorly ventilated place

It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

* Place of direct sunlight.

4. Note for handling PWB and electronic

* Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

* Place of much dust

* Place near a wall

* Unstable or irregular surface

MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU

Screw kinds and tightening torques

* When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the

* When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures

Tapping screws (for iron)

6. Note for handling the drum unit, the

* Avoid working at a place with strong lights.

* Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign

8. Relation between model names and

7. Screw tightening torque

MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

Name in the manual

500 SHEET PAPER TRAY

PS3 EXPANSION KIT